2012 GMC Terrain Owner Manual M - Owner Center Home GMC Terrain Owner Manual M Vehicle Care..... 10-1 General ... when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions

Black plate (1,1)GMC Terrain Owner Manual (Include Mex) - 2012

2012 GMC Terrain Owner Manual M

In Brief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2Initial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Vehicle Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Performance andMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

Keys, Doors, andWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1Keys and Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Vehicle Security. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Exterior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Interior Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

Seats and Restraints . . . . . . . . . 3-1Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Airbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Storage Compartments . . . . . . . . 4-1Additional Storage Features . . . 4-2Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Instruments and Controls . . . . 5-1Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Information Displays . . . . . . . . . . 5-23Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Vehicle Personalization . . . . . . . 5-33

Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Lighting Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Infotainment System . . . . . . . . . 7-1Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Rear Seat Infotainment . . . . . . . 7-22

Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-35Trademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Climate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Driving and Operating . . . . . . . . 9-1Driving Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Starting and Operating . . . . . . . 9-23Engine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Automatic Transmission . . . . . . 9-32Drive Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Ride Control Systems . . . . . . . . 9-37Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Object Detection Systems . . . . 9-43Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60Conversions and Add-Ons . . . 9-67


2012 GMC Terrain Owner Manual M

Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2Vehicle Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Wheels and Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83

Service and Maintenance . . . 11-1General Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3Special ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and Parts . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance Records . . . . . . . 11-15

Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Identification . . . . . . . . . 12-1Vehicle Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Customer Information . . . . . . . 13-1Customer Information . . . . . . . . 13-1Reporting Safety Defects . . . . 13-19Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacy. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

OnStar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1OnStar Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2OnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . i-1


Introduction iii

The names, logos, emblems,slogans, vehicle model names,and vehicle body designs appearingin this manual including, but notlimited to, GM, the GM logo, GMC,the GMC Truck Emblem, andTERRAIN are trademarks and/orservice marks of General MotorsLLC, its subsidiaries, affiliates,or licensors.

This manual describes features thatmay or may not be on your specificvehicle either because they areoptions that you did not purchaseor due to changes subsequent tothe printing of this owner manual.Please refer to the purchasedocumentation relating to yourspecific vehicle to confirm eachof the features found on yourvehicle. For vehicles first soldin Canada, substitute the name“General Motors of Canada Limited”for GMC Motor Division whereverit appears in this manual.

Keep this manual in the vehicle forquick reference.

Canadian Vehicle Owners

Propriétaires Canadiens

A French language copy of thismanual can be obtained from yourdealer or from:

On peut obtenir un exemplaire dece guide en français auprès duconcessionnaire ou à l'adressesuivante:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

1-800-551-4123Numéro de poste 6438 de languefrançaisewww.helminc.com

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 20846011 A First Printing ©2011 General Motors LLC. All Rights Reserved.


iv Introduction

Using this ManualTo quickly locate informationabout the vehicle, use the Indexin the back of the manual. It is analphabetical list of what is in themanual and the page numberwhere it can be found.

Danger, Warnings, andCautionsWarning messages found on vehiclelabels and in this manual describehazards and what to do to avoid orreduce them.

Danger indicates a hazard with ahigh level of risk which will result inserious injury or death.

Warning or Caution indicates ahazard that could result in injury ordeath.

{ WARNING

These mean there is somethingthat could hurt you or otherpeople.

Notice: This means there issomething that could resultin property or vehicle damage.This would not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty.

A circle with a slash through itis a safety symbol which means“Do Not,” “Do not do this,” or“Do not let this happen.”

SymbolsThe vehicle has components andlabels that use symbols instead oftext. Symbols are shown along withthe text describing the operation orinformation relating to a specificcomponent, control, message,gauge, or indicator.

M : This symbol is shownwhen you need to see your ownermanual for additional instructions orinformation.

* : This symbol is shownwhen you need to see a servicemanual for additional instructionsor information.


Introduction v

Vehicle Symbol Chart

Here are some additional symbolsthat may be found on the vehicleand what they mean. For moreinformation on the symbol, referto the Index.

9 : Airbag Readiness Light

# : Air Conditioning

! : Antilock Brake System (ABS)

$ : Brake System Warning Light

" : Charging System

I : Cruise Control

B : Engine Coolant Temperature

O : Exterior Lamps

# : Fog Lamps

. : Fuel Gauge

+ : Fuses

3 : Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger

j : LATCH System ChildRestraints

* : Malfunction Indicator Lamp

: : Oil Pressure

J : OnStar®

} : Power

/ : Remote Vehicle Start

> : Safety Belt Reminders

% : Steering Wheel Controls

7 : Tire Pressure Monitor

d : Traction Control/Stabilitrak®

M : Windshield Washer Fluid


vi Introduction

2 NOTES


In Brief 1-1

In Brief

Instrument PanelInstrument Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2

Initial Drive InformationInitial Drive Information . . . . . . . . 1-4Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 1-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11Head RestraintAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Safety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-11

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12

Mirror Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12Steering WheelAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13

Interior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Exterior Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-13Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . 1-14Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-15Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-16Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17

Vehicle FeaturesRadio(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Portable Audio Devices . . . . . . 1-18Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-18Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . 1-19Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-19Navigation System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-20

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-21

Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 1-22Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-22

Performance and MaintenanceTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 1-23Tire Pressure Monitor . . . . . . . . 1-23Engine Oil Life System . . . . . . 1-24Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 1-24Driving for Better FuelEconomy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-24

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25

OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25


1-2 In Brief

Instrument Panel


In Brief 1-3

A. Air Vents on page 8‑5.

B. Turn and Lane‐Change Lever.See Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals on page 6‑3.

Exterior Lamp Controls onpage 6‑1.

Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

C. Horn on page 5‑3.

D. Instrument Cluster on page 5‑8.

E. Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

Rear Window Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑5.

F. Power Door Locks on page 2‑7.

G. Navigation Screen(If Equipped).

H. Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Display (If Equipped).See Forward Collision Alert(FCA) System on page 9‑43.

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Indicator (If Equipped).See Lane Departure Warning(LDW) on page 9‑51.

I. Safety Locks on page 2‑8.

J. Infotainment on page 7‑1.

Navigation System(If Equipped). See NavigationSystem Manual.

K. Hood Release. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

L. Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑43(If Equipped).

Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑51 (If Equipped).

M. Data Link Connector (DLC)(Out of View). See MalfunctionIndicator Lamp on page 5‑13.

N. Instrument Panel IlluminationControl on page 6‑4.

O. Steering Wheel Adjustment onpage 5‑2.

P. Steering Wheel Controls onpage 5‑2.

Q. Ignition Positions on page 9‑24.

R. Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped).

Automatic Climate ControlSystem on page 8‑3(If Equipped).

S. Shift Lever. See AutomaticTransmission on page 9‑32.

T. Fuel Economy Mode onpage 9‑34 (If Equipped).

U. StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑39.

V. Power Outlets on page 5‑6.

W. CD Player Slot. See CD Playeron page 7‑14.

X. Driver Information Center (DIC)Buttons. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23.

Y. Hazard Warning Flashers onpage 6‑3.


1-4 In Brief

Initial DriveInformationThis section provides a briefoverview about some of theimportant features that mayor may not be on your specificvehicle.

For more detailed information, referto each of the features which can befound later in this owner manual.

Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) SystemThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to60 m (195 ft) away from the vehicle.

Press this button to extend the key.The key can be used for the ignitionand all locks.

K : Press to unlock the driver dooror all doors.

Q : Press to lock all doors.

Lock and unlock feedback can bepersonalized.

V : For vehicles with the powerliftgate, press and hold until theliftgate begins to move to openthe liftgate.

For vehicles without the powerliftgate, first press K, then press

and holdV to unlock the liftgate.

7 : Press and release to locate thevehicle. Press and hold for at leasttwo seconds to sound the panicalarm. Press 7 again to cancelthe panic alarm.

See Keys on page 2‑2 and RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 2‑3.


In Brief 1-5

Remote Vehicle StartWith this feature the engine can bestarted from outside of the vehicle.

Starting the Vehicle

1. Press and release Q onthe Remote Keyless Entrytransmitter.

2. Press and hold/ for abouttwo seconds. The turn signallamps will briefly flash to confirmthe vehicle has been started.The parking lamps will turn onand remain on as long as theengine is running. The vehicle'sdoors will be locked.

3. The key must be inserted andturned to ON/RUN beforedriving.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a time extensionis done or the key is inserted andturned to ON/RUN.

Canceling a Remote Start

To cancel a remote start, do one ofthe following:

. Press/ until the parking lampsturn off.

. Turn on the hazard warningflashers.

. Insert the key and turn it toON/RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5.

Door LocksTo lock or unlock the vehicle fromthe outside, press Q or K on theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter.

There is a power door lock switchon the instrument panel.


1-6 In Brief

There are power door lock switcheson the front door panels.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

See Door Locks on page 2‑7.

To manually unlock a door frominside the vehicle, pull once on thedoor handle to unlock it, and asecond time to open it.

{ : Press for Safety Locks.See Safety Locks on page 2‑8.

Liftgate

Manual Liftgate Operation

Unlock the vehicle before openingthe liftgate.

Press the touchpad located in thehandle of the liftgate, above thelicense plate, and lift up to open.

Do not press the touchpad whileclosing the liftgate. This will causethe liftgate to be unlatched.

Power Liftgate Operation

On vehicles with a power liftgate,the switch is on the overheadconsole. The vehicle must be inP (Park) to use the power feature.The taillamps flash when the powerliftgate moves.


In Brief 1-7

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make surethe area above and behind theliftgate is clear before opening it.

Choose the power liftgate modeby turning the dial on the switchto either the 3/4 or MAX position.Press the button to open or closethe liftgate.

See Liftgate (Manual) on page 2‑9or Liftgate (Power) on page 2‑10.

Windows

Press the front of the switch to lowerthe window. Pull the switch up toraise it.

Pushing or pulling the switch partof the way will open or close thewindow as long as the switch isoperated.

See Power Windows on page 2‑20.

Seat Adjustment

Four‐Way Power Driver Seat

A. Seat Position Handle

B. Height Adjustment Control


1-8 In Brief

To adjust the seat:. Move the seat forward or

rearward using the handle underthe front of the seat cushion (A).See Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the control (B) upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.

Eight‐Way Power Driver Seat

To adjust a power seat, if equipped:. Move the seat forward or

rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front or rearpart of the seat cushion bymoving the front or rear ofthe control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire control upor down.

See Power Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑4 for more information.

Lumbar Adjustment

Eight-Way Power Seat Shown,Four-Way Similar

A. Lumbar Switch

If available, press and hold thefront or rear of the switch (A) toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport. Release the switch whenthe seatback reaches the desiredlevel of lumbar support.

See Lumbar Adjustment onpage 3‑5 for more information.


In Brief 1-9

Reclining Seatbacks

Manual Reclining Seatbacks

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback tomake sure it is locked.

To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatback willreturn to the upright position.


Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5.

Memory Features

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1” and “2” buttonson the outboard side of the driverseat are used to manually save andrecall the driver seat and outsidemirror positions. These manuallystored positions are referred to asButton Memory positions.


1-10 In Brief

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isturned off. These automaticallystored positions are referred toas RKE Memory positions.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.

2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and “1” at the same time until abeep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”

To recall the manually savedButton Memory positions, pressand hold “1” or “2.” The driver seatand outside mirrors move to thepositions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

To automatically recall RKE Memorypositions, unlock the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter and openthe driver door. If the driver dooris already open, pressing theRKE transmitter K button will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.

See Memory Seats on page 3‑7 formore information.

Easy Exit Driver Seat

This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the drivermore room to exit the vehicle.

To activate, turn the ignition off andopen the driver door. If the driverdoor is already open, turning theignition off will activate the easyexit driver seat.

This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Easy Exit Driver Seat”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33 for more information.


In Brief 1-11

Heated Seats

Uplevel Climate Control SystemShown, Base Similar

If available, the buttons are nearthe climate controls. To operate,the ignition must be in ON/RUN.

Press z or J to heat the driveror passenger seat cushion andseatback.

Indicator lights on the button showthe temperature setting.

See Heated Front Seats onpage 3‑9.

Head RestraintAdjustmentDo not drive until the head restraintsfor all occupants are installed andadjusted properly.

To achieve a comfortable seatingposition, change the seatbackrecline angle as little as necessarywhile keeping the seat and thehead restraint height in the properposition.

For more information see HeadRestraints on page 3‑2 and SeatAdjustment on page 3‑3.

Safety Belts

Refer to the following sections forimportant information on how to usesafety belts properly:. Safety Belts on page 3‑12.. How to Wear Safety Belts

Properly on page 3‑13.. Lap-Shoulder Belt on page 3‑14.. Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑46.


1-12 In Brief

Passenger SensingSystem

United States

Canada

The passenger sensing system willturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbags,and roof‐rail airbags are not affectedby the passenger sensing system.

The passenger airbag statusindicator will be visible on theoverhead console when the vehicleis started. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑28 for moreinformation.

Mirror Adjustment

Exterior

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Return the selector switch to themiddle position.

See Power Mirrors on page 2‑16.

Interior

Manual inside rearview mirrors canbe adjusted by holding in the centerto move the mirror for a clearerview of behind the vehicle. Adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use andpull it for nighttime use.

See Manual Rearview Mirror onpage 2‑18.

Vehicles with an automaticdimming inside rearview mirrorcan automatically reduce the glarefrom the headlamps of the vehiclebehind you. The dimming featurecomes on and the indicator lightcomes on each time the vehicleis started.


In Brief 1-13

See Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror on page 2‑19.

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.

Interior LightingReading Lamps

These lamps are located on theoverhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.

Center Dome Lamps

There are front and rear domelamps.

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console. To changethe settings, press the following:

* : Turns the lamp off, even whena door is open.

1 : The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ : Turns the dome lamps on.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon and off by pressing the buttonsnext to the lamps.

For more information on interiorlighting, See Instrument PanelIllumination Control on page 6‑4.

Exterior Lighting

The exterior lamp control is locatedon the turn signal/lane change lever.

O : Turn to operate the exteriorlamps.

O : Turns the exterior lamps off.

AUTO: Turns the exterior lamps onand off automatically depending onthe exterior light.


1-14 In Brief

; : Turns on the parking lamps,together with the sidemarker lamps,taillamps, license plate lamps, andinstrument panel lights.

5 : Turns on the headlamps,together with the parking lamps,sidemarker lamps, taillamps, licenseplate lamps, and instrument panellights.

For more information, see:. Exterior Lamp Controls on

page 6‑1.. Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)

on page 6‑2.. Fog Lamps on page 6‑4.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignitionin ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.

INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn the3 INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 : For a single wipe, briefly movethe wiper lever down. For severalwipes, hold the wiper lever down.

nL FRONT (WindshieldWasher): Pull the windshield wiperlever toward you to spray windshieldwasher fluid and activate the wipers.


In Brief 1-15

Rear Window Wiper/Washer

The rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):Press the lower portion of the buttonto set a delay between wipes.

m = REAR : Push the windshieldwiper lever forward to spray washerfluid on the rear window.

See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3 and Rear Window Wiper/Washer on page 5‑5.

Climate ControlsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith these systems.

Climate Control System

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Controls

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Front Defrost

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Recirculation

H. Air Conditioning


1-16 In Brief

Automatic Climate Control System

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Air Delivery Mode Controls

D. Front Defrost

E. Recirculation

F. Temperature Control

G. Power

H. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Air Conditioning

See Climate Control Systems onpage 8‑1 (If Equipped) or AutomaticClimate Control System on page 8‑3(If Equipped).

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

To release the parking brake,hold the regular brake pedal down,then push down momentarily onthe parking brake pedal until you


In Brief 1-17

feel the pedal release. Slowly pullyour foot up off the park brakepedal.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑36.

Transmission

Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) Mode

ERS or manual mode allows forthe selection of the range of gearpositions. Use this mode whendriving down hill or towing a trailerto limit the top gear and vehiclespeed.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonon the shift lever, to increaseor decrease the gear rangeavailable.

See Manual Mode on page 9‑33 formore information.

Fuel Economy Mode

Vehicles with a 2.4L enginehave a Fuel Economy Mode.When engaged, fuel economymode can improve the vehicle'sfuel economy.

Press the “eco” (economy) buttonby the shift lever to turn this featureon or off. The “eco” light in theinstrument cluster will come onwhen engaged, and a DriverInformation Center (DIC) message“ECO MODE ON” displays. SeeFuel Economy Mode on page 9‑34.

Vehicle Features

Radio(s)

VOL/ O : Press to turn the systemon and off. Turn to increase ordecrease the volume.

SOURCE: Press to choosebetween FM, AM, XM™,if equipped, CD, or AUX.

MENU/SEL: Turn to select radiostations.

Press to show available informationabout the current station or track.

D : Press to go to the main menu.

g SEEK: Press to seek theprevious station or track.

l SEEK: Press to seek the nextstation or track.

Buttons 1 ‐ 6: Press to save andselect favorite stations

For more information aboutthese and other radio features,see Overview on page 7‑3.


1-18 In Brief

For more information about theRear Seat Entertainment (RSE)System (if equipped), see Rear SeatEntertainment (RSE) System onpage 7‑22.

For more information about theRear Seat Audio (RSA) System,see Rear Seat Audio (RSA) Systemon page 7‑33.

For information about setting theclock, see Clock on page 5‑6.

Storing a Favorite Station

Stations from all bands can bestored in the favorite lists in anyorder. Up to six stations can bestored in each favorite page andthe number of available favoritepages can be set.

To store the station to a positionin the list, press the correspondingnumeric button 1-6 until the stationcan be heard again.

For more information, see “Storingand Retrieving Favorites” in AM-FMRadio on page 7‑8.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ satelliteradio tuner and a valid XM satelliteradio subscription can receive XMprogramming.

XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces.XM satellite radio has a widevariety of programming andcommercial-free music, coast tocoast, and in digital-quality sound.A fee is required to receive theXM service.

For more information refer to:. www.xmradio.com or call

1-800-929-2100 (U.S.).. www.xmradio.ca or call

1-877-438-9677 (Canada).

For more information, see SatelliteRadio on page 7‑10.

Portable Audio DevicesSome vehicles have a 3.5 mm(1/8 in) auxiliary input and a USBport located in the center console.External devices such as iPods®,laptop computers, MP3 players, CDchangers, and USB storage devicesmay be connected, depending onthe audio system.

For more information, see AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑17.

Bluetooth®

The Bluetooth system allows userswith a Bluetooth-enabled cell phoneto make and receive hands-freecalls using the vehicle audiosystem and controls.

The Bluetooth-enabled cell phonemust be paired with the in-vehicleBluetooth system before it can beused in the vehicle. Not all phoneswill support all functions.


In Brief 1-19

See Bluetooth (Overview) onpage 7‑35 or Bluetooth(Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑37 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑41.

Steering Wheel Controls

Some audio steering wheel controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.

b / g : Press to interact with theavailable Bluetooth or OnStarsystems.

$ /c : Press to silence thevehicle speakers only. Press againto turn the sound on. For vehicleswith OnStar or Bluetooth systems,press to reject an incoming call,or end a current call.

_ SRC ^ : Press to select an audiosource.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station,CD, or MP3 track.

+ x − : Press + to increase thevolume; press − to decrease thevolume.

For more information, see SteeringWheel Controls on page 5‑2.

Cruise Control

ON/OFF5 CRUISE : Press to turnthe cruise control system on and off.

* CANCEL : Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.

RES/+: Move the thumbwheelup to make the vehicle resumeto a previously set speed or toaccelerate.


1-20 In Brief

SET/− : Move the thumbwheeldown toward SET/- to set a speedand activate cruise control, or tomake the vehicle decelerate.

See Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, there is a separatenavigation system manual thatincludes information on the radio,audio players, and navigationsystem.

The navigation system providesdetailed maps of most majorfreeways and roads. After adestination has been set, thesystem provides turn-by-turninstructions for reaching thedestination. In addition, the systemcan help locate a variety of pointsof interest (POIs), such as banks,airports, restaurants, and more.

See the navigation system manualfor more information.

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The DIC display is located in thecenter of the instrument panelcluster. It shows the status of manyvehicle systems.

The DIC buttons are located belowthe climate control system.

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

Q or R : Use these buttons toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will movealong the page as you scroll throughthe items. This shows where eachpage is in the menu.

SET/CLR: Use this button to setor clear the menu item when it isdisplayed.

For more information, see DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23.


In Brief 1-21

Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) SystemFor vehicles with FCA, this systemis intended to help avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a flashingvisual alert and beeps whenapproaching a vehicle directlyahead too quickly. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance ofapproximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑43 for moreinformation.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)For vehicles with LDW, it isintended to help avoid unintentionallane departures. It may provide awarning if the vehicle is crossinga lane without using a turn signal.LDW uses a camera sensor todetect the lane markings. It onlyoperates at speeds of 56 km(35 mph) or greater.

The LDW indicator, @, appearsgreen if a lane marking is detected.It changes to amber, flashes, andsounds three chimes if the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal.

To turn LDW on and off, press theLANE DEPART button, located onthe steering wheel.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑51 for more information.


1-22 In Brief

Rear VisionCamera (RVC)If available, the rear visioncamera displays a view of thearea behind the vehicle when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The display will appear on the radioscreen.

To clean the camera lens, locatedabove the license plate, rinse it withwater and wipe it with a soft cloth.

See Rear Vision Camera (RVC) onpage 9‑48.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistIf available, Ultrasonic Rear ParkingAssist (URPA) system uses sensorson the rear bumper to assist withparking and avoiding objects whilein R (Reverse). It operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph).URPA uses audible beeps toprovide distance and systeminformation.

Keep the sensors on the vehicle'srear bumper clean to ensure properoperation.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑46 for more information.

Roof Rack SystemThe roof rack cross rails can belocked in four positions along theroof rack side rails. Lift the lever torelease and move the cross rail.Push the lever down to completelyengage into the side rail holes. Slidethe cross rails back and forth untilthe lock pins engage in the holesand a click is heard.

When the roof rack is not in use,lock one cross rail at the furthestforward position and lock the othercross rail at the furthest rearwardposition to reduce wind noise.See Roof Rack System onpage 4‑2.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outletscan be used to connect electricalequipment, such as a cell phoneor MP3 player.

There are four accessory poweroutlets in the following locations:below the CD slot, inside the centerconsole storage, on the rear of thecenter console storage, and in therear cargo compartment.

To use the outlets, remove the coverand close when not in use.

See Power Outlets on page 5‑6.


In Brief 1-23

Performance andMaintenance

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The traction control system limitswheel spin. The system is on whenthe vehicle is started.. To turn off traction control, press

and release g located on the

console. i illuminates andthe appropriate DIC messagedisplays. See Vehicle Messageson page 5‑26.

. Press and release g again toturn traction control back on.

For more information, see TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑37.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe StabiliTrak system assistswith directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.The system is on when the vehicleis started.. To turn off both Traction Control

and StabiliTrak, press andhold g until g and i illuminateand the appropriate DICmessage displays. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑26.

. Press g again to turn on bothsystems.

For more information, seeStabiliTrak® System on page 9‑39.

Tire Pressure MonitorThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).

The TPMS warning light alerts youto a significant loss in pressureof one of the vehicle's tires. If thewarning light comes on, stop assoon as possible and inflate thetires to the recommended pressureshown on the Tire and LoadingInformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑18. The warninglight will remain on until the tirepressure is corrected.


1-24 In Brief

During cooler conditions, the low tirepressure warning light may appearwhen the vehicle is first started andthen turn off. This may be an earlyindicator that the tire pressures aregetting low and the tires need to beinflated to the proper pressure.

The TPMS does not replace normalmonthly tire maintenance. It is thedriver’s responsibility to maintaincorrect tire pressures.

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑54.

Engine Oil Life SystemThe engine oil life system calculatesengine oil life based on vehicle useand displays the CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message when it is timeto change the engine oil and filter.The oil life system should be resetto 100% only following an oilchange.

Resetting the Oil Life System

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENUbutton to display the VehicleInformation menu.

3. Press either the up or downarrows to view REMAININGOIL LIFE.

4. Press the SET/CLR button until100% is displayed.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

Or:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN withthe engine off.

2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.

See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑56. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑54.

Driving for Better FuelEconomyDriving habits can affect fuelmileage. Here are some drivingtips to get the best fuel economypossible.. Avoid fast starts and accelerate

smoothly.. Brake gradually and avoid

abrupt stops.. Avoid idling the engine for long

periods of time.


In Brief 1-25

. When road and weatherconditions are appropriate,use cruise control.

. Always follow posted speedlimits or drive more slowly whenconditions require.

. Keep vehicle tires properlyinflated.

. Combine several trips into asingle trip.

. Replace the vehicle's tires withthe same TPC Spec numbermolded into the tire's sidewallnear the size.

. Follow recommended scheduledmaintenance.

Roadside AssistanceProgramU.S.: 1-888-881-3302

TTY Users (U.S.): 1-888-889-2438

Canada: 1-800-268-6800

Mexico: 01-800-466-0801

As the owner of a new GMC, youare automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.

See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10 for moreinformation.

Roadside Assistance and OnStar(U.S. and Canada)

If you have an active OnStarsubscription, press theQ buttonand the current GPS location willbe sent to an OnStar advisor whowill assess your problem, contactRoadside Assistance, and relayyour exact location to get the helpyou need.

Online Owner Center(U.S. and Canada)

The Online Owner Center is acomplimentary service that includesonline service reminders, vehiclemaintenance tips, online ownermanual, special privileges,and more.

Sign up today at:www.gmcownercenter.com (U.S.)or www.gm.ca (Canada).

OnStar®

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 for more information.


1-26 In Brief

2 NOTES


Keys, Doors, and Windows 2-1

Keys, Doors, andWindows

Keys and LocksKeys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . 2-5Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

DoorsLiftgate (Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9Liftgate (Power) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10

Vehicle SecurityVehicle Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-14Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . 2-14Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer Operation . . . . . . . 2-15

Exterior MirrorsConvex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Power Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

Interior MirrorsManual Rearview Mirror . . . . . . 2-18Automatic Dimming RearviewMirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19

WindowsWindows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-20Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21


2-2 Keys, Doors, and Windows

Keys and Locks

Keys

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe ignition key is dangerous formany reasons. Children or otherscould be badly injured or evenkilled. They could operate thepower windows or other controlsor even make the vehicle move.The windows will function with thekeys in the ignition and childrencould be seriously injured or killedif caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys ina vehicle with children.

The key that is part of the RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) transmittercan be used for the ignition andall locks.

Press the button on the RKEtransmitter to extend the key.Press the button and the keyblade to retract the key.

See your dealer if a new key isneeded.

Notice: If the keys get lockedin the vehicle, it may have to bedamaged to get them out. Alwayscarry a spare key.



If locked out of the vehicle, seeRoadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

With an active OnStar subscription,an OnStar Advisor may remotelyunlock the vehicle. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) SystemSee Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

If there is a decrease in the RKEoperating range:. Check the distance.

The transmitter may betoo far from the vehicle.

. Check the location. Othervehicles or objects may beblocking the signal.

. Check the transmitter's battery.See “Battery Replacement” laterin this section.

. If the transmitter is still notworking correctly, see yourdealer or a qualified technicianfor service.

Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) System OperationThe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter will work up to 60 m(195 ft) away from the vehicle.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3.

RKE Without Remote Start Shown

The following may be available:

Q (Lock): Press to lock all doors.The turn signal indicators mayflash and/or the horn may soundto indicate locking. See “RemoteLock Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑33. If apassenger door is open when Q ispressed, all doors lock. If the driverdoor is open when Q is pressed, alldoors lock except the driver door.These settings can be modified.



See “Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33.

Pressing Q may also armthe theft-deterrent system.See Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

K (Unlock): Press to unlockthe driver door or all doors.See “Remote Door Unlock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33. The turn signalindicators flash to indicateunlocking has occurred. For moreinformation see “Remote UnlockLight Feedback” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑33.Pressing K may also disarmthe theft-deterrent system.See Anti-theft Alarm System onpage 2‑14.

V (Remote Liftgate Release):First press K, then press and

holdV to unlock the liftgate.

For vehicles with the power liftgate,press and holdV until the liftgatebegins to move to open the liftgate.

7 (Vehicle Locator/PanicAlarm): Press and releaseone time to locate the vehicle.The exterior lamps flash and thehorn chirps. Press and hold 7 forat least two seconds to sound thepanic alarm. The horn sounds andthe turn signals flash until 7 ispressed again or the key is placedin the ignition and turned toON/RUN.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):For vehicles with this feature, firstpress Q then press and hold/ tostart the engine from outside thevehicle using the RKE transmitter.See Remote Vehicle Start onpage 2‑5 for additional information.

The buttons on the keys aredisabled when there is a keyin the ignition.

Programming Transmitters tothe Vehicle

Only RKE transmittersprogrammed to this vehiclewill work. If a transmitter is lostor stolen, a replacement can bepurchased and programmed throughyour dealer. When the replacementtransmitter is programmed to thisvehicle, all remaining transmittersmust also be reprogrammed.Any lost or stolen transmitterswill no longer work once thenew transmitter is programmed.

Battery Replacement

Replace the battery if the REPLACEBATTERY IN REMOTE KEYmessage displays in the DIC.See “Replace Battery in RemoteKey” under Key and Lock Messageson page 5‑29.



The battery is not rechargeable.To replace the battery:

1. Push the button on thetransmitter to extend the key.

2. Remove the battery cover byprying with a finger.

3. Remove the battery by pushingon the battery and sliding ittoward the key blade.

4. Insert the new battery, positiveside facing up. Push the batterydown until it is held in place.Replace with a CR2032 orequivalent battery.

5. Snap the battery cover back onto the transmitter.

Remote Vehicle StartThe vehicle may have this featurethat allows you to start the enginefrom outside the vehicle.

/ (Remote Vehicle Start):This button will be on the RKEtransmitter if the vehicle hasremote start.

Vehicles with an automatic climatecontrol system will default to aheating or cooling mode dependingon the outside temperature during aremote start. Once the key is turnedto ON/RUN, the system will turn onat the setting the vehicle was lastset to. If the vehicle has heatedseats, they may come on during aremote start. See Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9 for moreinformation.

Laws in some local communitiesmay restrict the use of remotestarters. For example, some lawsrequire a person using remotestart to have the vehicle in view.Check local regulations for anyrequirements.

There are other conditions whichcan affect the performance of thetransmitter. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System on page 2‑3for additional information.

Starting the Engine Using RemoteStart

To start the engine using the remotestart feature:

1. Press and release Q on theRKE transmitter.

2. Press and hold / for abouttwo seconds. The turn signallamps will briefly flash to confirmthe vehicle has been started.The parking lamps will turn onand remain on as long as theengine is running. The vehicle'sdoors will be locked.

3. The key must be inserted andturned to ON/RUN beforedriving.

The engine will shut off after10 minutes unless a timeextension is done or the key isinserted and turned to ON/RUN.



Extending Engine Run Time

For a 10-minute extension, repeatSteps 1 and 2 while the engine isstill running. The remote start canbe extended once.

When the remote start is extended,the second 10 minutes will startimmediately.

For example, if the engine hasbeen running for 5 minutes, and10 minutes are added, the enginewill run for a total of 15 minutes.

A maximum of two remote starts orremote start attempts are allowedbetween ignition cycles.

The vehicle's ignition switch mustbe turned to ON/RUN and then backto LOCK/OFF using the key, beforethe remote start procedure can beused again.

Shutting the Engine Off After aRemote Start

To shut off the engine:. Press / until the parking lamps

turn off.. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Insert the key and turn it to

ON/RUN and then back toLOCK/OFF.

Conditions in Which Remote StartWill Not Work

The remote vehicle start feature willnot operate if:. The key is in the ignition.. The hood or doors are not

closed.. The hazard warning flashers

are on.

. There is an emission controlsystem malfunction.

. The engine coolant temperatureis too high.

. The oil pressure is low.

. Two remote vehicle starts havealready been used.

. The vehicle is not in P (Park).

Remote Start Ready

If the vehicle does not have theremote vehicle start feature, it mayhave the remote start ready feature.This feature allows your dealer toadd the manufacturer's remotevehicle start feature. See yourdealer to add the manufacturer'sremote vehicle start feature to thevehicle.



Door Locks

{ WARNING

Unlocked doors can bedangerous.

. Passengers, especiallychildren, can easily open thedoors and fall out of a movingvehicle. The chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle ina crash is increased if thedoors are not locked. So, allpassengers should wearsafety belts properly andthe doors should be lockedwhenever the vehicle isdriven.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Young children who get intounlocked vehicles may beunable to get out. A child canbe overcome by extreme heatand can suffer permanentinjuries or even death fromheat stroke. Always lock thevehicle whenever leaving it.

. Outsiders can easily enterthrough an unlocked doorwhen slowing or stoppingthe vehicle. Lock the doorsto help prevent this fromhappening.

To lock or unlock a door from theoutside of the vehicle, use theRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter. Pull the handle oncefrom the inside to unlock the door,and a second time to open it.

Power Door Locks

There is a power door lock switchon the instrument panel.



There are power door lock switcheson the front door panels.

Q : Press to lock the doors.

K : Press to unlock the doors.

When locking the doors with apower door lock switch and a dooror the liftgate is open, the doors willlock five seconds after the last dooris closed. Three chimes sound tosignal the delayed locking featureis in use.

Pressing the power lock switchtwice or Q on the RKE transmittertwice will override the delayedlocking feature and immediatelylock all doors.

This feature can be programmed.See “Delayed Door Lock” underVehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33.

Safety Locks

The rear door safety locks switch ison the instrument panel.

Rear door safety locks preventpassengers from opening the reardoors from inside the vehicle.

Press { to activate the safety locks.When activated, the LED light in theswitch changes to amber.

Press { again to deactivate thesafety locks.



Doors

Liftgate (Manual)

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate, trunk/hatch open, orwith any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate, or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outlets onor under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See ClimateControl System in the Index.

For more information aboutcarbon monoxide, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑30.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make surethe area above and behind theliftgate is clear before opening it.

Unlock the vehicle before openingthe liftgate.

Press the touchpad located in thehandle of the liftgate, above thelicense plate, and lift up to open.

Do not press the touchpad whileclosing the liftgate. This will causethe liftgate to be unlatched.

Always close the liftgate beforedriving.



Liftgate (Power)

Power Liftgate Operation

{ WARNING

Exhaust gases can enter thevehicle if it is driven with theliftgate or trunk/hatch open,or with any objects that passthrough the seal between thebody and the trunk/hatch orliftgate. Engine exhaust containscarbon monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

If the vehicle must be driven withthe liftgate or trunk/hatch open:

. Close all of the windows.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Adjust the Climate Controlsystem to a setting thatbrings in only outside airand set the fan speed to thehighest setting. See “ClimateControl Systems” in theIndex.

. If the vehicle is equipped witha power liftgate, disable thepower liftgate function.


On vehicles with a power liftgate,the switch is on the overheadconsole. The vehicle must be inP (Park) to use the power feature.The taillamps flash when the powerliftgate moves.

{ WARNING

You or others could be injured ifcaught in the path of the powerliftgate. Make sure there is no onein the way of the liftgate as it isopening and closing.

Notice: If you open the liftgatewithout checking for overheadobstructions such as a garagedoor, you could damage theliftgate or the liftgate glass.Always check to make sure thearea above and behind the liftgateis clear before opening it.

The power liftgate has three modesof operation. Mode selection iscontrolled by the interior modeswitch.



Choose the power liftgate modeby turning the dial on the switchuntil the indicator lines up with thedesired position. The vehicle mustbe in P (Park).

The three modes are:

MAX: The liftgate power opens tothe full open height.

3/4: The liftgate power opensto a reduced open height thatcan be set by the vehicle operator.Use this setting to prevent theliftgate from opening into overheadobstructions such as a garage dooror roof mounted cargo during poweroperation. The liftgate can still befully opened manually.

OFF: The liftgate only operatesmanually in this position.

Manual operation of a liftgate thatalso has power operation requiresmore effort than a standard manualliftgate.

In either the MAX or the 3/4 mode,the liftgate can be power openedand closed by:

. First pressing K and then

pressing and holdingV onthe Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter until the liftgate startsmoving. See Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) System Operationon page 2‑3.

. Pressing the power liftgatebutton in the center of the modeswitch on the overhead console,with the driver door unlocked.

. Pressing the touchpad switchon the liftgate outside handle,with all doors unlocked, to openthe liftgate.



Press and release8 on theliftgate adjacent to the latch toclose the liftgate.

Pressing any button, or thetouchpad switch, while the liftgate ismoving stops it. Pressing the buttonor RKE switch again reverses thedirection. The touchpad switchwill stop the liftgate from moving.There is a minimum distance thatthe power liftgate must already beopen for the system to hold it open.If movement is stopped below thatminimum, the liftgate closes.

Do not force the liftgate open orclosed during a power cycle.

The power liftgate may betemporarily disabled underextreme temperatures or lowbattery conditions. If this occurs,the liftgate can still be operatedmanually.

If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) while the power functionis in progress, the liftgate powerfunction will continue to completion.If you shift the transmission out ofP (Park) and accelerate before thepower liftgate latch is closed, theliftgate may reverse to the openposition. Cargo could fall out ofthe vehicle. Always make sure thepower liftgate is closed and latchedbefore you drive away.

If you power open the liftgate andthe liftgate support struts have lostpressure, the turn signals flashand a chime sounds. The liftgatestays open temporarily, then slowlycloses. See your dealer for servicebefore using the liftgate.



Obstacle Detection Features

If the liftgate encounters an obstacleduring a power open or close cycle,a warning chime will sound andthe liftgate will automaticallyreverse direction to the full closedor open position. After removingthe obstruction, the power liftgateoperation can be used again.If the liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle,the power function will deactivate.The MANUALLY CLOSE POWERLIFTGATE warning message inthe Driver Information Center (DIC)will display. After removing theobstructions, the liftgate willresume normal power operation.

Pinch sensors are located on theside edges of the liftgate. If anobject is caught between the liftgateand the body and presses againstthis sensor, the liftgate will reversedirection and open fully. The liftgatewill remain open until it is activatedagain or closed manually.

Power Liftgate 3/4 Mode

To program the liftgate openingheight:

1. Turn the liftgate switch to eitherthe MAX, or the 3/4 modeposition and power open theliftgate.

2. Stop the liftgate movement atthe desired height by pressingany liftgate switch. Manuallyadjust the liftgate position ifrequired.

3. Press and hold the button on theliftgate adjacent to the latch untilthe turn signals flash and a beepsounds to indicate that the newsetting is recorded.

When power opened with the3/4 mode selected, the liftgatestops at the new set position.

If you do not hear the audible andvisual feedback when setting theintermediate stop position, youare attempting to set the heightbelow the 3/4 open height minimum(approximately 1.5 m or 5 ft).The liftgate cannot be set belowthat minimum and the new settingwill not be recorded.

Manual Operation of PowerLiftgate

To change the liftgate to manualoperation, turn the mode switch tothe OFF position.

With the power liftgate disabledand all of the doors unlocked,the liftgate can be manually openedand closed. Manual operationof a liftgate that also has poweroperation requires more effortthan a standard manual liftgate.



To open the liftgate, press thetouchpad on the handle on theoutside of the liftgate, and lift thegate open. To close the liftgate,use the pull cup to lower the liftgateand close. With the power liftgatedisabled, the liftgate electric latchwill still power latch once contact ismade with the striker. Always closethe liftgate before driving.

If the RKE button is pressed whilepower operation is disabled, the turnsignals flash and the liftgate willnot move.

The liftgate has an electric latch.If the battery is disconnected orhas low voltage, the liftgate willnot open. The liftgate will resumeoperation when the battery isreconnected and charged.

Vehicle SecurityThis vehicle has theft-deterrentfeatures; however, they do not makeit impossible to steal.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemThis vehicle has an anti-theft alarmsystem.

Arming the System

To arm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press Q on the RKE transmitter.

. Lock the vehicle using the key inthe driver door.

The alarm automatically arms afterabout 30 seconds. The securitylight, located on the instrumentpanel, flashes.

PressV on the RKE transmitter toopen the liftgate without setting offthe alarm. The system rearms whenthe liftgate is closed.

Disarming the System

To disarm the system, do one of thefollowing:

. Press K on the RKE transmitter.

. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

. Allow the alarm to time out afterabout 30 seconds and resetitself.

The alarm automatically disarms.

If the system is armed and any dooris unlocked without pressing K onthe RKE transmitter, the alarmsounds.



How to Detect a TamperCondition

If K is pressed and the hornsounds, an attempted break-inhas occurred while the systemwas armed.

If the alarm has been activated, theTHEFT ATTEMPTED message willappear on the DIC. See Key andLock Messages on page 5‑29 foradditional information.

ImmobilizerSee Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Immobilizer OperationThis vehicle has a passivetheft-deterrent system.

The system does not have to bemanually armed or disarmed.

The vehicle is automaticallyimmobilized when the key isremoved from the ignition.

The system is automaticallydisarmed when the vehicle isstarted with the correct key.The key uses a transponder thatmatches an immobilizer control unitin the vehicle and automaticallydisarms the system. Only anauthorized key starts the vehicle.The vehicle may not start if thekey is damaged.

The security light, located in theinstrument panel cluster, comes onif there is a problem with armingor disarming the theft-deterrentsystem.

When trying to start the vehicle,the security light comes on brieflywhen the ignition is turned on.

If the engine does not start and thesecurity light stays on, there is aproblem with the system. Turn theignition off and try again.



If the engine still does not start, andthe key appears to be undamagedor the light continues to stay on, tryanother ignition key. If the enginedoes not start with the other key, thevehicle needs service. If the vehicledoes start, the first key may bedamaged. See your dealer who canservice the theft-deterrent systemand have a new key made.

Do not leave the key or devicethat disarms or deactivates thetheft-deterrent system in the vehicle.

Exterior Mirrors

Convex Mirrors

{ WARNING

A convex mirror can make things,like other vehicles, look fartheraway than they really are. If youcut too sharply into the right lane,you could hit a vehicle on theright. Check the inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger side mirror is convexshaped. A convex mirror's surface iscurved so more can be seen fromthe driver seat.

Power Mirrors

To adjust the mirrors:

1. Move the selector switch toL (left) or R (right) to choosethe driver or passenger mirror.

2. Press the arrows on the controlpad to move each mirror in thedesired direction.

3. Return the selector switch to themiddle position.



Heated MirrorsFor vehicles with heated mirrors:

The heated outside rearview mirrorsturn on when the rear windowdefogger is on and help to clearfog or frost from the surface of themirrors.

1 (Rear Window Defogger):This button is on the climate controlpanel.

See “Rear Window Defogger” underAutomatic Climate Control Systemon page 8‑3 for more information.

Blind Spot MirrorsThe blind spot mirror is a smallconvex mirror built into the upperand outer corner of both outsidemirrors. It can show objects thatmay be in the vehicle's blind zone.

Driving with the Blind SpotMirror

Actual Mirror View

1. When the approaching vehicle isa long distance away, the imagein the main mirror is small andnear the inboard edge of themirror.

2. As the vehicle gets closer, theimage in the main mirror getslarger and moves outboard.

3. As the vehicle enters the blindzone, the image transitions fromthe main mirror to the blind spotmirror.

4. When the vehicle is in the blindzone, the image only appears inthe blind spot mirror.



Using the Outside Mirror withthe Blind Spot Mirror

1. Set the main mirror so that theside of the vehicle can just beseen and the blind spot mirrorhas an unobstructed view.

2. When checking for traffic orbefore changing a lane, lookat the main driver/passengerside mirror to observe traffic inthe adjacent lane, behind yourvehicle. Check the blind spotmirror for a vehicle in the blindzone. Then, glance over yourshoulder to double checkbefore moving slowly intothe adjacent lane.

Park Tilt MirrorsIf the vehicle is equipped withmemory mirrors, there is an optionto have the mirrors tilt down, whenin R (Reverse), to more easily seethe ground near the vehicle.

When the vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse), both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downward.They will return to their previousposition when the vehicle is shiftedout of R (Reverse), the ignition isturned to OFF, or the vehicle is leftin R (Reverse) for an extendedperiod of time.

This feature can be turned on or off.See Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33.

Interior Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorHold the inside rearview mirror inthe center and move it for a clearerview behind the vehicle. Adjustthe mirror to avoid glare from theheadlamps behind you. Push thetab forward for daytime use andpull it for nighttime use.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threecontrol buttons located at thebottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe toOnStar. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.



Automatic DimmingRearview MirrorThe vehicle may have an automaticdimming inside rearview mirror.Automatic dimming reduces theglare from the headlamps of thevehicle behind you. The dimmingfeature comes on and the indicatorlight comes on each time the vehicleis started.

O : Press to turn automaticdimming on or off.

Vehicles with OnStar® have threeadditional control buttons located atthe bottom of the mirror. See yourdealer for more information on thesystem and how to subscribe toOnStar. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1.

Cleaning the Mirror

Do not spray glass cleaner directlyon the mirror. Use a soft toweldampened with water.

Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children, helplessadults, or pets in a vehiclewith the windows closed isdangerous. They can beovercome by the extreme heatand suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helplessadult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,especially with the windowsclosed in warm or hot weather.

The vehicle aerodynamics aredesigned to improve fuel economyperformance. This may result in apulsing sound when either rearwindow is down and the frontwindows are up. To reduce thesound, open either a front windowor the sunroof (if equipped).



Power Windows

{ WARNING

Leaving children in a vehicle withthe keys is dangerous for manyreasons. Children or others couldbe badly injured or even killed.They could operate the powerwindows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move.The windows will function andthey could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of aclosing window. Do not leavekeys in a vehicle with children.

When there are children in therear seat use the window lockoutbutton to prevent unintentionaloperation of the windows.

The power windows workwhen the ignition is in ON/RUNor ACC/ACCESSORY, or inRetained Accessory Power (RAP).See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑28.

Press the front of the switch to openthe window. Pull the switch up toclose it.

Express Down Windows

Windows that have theexpress‐down feature allow thewindows to be lowered withoutholding the switch. Press thewindow switch fully and releaseit to activate the express‐downfeature. The express mode canbe canceled at any time by brieflypressing, or pulling the switch.



Window Lockout

o (Window Lockout): This featureprevents the rear passengerwindows from operating, exceptfrom the driver position.

Presso to activate the rearwindow lockout switch. The LEDlight comes on when activated.

Presso again to deactivate thelockout switch.

Sun Visors

Pull the sun visor down to blockglare. Detach the sun visor fromthe center mount to pivot to the sidewindow, or to extend along the rod,if available.

Roof

SunroofOn vehicles with a sunroof, theswitches used to operate it are onthe headliner above the rearviewmirror. The ignition must be inON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY,or in Retained Accessory Power(RAP) to operate the sunroof.See Ignition Positions on page 9‑24and Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑28.



. Press and hold the front orrear of the driver side switchto open or close the sunroof.The sunshade automaticallyopens with the sunroof, butmust be closed manually.

. Press and hold the rear of thepassenger side switch to ventthe sunroof. Press and hold thefront of the switch to close.

Express-open/Express-close

Press and release the front orrear of the driver side switch toexpress-open or express-closethe sunroof.

Anti-Pinch Feature

If an object is in the path of thesunroof when it is closing, theanti-pinch feature detects the objectand stops the sunroof from closingat the point of the obstruction.The sunroof then returns to thefull-open position.

Dirt and debris may collect onthe sunroof seal or in the track.This could cause an issuewith sunroof operation, noise,or plugging the water drainagesystem. Periodically open thesunroof and remove any obstaclesor loose debris. Wipe the sunroofseal and roof sealing area using aclean cloth, mild soap, and water.Do not remove grease from thesunroof.


Seats and Restraints 3-1

Seats andRestraints

Head RestraintsHead Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Front SeatsSeat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Power Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . 3-4Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Rear SeatsRear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10

Safety BeltsSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14

Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

Safety Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety System Check . . . . . . . . 3-19Safety Belt Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-20

Airbag SystemAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . 3-23When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26

What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28

Servicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33

Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle . . . 3-34

Airbag System Check . . . . . . . . 3-35Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-36

Child RestraintsOlder Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-36Infants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Child Restraint Systems . . . . . 3-41Where to Put the Restraint . . . 3-43Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCHSystem) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat) . . . . 3-54


3-2 Seats and Restraints

Head RestraintsFront Seats

The vehicle's front seats have headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions.

{ WARNING

With head restraints that arenot installed and adjustedproperly, there is a greaterchance that occupants will suffera neck/spinal injury in a crash.Do not drive until the headrestraints for all occupants areinstalled and adjusted properly.

Adjust the head restraint so that thetop of the restraint is at the sameheight as the top of the occupant'shead. This position reduces thechance of a neck injury in a crash.

The height of the head restraint canbe adjusted. Pull the head restraintup to raise it. Try to move the headrestraint to make sure that it islocked in place.



To lower the head restraint, pressthe button, located on the top ofthe seatback, and push the headrestraint down. Try to move thehead restraint after the button isreleased to make sure that it islocked in place.

The front seat outboard headrestraints are not designed to beremoved.

Rear Seats

The vehicle's rear seat has headrestraints in the outboard seatingpositions that cannot be adjusted.

Rear outboard head restraints arenot designed to be removed.

Front Seats

Seat Adjustment

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

To adjust a manual seat:

1. Pull the handle at the front of theseat cushion.

2. Move the seat forward orrearward to adjust the seatposition.

3. Release the handle to stop theseat from moving.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to be sure it is locked inplace.



Power Seat AdjustmentFour‐Way Power Driver Seat

A. Seat Position Handle

B. Height Adjustment Control


rearward using the handle underthe front of the seat cushion (A).See Seat Adjustment onpage 3‑3.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the control (B) upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.

To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3‑5.

Eight‐Way Power Seats


rearward by sliding the controlforward or rearward.

. Raise or lower the front orrear part of the seat cushionby moving the front or rear ofthe control up or down.

. Raise or lower the entire seatby moving the entire control upor down.

To adjust the seatback, seeReclining Seatbacks on page 3‑5.



To adjust the lumbar support, seeLumbar Adjustment on page 3‑5.

Lumbar Adjustment

Power Lumbar

Eight-Way Power Seat Shown,Four-Way Similar

A. Lumbar Switch

If available, press and hold thefront or rear of the switch (A) toincrease or decrease lumbarsupport. Release the switch whenthe seatback reaches the desiredlevel of lumbar support.

Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

Sitting in a reclined position whenthe vehicle is in motion can bedangerous. Even when buckledup, the safety belts cannot dotheir job when reclined like this.

The shoulder belt cannot do itsjob because it will not be againstyour body. Instead, it will be infront of you. In a crash, you couldgo into it, receiving neck or otherinjuries.

The lap belt cannot do its jobeither. In a crash, the belt couldgo up over your abdomen.The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. Thiscould cause serious internalinjuries.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

For proper protection when thevehicle is in motion, have theseatback upright. Then sit wellback in the seat and wear thesafety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined ifthe vehicle is moving.



Manual Reclining Seatbacks

{ WARNING

You can lose control of thevehicle if you try to adjust amanual driver seat while thevehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle andconfuse you, or make you pusha pedal when you do not want to.Adjust the driver seat only whenthe vehicle is not moving.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

To recline a manual seatback:

1. Lift the lever.

2. Move the seatback to thedesired position, and thenrelease the lever to lock theseatback in place.


To return the seatback to the uprightposition:

1. Lift the lever fully withoutapplying pressure to theseatback, and the seatbackwill return to the uprightposition.




Power Reclining Seatbacks

To adjust a power seatback,if available:. Tilt the top of the control

rearward to recline.. Tilt the top of the control forward

to raise.

Memory Seats

On vehicles with the memoryfeature, the “1” and “2” buttonson the outboard side of the driverseat are used to manually save andrecall the driver seat and outsidemirror positions. These manuallystored positions are referred toas Button Memory positions.

The vehicle will also automaticallysave driver seat and outside mirrorpositions to the current driverRemote Keyless Entry (RKE)transmitter when the ignition isturned off. These automaticallystored positions are referred toas RKE Memory positions.See Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System Operation on page 2‑3for more information.

Storing Button Memory Positions

To save positions into ButtonMemory:

1. Adjust the driver seat, seatbackrecliner, and both outside mirrorsto the desired driving positions.

2. Press and hold MEM (Memory)and “1” at the same time until abeep sounds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2 for asecond driver using “2.”



Recalling Button MemoryPositions

To recall the manually savedButton Memory positions, pressand hold “1” or “2.” The driver seatand outside mirrors move to thepositions stored to those buttonswhen pressed. Releasing “1” or “2”before the stored positions arereached stops the recall.

If something has blocked thedriver seat while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction; thenpress and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by pressing the appropriatememory button. If the memoryposition is still not recalling,see your dealer for service.

Recalling RKE Memory Positions(Memory Remote Recall)

The Memory Remote Recall featurecan recall the driver seat andoutside mirrors to previously storedRKE Memory positions whenentering the vehicle.

Every time the ignition is turnedoff, the positions of the driverseat and outside mirrors areautomatically stored to the RKEtransmitter that was used to startthe vehicle. These positions arecalled RKE Memory positions andmay be different than the previouslymentioned Button Memory positionssaved to the “1” or “2” buttons.To automatically recall RKE Memorypositions, unlock the driver doorwith the RKE transmitter and openthe driver door. If the driver dooris already open, pressing theRKE transmitter K button will alsoactivate the RKE Memory recall.

The driver seat and outside mirrorswill move to the previously savedRKE Memory positions.

This feature is turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Memory Remote Recall”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33 for more information.

To stop recall movement, pressany of the memory, power mirror,or power seat controls.

If something has blocked thedriver seat while recalling amemory position, the recall maystop. Remove the obstruction; thenpress and hold the appropriatemanual control for the memory itemthat is not recalling for two seconds.Try recalling the memory positionagain by opening the driver doorand pressing the RKE K button.If the memory position is still notrecalling, see your dealer forservice.




This feature moves the seatrearward allowing the driver moreroom to exit the vehicle.

To activate, turn the ignition off andopen the driver door. If the driverdoor is already open, turning theignition off will activate the easyexit driver seat.

This feature can be turned on or offusing the vehicle personalizationmenu. See “Easy Exit Driver Seat”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33 for more information.

To stop recall movement, pressone of the memory or power seatcontrols.

If something has blocked the driverseat while recalling the exit position,the recall may stop. Remove theobstruction; then press and holdthe power seat control rearward fortwo seconds. Try recalling the exitposition again. If the exit position isstill not recalling, see your dealer forservice.

Heated Front Seats

{ WARNING

If you cannot feel temperaturechange or pain to the skin,the seat heater may causeburns even at low temperatures.To reduce the risk of burns,people with such a conditionshould use care when usingthe seat heater, especially forlong periods of time. Do notplace anything on the seat thatinsulates against heat, suchas a blanket, cushion, cover,or similar item. This may causethe seat heater to overheat.An overheated seat heater maycause a burn or may damagethe seat.

Uplevel Climate Control SystemShown, Base Similar

If available, the buttons are nearthe climate controls. To operate,the ignition must be in ON/RUN.

Press z or J to heat the driveror passenger seat cushion andseatback.

Press the button once for thehighest setting. With each pressof the button, the heated seatwill change to the next lowersetting, and then the off setting.



Three lights indicate the highestsetting, and one light indicates thelowest.

The passenger seat may takelonger to heat up.

Remote Start Heated Seats

When it is cold outside, the heatedseats can be programmed to turnon automatically during a remotevehicle start. The heated seats willbe canceled when the ignition isturned on. Press the heated seatbutton to use the heated seats afterthe vehicle is started.

The heated seat button lights willnot turn on during a remote start.

The temperature of an unoccupiedseat may be reduced.

To program the heated seat featureto enabled, see “Remote StartAuto Heat Seats” under VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑33 formore information.

Rear SeatsSplit Folding Seatbacks

With this feature, either side of therear seatback can be folded downfor more cargo space.

{ WARNING

If either seatback is not locked, itcould move forward in a suddenstop or crash. That could causeinjury to the person sitting there.Always push and pull on theseatbacks to be sure they arelocked.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is improperlyrouted, not properly attached,or twisted will not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. After raisingthe rear seatback, always checkto be sure that the safety beltsare properly routed and attached,and are not twisted.



To fold the seatback down:

Notice: Folding a rear seat withthe safety belts still fastened maycause damage to the seat or thesafety belts. Always unbuckle thesafety belts and return them totheir normal stowed positionbefore folding a rear seat.

1. Unbuckle the rear safetybelts and place the frontseatbacks in the upright position.See Reclining Seatbacks onpage 3‑5. 2. Lift the lever on the top of the

seatback.

3. Fold the seatback forward.

The filler panel behind the seatwill fold with the seatback tospan the gap between the rearof the seat and the cargo area,creating a flat load floor. Do notlift the filler panel.

Keep the seatback in the upright,locked position when not in use.

To recline the seatback:

1. Lift and hold the lever on top ofthe seatback.

2. Tilt the seatback rearward,then release the lever whenthe seatback is in the desiredposition.

To slide the entire seat forward orrearward:

1. Lift and hold the release barunder the front of the seatcushion to unlock the seat.

2. Slide the seat to the desiredposition.

3. Release the bar.

4. Try to move the seat back andforth to ensure the seat is lockedinto place.



Safety BeltsThis section of the manualdescribes how to use safety beltsproperly. It also describes somethings not to do with safety belts.

{ WARNING

Do not let anyone ride wherea safety belt cannot be wornproperly. In a crash, if you or yourpassenger(s) are not wearingsafety belts, injuries can be muchworse than if you are wearingsafety belts. You can be seriouslyinjured or killed by hitting thingsinside the vehicle harder or bybeing ejected from the vehicle.In addition, anyone who is notbuckled up can strike otherpassengers in the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

It is extremely dangerous toride in a cargo area, inside oroutside of a vehicle. In a collision,passengers riding in these areasare more likely to be seriouslyinjured or killed. Do not allowpassengers to ride in any area ofthe vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts.

Always wear a safety belt, andcheck that all passenger(s) arerestrained properly too.

This vehicle has indicators as areminder to buckle the safety belts.See Safety Belt Reminders onpage 5‑11 for additional information.

Why Safety Belts Work

When riding in a vehicle, you travelas fast as the vehicle does. If thevehicle stops suddenly, you keepgoing until something stops you.It could be the windshield, theinstrument panel, or the safety belts!



When you wear a safety belt, youand the vehicle slow down together.There is more time to stop becauseyou stop over a longer distance and,when worn properly, your strongestbones take the forces from thesafety belts. That is why wearingsafety belts makes such goodsense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicleafter a crash if I am wearing asafety belt?

A: You could be — whether youare wearing a safety belt or not.Your chance of being consciousduring and after a crash, so youcan unbuckle and get out, ismuch greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, whyshould I have to wear safetybelts?

A: Airbags are supplementalsystems only; so they work withsafety belts — not instead ofthem. Whether or not an airbagis provided, all occupants stillhave to buckle up to get themost protection.

Also, in nearly all states and inall Canadian provinces, the lawrequires wearing safety belts.

How to Wear Safety BeltsProperlyThis section is only for people ofadult size.

There are special things to knowabout safety belts and children.And there are different rules forsmaller children and infants. If achild will be riding in the vehicle,see Older Children on page 3‑36or Infants and Young Children onpage 3‑38. Follow those rules foreveryone's protection.

It is very important for all occupantsto buckle up. Statistics show thatunbelted people are hurt more oftenin crashes than those who arewearing safety belts.

There are important things to knowabout wearing a safety belt properly.



. Sit up straight and always keepyour feet on the floor in frontof you.

. Always use the correct bucklefor your seating position.

. Wear the lap part of the beltlow and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs. In a crash,this applies force to the strongpelvic bones and you would beless likely to slide under thelap belt. If you slid under it, thebelt would apply force on yourabdomen. This could causeserious or even fatal injuries.

. Wear the shoulder belt overthe shoulder and across thechest. These parts of the bodyare best able to take beltrestraining forces. The shoulderbelt locks if there is a suddenstop or crash.

{ WARNING

You can be seriously injured,or even killed, by not wearingyour safety belt properly.

. Never allow the lap orshoulder belt to becomeloose or twisted.

. Never wear the shoulder beltunder both arms or behindyour back.

. Never route the lap orshoulder belt over anarmrest.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll seating positions in the vehiclehave a lap-shoulder belt.

The following instructions explainhow to wear a lap-shoulder beltproperly.

1. Adjust the seat, if the seat isadjustable, so you can sit upstraight. To see how, see “Seats”in the Index.

2. Pick up the latch plate and pullthe belt across you. Do not let itget twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock ifyou pull the belt across you veryquickly. If this happens, let thebelt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across youmore slowly.

If the shoulder portion of apassenger belt is pulled outall the way, the child restraintlocking feature may be engaged.If this happens, let the belt goback all the way and start again.



3. Push the latch plate into thebuckle until it clicks.

Pull up on the latch plate tomake sure it is secure. If the beltis not long enough, see SafetyBelt Extender on page 3‑19.

Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. If equipped with a shoulderbelt height adjuster, move it tothe height that is right for you.See “Shoulder Belt HeightAdjuster” later in this sectionfor instructions on use andimportant safety information.

5. To make the lap part tight,pull up on the shoulder belt.

To unlatch the belt, push the buttonon the buckle.

Before a door is closed, be surethe safety belt is out of the way.If a door is slammed against asafety belt, damage can occur toboth the safety belt and the vehicle.



Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster

The vehicle has a shoulder beltheight adjuster for the driver andright front passenger seatingpositions.

Adjust the height so the shoulderportion of the belt is on theshoulder and not falling off of it.The belt should be close to, butnot contacting, the neck. Impropershoulder belt height adjustmentcould reduce the effectiveness ofthe safety belt in a crash. See Howto Wear Safety Belts Properly onpage 3‑13.

Move the height adjuster up to thedesired position by pushing up onthe height adjuster.

After the height adjuster is set tothe desired position, try to move itdown without pressing the releasebutton (A) to make sure it haslocked into position. Press therelease button to lower the heightadjuster.

Safety Belt Pretensioners

This vehicle has safety beltpretensioners for front outboardoccupants. Although the safetybelt pretensioners cannot be seen,they are part of the safety beltassembly. They can help tightenthe safety belts during the earlystages of a moderate to severefrontal and near frontal crash if thethreshold conditions for pretensioneractivation are met. And, if thevehicle has side impact airbags,safety belt pretensioners can helptighten the safety belts in a sidecrash or a rollover event.

Pretensioners work only once.If the pretensioners are activatedin a crash, the pretensioners andpossibly other parts of the safetybelt system will need to be replaced.See Replacing Safety Belt SystemParts after a Crash on page 3‑20.



Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides

This vehicle may have rear shoulderbelt comfort guides. If not, theyare available through your dealer.The guides may provide addedsafety belt comfort for older childrenwho have outgrown booster seatsand for some adults. When installedand properly adjusted, the comfortguide positions the belt away fromthe neck and head.

There is one guide for each outsidepassenger position in the rear seat.Here is how to install a comfortguide to the safety belt:

1. Remove the guide from itsstorage pocket on the sideof the seatback.

2. Place the guide over the belt,and insert the two edges of thebelt into the slots of the guide.



3. The belt should not be twistedand it should lie flat. The elasticcord must be under the belt andthe guide on top.

{ WARNING

A safety belt that is not properlyworn may not provide theprotection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt couldbe seriously injured. The shoulderbelt should go over the shoulderand across the chest. These partsof the body are best able to takebelt restraining forces.

4. Buckle, position, and releasethe safety belt as describedpreviously in this section. Makesure the shoulder portion of thebelt is on the shoulder and notfalling off of it. The belt shouldbe close to, but not contacting,the neck.

To remove and store the comfortguide, squeeze the belt edgestogether so that the safety beltcan be removed from the guide.Slide the guide back into its storagepocket located on the side of theseatback.



Safety Belt Use DuringPregnancySafety belts work for everyone,including pregnant women. Like alloccupants, they are more likely tobe seriously injured if they do notwear safety belts.

A pregnant woman should weara lap-shoulder belt, and the lapportion should be worn as lowas possible, below the rounding,throughout the pregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus isto protect the mother. When a safetybelt is worn properly, it is more likelythat the fetus will not be hurt in acrash. For pregnant women, as foranyone, the key to making safetybelts effective is wearing themproperly.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle's safety belt will fastenaround you, you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not longenough, your dealer will order youan extender. When you go in toorder it, take the heaviest coat youwill wear, so the extender will belong enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someoneelse use it, and use it only for theseat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults.Never use it for securing child seats.To wear it, attach it to the regularsafety belt. For more information,see the instruction sheet that comeswith the extender.

Safety System CheckNow and then, check that the safetybelt reminder light, safety belts,buckles, latch plates, retractors,and anchorages are all workingproperly. Look for any other loose ordamaged safety belt system partsthat might keep a safety belt systemfrom doing its job. See your dealerto have it repaired. Torn or frayedsafety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart underimpact forces. If a belt is torn orfrayed, get a new one right away.

Make sure the safety belt reminderlight is working. See Safety BeltReminders on page 5‑11 for moreinformation.

Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Safety Belt Care on page 3‑20.



Safety Belt CareKeep belts clean and dry.

{ WARNING

Do not bleach or dye safety belts.It may severely weaken them.In a crash, they might not be ableto provide adequate protection.Clean safety belts only with mildsoap and lukewarm water.

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after aCrash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage the safetybelt system in the vehicle.A damaged safety belt systemmay not properly protect theperson using it, resulting inserious injury or even death ina crash. To help make sure thesafety belt systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

After a minor crash, replacement ofsafety belts may not be necessary.But the safety belt assemblies thatwere used during any crash mayhave been stressed or damaged.See your dealer to have the safetybelt assemblies inspected orreplaced.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the safety beltsystem was not being used at thetime of the crash.

Have the safety belt pretensionerschecked if the vehicle has been in acrash, or if the airbag readiness lightstays on after you start the vehicleor while you are driving. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑11.



Airbag SystemThe vehicle has the followingairbags:. A frontal airbag for the driver.. A frontal airbag for the right front

passenger.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the driver.. A seat-mounted side impact

airbag for the right frontpassenger.

. A roof-rail airbag for the driverand the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver.

. A roof-rail airbag for the rightfront passenger and thepassenger seated directlybehind the right front passenger.

All of the airbags in the vehicle willhave the word AIRBAG embossedin the trim or on an attached labelnear the deployment opening.

For frontal airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear on the middlepart of the steering wheel for thedriver and on the instrument panelfor the right front passenger.

With seat-mounted side impactairbags, the word AIRBAG willappear on the side of the seatbackclosest to the door.

With roof-rail airbags, the wordAIRBAG will appear along the trim.

Airbags are designed to supplementthe protection provided by safetybelts. Even though today's airbagsare also designed to help reducethe risk of injury from the force of aninflating bag, all airbags must inflatevery quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important thingsto know about the airbag system:

{ WARNING

You can be severely injuredor killed in a crash if you arenot wearing your safety belt,even with airbags. Airbags aredesigned to work with safetybelts, not replace them. Also,airbags are not designed to inflatein every crash. In some crashessafety belts are the only restraint.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑24.

Wearing your safety belt duringa crash helps reduce the chanceof hitting things inside the vehicleor being ejected from it. Airbagsare “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. Everyone in thevehicle should wear a safety beltproperly, whether or not there isan airbag for that person.



{ WARNING

Because airbags inflate with greatforce and faster than the blinkof an eye, anyone who is upagainst, or very close to anyairbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Do notsit unnecessarily close to anyairbag, as you would be if sittingon the edge of the seat or leaningforward. Safety belts help keepyou in position before and duringa crash. Always wear a safetybelt, even with airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possiblewhile still maintaining control ofthe vehicle.

Occupants should not lean onor sleep against the door or sidewindows in seating positions withseat-mounted side impact airbagsand/or roof-rail airbags.

{ WARNING

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbagwhen it inflates can be seriouslyinjured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protectionfor adults and older children,but not for young children andinfants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them.Young children and infantsneed the protection that a childrestraint system can provide.Always secure children properlyin the vehicle. To read how, seeOlder Children on page 3‑36 orInfants and Young Children onpage 3‑38.

There is an airbag readiness lighton the instrument panel cluster,which shows the airbag symbol.

The system checks the airbagelectrical system for malfunctions.The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑11for more information.



Where Are the Airbags?

The driver frontal airbag is in themiddle of the steering wheel.

The right front passenger frontalairbag is in the instrument panel onthe passenger side.

Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

The seat-mounted side impactairbags for the driver and right frontpassenger are in the side of theseatbacks closest to the door.



Driver Side Shown,Passenger Side Similar

The roof-rail airbags for the driver,right front passenger, and secondrow outboard passengers are in theceiling above the side windows.

{ WARNING

If something is between anoccupant and an airbag, theairbag might not inflate properlyor it might force the object intothat person causing severe injuryor even death. The path of aninflating airbag must be keptclear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and anairbag, and do not attach or putanything on the steering wheelhub or on or near any otherairbag covering.

Do not use seat accessoriesthat block the inflation path of aseat-mounted side impact airbag.

Never secure anything to the roofof a vehicle with roof-rail airbagsby routing a rope or tie‐downthrough any door or windowopening. If you do, the pathof an inflating roof-rail airbagwill be blocked.

When Should an AirbagInflate?Frontal airbags are designedto inflate in moderate to severefrontal or near-frontal crashes tohelp reduce the potential for severeinjuries mainly to the driver's or rightfront passenger's head and chest.However, they are only designedto inflate if the impact exceedsa predetermined deploymentthreshold. Deployment thresholdsare used to predict how severe acrash is likely to be in time for theairbags to inflate and help restrainthe occupants.

Whether the frontal airbags willor should deploy is not based onhow fast your vehicle is traveling.It depends largely on what you hit,the direction of the impact, and howquickly your vehicle slows down.



Frontal airbags may inflateat different crash speeds.For example:. If the vehicle hits a stationary

object, the airbags could inflateat a different crash speed than ifthe vehicle hits a moving object.

. If the vehicle hits an objectthat deforms, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits an objectthat does not deform.

. If the vehicle hits a narrow object(like a pole), the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a wideobject (like a wall).

. If the vehicle goes into an objectat an angle, the airbags couldinflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle goes straightinto the object.

Thresholds can also vary withspecific vehicle design.

Frontal airbags are not intended toinflate during vehicle rollovers, rearimpacts, or in many side impacts.

In addition, the vehicle hasdual-stage frontal airbags.Dual-stage airbags adjust therestraint according to crash severity.The vehicle has electronic frontalsensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between amoderate frontal impact anda more severe frontal impact.For moderate frontal impacts,dual-stage airbags inflate at alevel less than full deployment.For more severe frontal impacts,full deployment occurs.

The vehicle has seat-mountedside impact and roof-rail airbags.See Airbag System on page 3‑21.Seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags are intended toinflate in moderate to severe sidecrashes. In addition, these roof-railairbags are intended to inflateduring a rollover or in a severefrontal impact. Seat-mounted sideimpact and roof-rail airbags will

inflate if the crash severity is abovethe system's designed thresholdlevel. The threshold level can varywith specific vehicle design.

Seat-mounted side impact airbagsare not intended to inflate in frontalimpacts, near-frontal impacts,rollovers, or rear impacts. Roof-railairbags are not intended to inflate inrear impacts. A seat-mounted sideimpact airbag is intended to deployon the side of the vehicle that isstruck. Both roof-rail airbags willdeploy when either side of thevehicle is struck, or if the sensingsystem predicts that the vehicle isabout to roll over, or in a severefrontal impact.

In any particular crash, no onecan say whether an airbag shouldhave inflated simply because of thedamage to a vehicle or becauseof what the repair costs were.For frontal airbags, inflation isdetermined by what the vehicle hits,the angle of the impact, and howquickly the vehicle slows down.



For seat-mounted side impact androof-rail airbags, deployment isdetermined by the location andseverity of the side impact. In arollover event, roof-rail airbagdeployment is determined by thedirection of the roll.

What Makes an AirbagInflate?In a deployment event, the sensingsystem sends an electrical signaltriggering a release of gas from theinflator. Gas from the inflator fills theairbag causing the bag to break outof the cover. The inflator, the airbag,and related hardware are all part ofthe airbag module.

For airbag location, see Where Arethe Airbags? on page 3‑23.

How Does an AirbagRestrain?In moderate to severe frontal ornear frontal collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the steeringwheel or the instrument panel.In moderate to severe sidecollisions, even belted occupantscan contact the inside of thevehicle.

Airbags supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts.Frontal airbags distribute theforce of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's upper body,stopping the occupant moregradually. Seat‐mounted side impactand roof-rail airbags distribute theforce of the impact more evenlyover the occupant's upper body.

Rollover capable roof-rail airbagsare designed to help contain thehead and chest of occupants in theoutboard seating positions in thefirst and second rows. The rollovercapable roof-rail airbags aredesigned to help reduce the riskof full or partial ejection in rolloverevents, although no system canprevent all such ejections.

But airbags would not help inmany types of collisions, primarilybecause the occupant's motionis not toward those airbags.See When Should an AirbagInflate? on page 3‑24 for moreinformation.

Airbags should never be regardedas anything more than a supplementto safety belts.



What Will You See afteran Airbag Inflates?After the frontal airbags andseat-mounted side impact airbagsinflate, they quickly deflate, soquickly that some people may noteven realize an airbag inflated.Roof-rail airbags may still be at leastpartially inflated for some time afterthey inflate. Some components ofthe airbag module may be hot forseveral minutes. For location ofthe airbags, see Where Are theAirbags? on page 3‑23.

The parts of the airbag that comeinto contact with you may be warm,but not too hot to touch. There maybe some smoke and dust comingfrom the vents in the deflatedairbags. Airbag inflation does notprevent the driver from seeing outof the windshield or being able tosteer the vehicle, nor does it preventpeople from leaving the vehicle.

{ WARNING

When an airbag inflates,there may be dust in the air.This dust could cause breathingproblems for people with a historyof asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyonein the vehicle should get out assoon as it is safe to do so. If youhave breathing problems butcannot get out of the vehicle afteran airbag inflates, then get freshair by opening a window or adoor. If you experience breathingproblems following an airbagdeployment, you should seekmedical attention.

The vehicle has a feature that mayautomatically unlock the doors,turn the interior lamps on, turn thehazard warning flashers on, and

shut off the fuel system after theairbags inflate. You can lock thedoors, turn the interior lamps off,and turn the hazard warningflashers off by using the controlsfor those features.

{ WARNING

A crash severe enough to inflatethe airbags may have alsodamaged important functionsin the vehicle, such as the fuelsystem, brake and steeringsystems, etc. Even if the vehicleappears to be drivable after amoderate crash, there may beconcealed damage that couldmake it difficult to safely operatethe vehicle.

Use caution if you should attemptto restart the engine after a crashhas occurred.



In many crashes severe enoughto inflate the airbag, windshieldsare broken by vehicle deformation.Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the front outboardpassenger airbag.. Airbags are designed to inflate

only once. After an airbaginflates, you will need somenew parts for the airbag system.If you do not get them, theairbag system will not be thereto help protect you in anothercrash. A new system will includeairbag modules and possiblyother parts. The service manualfor the vehicle covers the needto replace other parts.

. The vehicle has a crashsensing and diagnostic modulewhich records informationafter a crash. See VehicleData Recording and Privacy onpage 13‑21 and Event DataRecorders on page 13‑21.

. Let only qualified technicianswork on the airbag systems.Improper service can mean thatan airbag system will not workproperly. See your dealer forservice.

Passenger SensingSystemThe vehicle has a passengersensing system for the right frontpassenger position. The passengerairbag status indicator will be visibleon the overhead console when thevehicle is started.

United States

Canada and Mexico

The words ON and OFF, or thesymbol for on and off, are visibleduring the system check. If youare using remote start, if equipped,to start the vehicle from a distance,you may not see the systemcheck. When the system check iscomplete, either the word ON orOFF, or the symbol for on or off, willbe visible. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 5‑12.



The passenger sensing systemturns off the right front passengerfrontal airbag under certainconditions. The driver airbag,seat‐mounted side impact airbagsand the roof-rail airbags arenot affected by the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing systemworks with sensors that are partof the right front passenger seat.The sensors are designed to detectthe presence of a properly-seatedoccupant and determine if the rightfront passenger frontal airbagshould be enabled (may inflate)or not.

According to accident statistics,children are safer when properlysecured in a rear seat in the correctchild restraint for their weightand size.

We recommend that children besecured in a rear seat, including:an infant or a child riding in arear-facing child restraint; a childriding in a forward-facing child seat;an older child riding in a boosterseat; and children, who are largeenough, using safety belts.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right front

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

passenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though theairbag is turned off.

Secure rear-facing child restraintsin a rear seat, even if theairbag is off. If you secure aforward-facing child restraint inthe right front seat, always movethe front passenger seat as farback as it will go. It is better tosecure the child restraint in arear seat.



The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag if:. The right front passenger seat is

unoccupied.. The system determines that

an infant is present in a childrestraint.

. A right front passenger takeshis/her weight off of the seat fora period of time.

. Or, if there is a critical problemwith the airbag system or thepassenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag, the offindicator will light and stay lit toremind you that the airbag is off.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑12.

The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn on (may inflate)the right front passenger frontalairbag anytime the system sensesthat a person of adult size issitting properly in the right frontpassenger seat.

When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbag to beenabled, the on indicator will lightand stay lit to remind you that theairbag is active.

For some children, includingchildren in child restraints, and forvery small adults, the passengersensing system may or may notturn off the right front passengerfrontal airbag, depending uponthe person’s seating posture andbody build. Everyone in the vehiclewho has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety beltproperly — whether or not thereis an airbag for that person.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.



If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint

If a child restraint has been installedand the on indicator is lit:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove the child restraint fromthe vehicle.

3. Remove any additional itemsfrom the seat such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

4. Reinstall the child restraintfollowing the directionsprovided by the child restraintmanufacturer and refer toSecuring Child Restraints(Rear Seat ) on page 3‑51 orSecuring Child Restraints (FrontPassenger Seat) on page 3‑54.

5. If, after reinstalling the childrestraint and restarting thevehicle, the on indicator isstill lit, turn the vehicle off.Then slightly recline the vehicleseatback and adjust the seatcushion, if adjustable, to makesure that the vehicle seatback isnot pushing the child restraintinto the seat cushion.

Also make sure the childrestraint is not trapped underthe vehicle head restraint.If this happens, adjust the headrestraint. See Head Restraintson page 3‑2.

6. Restart the vehicle.

The passenger sensing systemmay or may not turn off theairbag for a child in a childrestraint depending upon thechild’s seating posture and bodybuild. It is better to secure thechild restraint in a rear seat.

If the Off Indicator is Lit for anAdult-Size Occupant

If a person of adult-size is sittingin the right front passenger seat,but the off indicator is lit, it couldbe because that person is notsitting properly in the seat.



If this happens, use the followingsteps to allow the system to detectthat person and enable the rightfront passenger frontal airbag:

1. Turn the vehicle off.

2. Remove any additional materialfrom the seat, such as blankets,cushions, seat covers, seatheaters, or seat massagers.

3. Place the seatback in the fullyupright position.

4. Have the person sit upright inthe seat, centered on the seatcushion, with legs comfortablyextended.

5. Restart the vehicle and have theperson remain in this position fortwo to three minutes after the onindicator is lit.

Additional Factors AffectingSystem Operation

Safety belts help keep thepassenger in position on theseat during vehicle maneuversand braking, which helps thepassenger sensing system maintainthe passenger airbag status.See “Safety Belts” and “ChildRestraints” in the Index foradditional information about theimportance of proper restraint use.

A thick layer of additional material,such as a blanket or cushion,or aftermarket equipment suchas seat covers, seat heaters, andseat massagers can affect howwell the passenger sensing systemoperates. We recommend thatyou not use seat covers or otheraftermarket equipment except whenapproved by GM for your specificvehicle. See Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑34 for more informationabout modifications that can affecthow the system operates.

A wet seat can affect theperformance of the passengersensing system. Here is how:. The passenger sensing system

may turn off the passengerairbag when liquid is soakedinto the seat. If this happens,the off indicator will be lit, andthe airbag readiness light on theinstrument panel will also be lit.

. Liquid pooled on the seat thathas not soaked in may make itmore likely that the passengersensing system will enable (turnon) the passenger airbag while achild restraint or child occupantis on the seat. If the passengerairbag is turned on, the onindicator will be lit.

If the passenger seat gets wet, drythe seat immediately. If the airbagreadiness light is lit, do not installa child restraint or allow anyoneto occupy the seat. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 5‑11for important safety information.



The on indicator may be lit ifan object, such as a briefcase,handbag, grocery bag, laptop orother electronic device, is put onan unoccupied seat. If this is notdesired remove the object fromthe seat.

{ WARNING

Stowing of articles under thepassenger seat or between thepassenger seat cushion andseatback may interfere with theproper operation of the passengersensing system.

Servicing theAirbag-Equipped VehicleAirbags affect how the vehicleshould be serviced. There areparts of the airbag system inseveral places around the vehicle.Your dealer and the service manualhave information about servicingthe vehicle and the airbag system.To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑18.

{ WARNING

For up to 10 seconds after thevehicle is turned off and thebattery is disconnected, an airbagcan still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if youare close to an airbag when itinflates. Avoid yellow connectors.They are probably part of theairbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, andmake sure the person performingwork for you is qualified to do so.



Adding Equipment to theAirbag-Equipped VehicleQ: Is there anything I might add

to or change about the vehiclethat could keep the airbagsfrom working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things thatchange the vehicle's frame,bumper system, height, frontend or side sheet metal, theymay keep the airbag systemfrom working properly. Changingor moving any parts of the frontseats, safety belts, the airbagsensing and diagnostic module,steering wheel, instrumentpanel, roof-rail airbag modules,ceiling headliner or pillar garnishtrim, overhead console, frontsensors, side impact sensors,rollover sensor module, or airbagwiring can affect the operation ofthe airbag system.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing systemfor the right front passengerposition, which includessensors that are part of thepassenger seat. The passengersensing system may not operateproperly if the original seattrim is replaced with non-GMcovers, upholstery or trim,or with GM covers, upholsteryor trim designed for a differentvehicle. Any object, such asan aftermarket seat heater ora comfort enhancing pad ordevice, installed under or on topof the seat fabric, could alsointerfere with the operation ofthe passenger sensing system.This could either prevent properdeployment of the passengerairbag(s) or prevent thepassenger sensing systemfrom properly turning offthe passenger airbag(s).See Passenger SensingSystem on page 3‑28.

If you have questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Twoof the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑1 or CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (Mexico)on page 13‑3.

If the vehicle has rolloverroof-rail airbags, see DifferentSize Tires and Wheels onpage 10‑63 for additionalimportant information.



Q: Because I have a disability,I have to get my vehiclemodified. How can I find outwhether this will affect myairbag system?

A: If you have questions,call Customer Assistance.The phone numbers andaddresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Twoof the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual.See Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. and Canada) onpage 13‑1 or CustomerSatisfaction Procedure (Mexico)on page 13‑3.

In addition, your dealer and theservice manual have informationabout the location of the airbagsensors, sensing and diagnosticmodule and airbag wiring.

Airbag System CheckThe airbag system does not needregularly scheduled maintenanceor replacement. Make sure theairbag readiness light is working.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑11 for more information.

Notice: If an airbag covering isdamaged, opened, or broken,the airbag may not work properly.Do not open or break the airbagcoverings. If there are anyopened or broken airbag covers,have the airbag covering and/orairbag module replaced. For thelocation of the airbags, seeWhere Are the Airbags? onpage 3‑23. See your dealerfor service.



Replacing Airbag SystemParts after a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theairbag systems in the vehicle.A damaged airbag systemmay not work properly andmay not protect you and yourpassenger(s) in a crash, resultingin serious injury or even death.To help make sure the airbagsystems are working properlyafter a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soonas possible.

If an airbag inflates, you will needto replace airbag system parts.See your dealer for service.

If the airbag readiness light stays onafter the vehicle is started or comeson when you are driving, the airbagsystem may not work properly. Havethe vehicle serviced right away.See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 5‑11 for more information.

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrownbooster seats should wear thevehicle safety belts.



The manufacturer's instructions thatcome with the booster seat state theweight and height limitations for thatbooster. Use a booster seat with alap-shoulder belt until the childpasses the fit test below:. Sit all the way back on the seat.

Do the knees bend at the seatedge? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Buckle the lap-shoulder belt.Does the shoulder belt rest onthe shoulder? If yes, continue.If no, try using the rear safetybelt comfort guide. See “RearSafety Belt Comfort Guides”under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑14 for more information.If the shoulder belt still does notrest on the shoulder, then returnto the booster seat.

. Does the lap belt fit low andsnug on the hips, touching thethighs? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

. Can proper safety belt fit bemaintained for the length of thetrip? If yes, continue. If no,return to the booster seat.

Q: What is the proper way towear safety belts?

A: An older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get theadditional restraint a shoulderbelt can provide. The shoulderbelt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fitsnugly below the hips, justtouching the top of the thighs.This applies belt force to thechild's pelvic bones in a crash.It should never be worn over theabdomen, which could causesevere or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

Also see “Rear Safety Belt ComfortGuides” under Lap-Shoulder Belt onpage 3‑14.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

In a crash, children who are notbuckled up can strike other peoplewho are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Olderchildren need to use safety beltsproperly.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow two children to wearthe same safety belt. The safetybelt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the twochildren can be crushed togetherand seriously injured. A safetybelt must be used by only oneperson at a time.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never allow a child to wear thesafety belt with the shoulder beltbehind their back. A child can beseriously injured by not wearingthe lap-shoulder belt properly.In a crash, the child would not berestrained by the shoulder belt.The child could move too farforward increasing the chance ofhead and neck injury. The childmight also slide under the lapbelt. The belt force would thenbe applied right on the abdomen.That could cause serious or fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt shouldgo over the shoulder and acrossthe chest.

Infants and YoungChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needsprotection! This includes infantsand all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age andsize of the traveler changes theneed, for everyone, to use safetyrestraints. In fact, the law in everystate in the United States and inevery Canadian province sayschildren up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.



{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder beltis wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continues totighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and neverallow children to play with thesafety belts.

Airbags plus lap‐shoulder beltsoffer protection for adults and olderchildren, but not for young childrenand infants. Neither the vehicle'ssafety belt system nor its airbagsystem is designed for them. Everytime infants and young children ridein vehicles, they should have theprotection provided by appropriatechild restraints.

Children who are not restrainedproperly can strike other people,or can be thrown out of the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Never do this.

Never hold an infant or a childwhile riding in a vehicle. Due tocrash forces, an infant or a childwill become so heavy it is notpossible to hold it during a crash.For example, in a crash at only40 km/h (25 mph), a 5.5 kg (12 lb)infant will suddenly become a110 kg (240 lb) force on a person'sarms. An infant should besecured in an appropriaterestraint.



{ WARNING

Never do this.

Children who are up against,or very close to, any airbag whenit inflates can be seriously injuredor killed. Never put a rear-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat. Secure a rear-facing childrestraint in a rear seat. It is alsobetter to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in a rear seat. If youmust secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right frontseat, always move the frontpassenger seat as far backas it will go.

Q: What are the different types ofadd-on child restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, whichare purchased by the vehicleowner, are available in fourbasic types. Selection of aparticular restraint should takeinto consideration not onlythe child's weight, height, andage but also whether or not therestraint will be compatible withthe motor vehicle in which it willbe used.

For most basic types of childrestraints, there are manydifferent models available.When purchasing a childrestraint, be sure it is designedto be used in a motor vehicle.If it is, the restraint will have alabel saying that it meets federalmotor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer'sinstructions that come with therestraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particularchild restraint. In addition, thereare many kinds of restraintsavailable for children withspecial needs.



{ WARNING

To reduce the risk of neck andhead injury during a crash,infants need complete support.This is because an infant's neckis not fully developed and its headweighs so much compared withthe rest of its body. In a crash,an infant in a rear-facing childrestraint settles into the restraint,so the crash forces can bedistributed across the strongestpart of an infant's body, the backand shoulders. Infants shouldalways be secured in rear-facingchild restraints.

{ WARNING

A young child's hip bones are stillso small that the vehicle's regularsafety belt may not remain lowon the hip bones, as it should.Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child's abdomen. In a crash,the belt would apply force on abody area that is unprotected byany bony structure. This alonecould cause serious or fatalinjuries. To reduce the risk ofserious or fatal injuries during acrash, young children shouldalways be secured in appropriatechild restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

(A) Rear‐Facing Infant Seat

A rear-facing infant seat (A)provides restraint with the seatingsurface against the back of theinfant.

The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts tokeep the infant positioned in therestraint.



(B) Forward-Facing Child Seat

A forward-facing child seat (B)provides restraint for the child'sbody with the harness.

(C) Booster Seats

A booster seat (C) is a childrestraint designed to improve the fitof the vehicle's safety belt system.A booster seat can also help a childto see out the window.

Securing an Add-On ChildRestraint in the Vehicle

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly securedin the vehicle. Secure the childrestraint properly in the vehicleusing the vehicle safety belt orLATCH system, following theinstructions that came with thatchild restraint and the instructionsin this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury,the child restraint must be securedin the vehicle. Child restraintsystems must be secured in vehicleseats by lap belts or the lap beltportion of a lap-shoulder belt, orby the LATCH system. See LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑46for more information.



Children can be endangered in acrash if the child restraint is notproperly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on childrestraint, refer to the instructionsthat come with the restraint whichmay be on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both, and to this manual.The child restraint instructionsare important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacementcopy from the manufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move aroundin a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sureto properly secure any child restraintin the vehicle — even when no childis in it.

In some areas, Certified ChildPassenger Safety Technicians(CPSTs) are available to inspectand demonstrate how to correctlyuse and install child restraints.In the U.S., refer to the NationalHighway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA) websiteto locate the nearest child safetyseat inspection station. For CPSTavailability in Canada, check withTransport Canada or the ProvincialMinistry of Transportation office.

Securing the Child within theChild Restraint

{ WARNING

A child can be seriously injuredor killed in a crash if the childis not properly secured in thechild restraint. Secure the childproperly following the instructionsthat came with that child restraint.

Where to Put theRestraintAccording to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition.

We recommend that children andchild restraints be secured in a rearseat, including: an infant or a childriding in a rear-facing child restraint;a child riding in a forward-facingchild seat; an older child riding in abooster seat; and children, who arelarge enough, using safety belts.

A label on your sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.



{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑28 for additionalinformation.

When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

Child restraints and booster seatsvary considerably in size, and somemay fit in certain seating positionsbetter than others. Always makesure the child restraint is properlysecured.

Depending on where you placethe child restraint and the size ofthe child restraint, you may notbe able to access adjacent safetybelt assemblies or LATCH anchorsfor additional passengers or childrestraints. Adjacent seatingpositions should not be used if thechild restraint prevents access toor interferes with the routing ofthe safety belt.

Wherever a child restraint isinstalled, be sure to secure thechild restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecuredchild restraint can move around in acollision or sudden stop and injurepeople in the vehicle. Be sure toproperly secure any child restraint inyour vehicle — even when no childis in it.



If you need to secure more thanone child restraint in the rear seat,review the following illustrations.Depending on where you placethe child restraint or the size ofthe child restraint, you may not beable to access certain safety beltassemblies or LATCH anchors foradditional passengers or childrestraints.

Configurations for Use of ChildRestraints

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

A. Child restraint using LATCH

B. Occupant prohibited

C. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

A. Child restraint or occupantusing safety belt

B. Child restraint using LATCH



Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System)The LATCH system holds a childrestraint during driving or in a crash.This system is designed to makeinstallation of a child restraint easier.The LATCH system uses anchors inthe vehicle and attachments on thechild restraint that are made for usewith the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatiblechild restraint is properly installedusing the anchors, or use thevehicle's safety belts to secure therestraint, following the instructionsthat came with that restraint, andalso the instructions in this manual.

When installing a child restraintwith a top tether, you must alsouse either the lower anchors or thesafety belts to properly secure thechild restraint. A child restraint mustnever be installed using only the toptether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCHsystem in your vehicle, you needa child restraint that has LATCHattachments. The child restraintmanufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use thechild restraint and its attachments.The following explains how toattach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions orchild restraints have lower anchorsand attachments or top tetheranchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metalbars built into the vehicle. Thereare two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that willaccommodate a child restraintwith lower attachments (B).



Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors thetop of the child restraint to thevehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tetherattachment (B) on the child restraintconnects to the top tether anchor inthe vehicle in order to reduce theforward movement and rotation ofthe child restraint during driving orin a crash.

Your child restraint may havea single tether (A) or a dualtether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the toptether to the anchor.

Some child restraints that havea top tether are designed foruse with or without the top tetherbeing attached. Others require thetop tether always to be attached.In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tetherbe attached. Be sure to read andfollow the instructions for your childrestraint.

Lower Anchor and Top TetherAnchor Locations

Rear Seat

i (Top Tether Anchor): Seatingpositions with top tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor): Seatingpositions with two lower anchors.

The rear outboard seating positionshave exposed metal anchorslocated in the crease between theseatback and the seat cushion.



Top Tether Anchors

The top tether anchors for each rearseating position are located on theback of the rear seatback. The rearcompartment storage panel/covermight need to be adjusted to accessthe anchors. Be sure to use ananchor located on the same side ofthe vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will beplaced.

Do not secure a child restraint in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be attached, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top tethermust be attached.

According to accident statistics,children and infants are saferwhen properly restrained in a childrestraint system or infant restraintsystem secured in a rear seatingposition. See Where to Put theRestraint on page 3‑43 foradditional information.

Securing a Child RestraintDesigned for the LATCHSystem

{ WARNING

If a LATCH-type child restraint isnot attached to anchors, the childrestraint will not be able to protectthe child correctly. In a crash, thechild could be seriously injuredor killed. Install a LATCH-typechild restraint properly using theanchors, or use the vehicle safetybelts to secure the restraint,following the instructions thatcame with the child restraint andthe instructions in this manual.



{ WARNING

Do not attach more than onechild restraint to a single anchor.Attaching more than one childrestraint to a single anchor couldcause the anchor or attachmentto come loose or even breakduring a crash. A child or otherscould be injured. To reduce therisk of serious or fatal injuriesduring a crash, attach only onechild restraint per anchor.

{ WARNING

Children can be seriously injuredor strangled if a shoulder beltis wrapped around their neckand the safety belt continues totighten. Buckle any unused safetybelts behind the child restraint sochildren cannot reach them. Pullthe shoulder belt all the way out

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

of the retractor to set the lock,if the vehicle has one, after thechild restraint has been installed.

Notice: Do not let the LATCHattachments rub against thevehicle’s safety belts. This maydamage these parts. If necessary,move buckled safety belts toavoid rubbing the LATCHattachments.

Do not fold the empty rearseat with a safety belt buckled.This could damage the safety beltor the seat. Unbuckle and returnthe safety belt to its stowedposition, before folding the seat.

Make sure to attach the childrestraint at the proper anchorlocation.

This system is designed to makeinstallation of child restraints easier.When using lower anchors, do notuse the vehicle's safety belts.

Instead use the vehicle's anchorsand child restraint attachmentsto secure the restraints. Somerestraints also use another vehicleanchor to secure a top tether.

1. Attach and tighten thelower attachments to thelower anchors. If the childrestraint does not have lowerattachments or the desiredseating position does not havelower anchors, secure the childrestraint with the top tether andthe safety belts. Refer to thechild restraint manufacturerinstructions and the instructionsin this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchorsfor the desired seatingposition.

1.2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

1.3. Attach and tighten thelower attachments on thechild restraint to the loweranchors.



2. If the child restraint manufacturerrecommends that the top tetherbe attached, attach and tightenthe top tether to the top tetheranchor, if equipped. Refer to thechild restraint instructions andthe following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.

2.2. Route, attach and tightenthe top tether accordingto your child restraintinstructions and thefollowing instructions:

. If the position being useddoes not have a headrestor head restraint and asingle tether is being used,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position being useddoes not have a headrestor head restraint and adual tether is being used,route the tether over theseatback.

. If the position being usedhas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and a dualtether is being used, routethe tether around theheadrest or head restraint.



. If the position being usedhas a fixed headrest orhead restraint and a singletether is being used, routethe tether over the headrestor head restraint.

3. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sureit is securely held in place.To check, grasp the childrestraint at the LATCH pathand attempt to move itside‐to‐side and back‐and‐forth.There should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement, forproper installation.

Replacing LATCH SystemParts After a Crash

{ WARNING

A crash can damage theLATCH system in the vehicle.A damaged LATCH system maynot properly secure the childrestraint, resulting in seriousinjury or even death in a crash.To help make sure the LATCHsystem is working properly aftera crash, see your dealer to havethe system inspected and anynecessary replacements madeas soon as possible.

If the vehicle has the LATCH systemand it was being used during acrash, new LATCH system partsmay be needed.

New parts and repairs may benecessary even if the LATCHsystem was not being used atthe time of the crash.

Securing Child Restraints(Rear Seat)When securing a child restraint ina rear seating position, study theinstructions that came with thechild restraint to make sure it iscompatible with this vehicle.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑46 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured in the vehicle using asafety belt and it uses a top tether,see Lower Anchors and Tethersfor Children (LATCH System) onpage 3‑46 for top tether anchorlocations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.



In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

If the child restraint does not havethe LATCH system, you will beusing the safety belt to securethe child restraint in this position.Be sure to follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

If more than one child restraintneeds to be installed in the rearseat, be sure to read Where toPut the Restraint on page 3‑43.

1. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.


Position the release button onthe buckle so that the safety beltcould be quickly unbuckled ifnecessary.

4. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to setthe lock. When the retractor lockis set, the belt can be tightenedbut not pulled out of theretractor.



5. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.

Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked,repeat Steps 4 and 5.

6. If the child restraint has a toptether, follow the child restraintmanufacturer's instructionsregarding the use of the toptether. See Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑46 for moreinformation.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.If the top tether is attached to a toptether anchor, disconnect it.

Armrest Retaining Strap

{ WARNING

A rear center armrest that is notproperly stowed and securedcould fall forward during a suddenstop or collision. The armrestcould contact an infant securedin a rear‐facing child restraint inthe center seat position. Fastenthe retaining strap onto thestowed armrest before installinga rear‐facing child restraint inthe rear center seat position.

When new, the vehicle's glovebox materials included anarmrest retaining strap.



Use it to secure the center armrestbefore installing a rear‐facing childrestraint in the second row centerseat position.

Stow the rear seat center armrest.Attach the retaining strap tothe armrest loop (A) and to thecenter top tether anchor on theseatback (B). Make sure theretaining strap's clips are firmlyattached.

Install the rear-facing childrestraint using the child restraintmanufacturer's instructions and theinstructions described previously.

Remove the armrest retaining strapbefore installing a forward facingchild restraint in the center seatposition, as it may interfere with theattachment of the top tether to thetop tether anchor on the seatback.

Securing Child Restraints(Front Passenger Seat)This vehicle has airbags. A rearseat is a safer place to securea forward-facing child restraint.See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 3‑43.

In addition, the vehicle has apassenger sensing system whichis designed to turn off the right frontpassenger frontal airbag undercertain conditions. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑28 andPassenger Airbag Status Indicator

on page 5‑12 for more information,including important safetyinformation.

A label on the sun visor says,“Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the riskto the rear-facing child is so great,if the airbag deploys.

{ WARNING

A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the rightfront passenger airbag inflates.This is because the back of therear-facing child restraint wouldbe very close to the inflatingairbag. A child in a forward-facingchild restraint can be seriouslyinjured or killed if the right frontpassenger airbag inflates and thepassenger seat is in a forwardposition.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

Even if the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbag,no system is fail-safe. No onecan guarantee that an airbag willnot deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it isturned off.


See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 3‑28 for additionalinformation.

If the child restraint has the LATCHsystem, see Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCHSystem) on page 3‑46 for how andwhere to install the child restraintusing LATCH. If a child restraintis secured using a safety belt andit uses a top tether, see LowerAnchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH System) on page 3‑46 fortop tether anchor locations.

Do not secure a child seat in aposition without a top tether anchorif a national or local law requiresthat the top tether be anchored, or ifthe instructions that come with thechild restraint say that the top strapmust be anchored.

In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints havea top tether, and that the tether beattached.

You will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint inthis position. Follow the instructionsthat came with the child restraint.

1. Move the seat as far back asit will go before securing theforward-facing child restraint.

When the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the rightfront passenger frontal airbagand seat‐mounted side impactairbag, the off indicator onthe passenger airbag statusindicator should light and staylit when you start the vehicle.See Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator on page 5‑12.

2. Put the child restraint onthe seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and runthe lap and shoulder portions ofthe vehicle's safety belt throughor around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will showyou how.




Position the release button onthe buckle, so that the safetybelt could be quickly unbuckledif necessary.

5. Pull the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set thelock. When the retractor lock isset, the belt can be tightened butnot pulled out of the retractor.

6. To tighten the belt, push downon the child restraint, pull theshoulder portion of the belt totighten the lap portion of the belt,and feed the shoulder belt backinto the retractor. When installinga forward-facing child restraint,it may be helpful to use yourknee to push down on the childrestraint as you tighten the belt.



Try to pull the belt out of theretractor to make sure theretractor is locked. If theretractor is not locked,repeat Steps 5 and 6.

If the vehicle does not have arear seat and the child restrainthas a top tether, follow thechild restraint manufacturer'sinstructions regarding the useof the top tether. See LowerAnchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH System) onpage 3‑46 for more information.

7. Before placing a child in thechild restraint, make sure it issecurely held in place. To check,grasp the child restraint at thesafety belt path and attempt tomove it side to side and backand forth. When the childrestraint is properly installed,there should be no more than2.5 cm (1 in) of movement.

If the airbags are off, the offindicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will come on andstay on when the vehicle is started.

If a child restraint has beeninstalled and the on indicator is lit,see “If the On Indicator is Lit for aChild Restraint” under PassengerSensing System on page 3‑28 formore information.

To remove the child restraint,unbuckle the vehicle safety belt andlet it return to the stowed position.



2 NOTES


Storage 4-1

Storage

Storage CompartmentsGlove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Center Console Storage . . . . . . 4-1

Additional Storage FeaturesCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Roof Rack SystemRoof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

StorageCompartments

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by lifting up onthe lever.

CupholdersTwo cupholders are in the centerconsole. Cupholders may be locatedin the second row seat armrest.To access, pull the armrest down.

Center Console Storage

For vehicles with a center consolestorage, use the lever (A) on thefront to open.


4-2 Storage

Additional StorageFeatures

Cargo CoverFor vehicles with a cargo cover, useit to cover items in the rear of thevehicle.

To remove the cover from thevehicle, pull both ends toward eachother. To reinstall, place each endof the cover in the holes behind therear seat.

Cargo Tie-Downs

The vehicle may be equipped withfour cargo tie downs (A) located inthe rear compartment.

Convenience NetThis vehicle may have aconvenience net located in the rearof the vehicle. Attach it to the cargotie‐downs for storing small loads.

Do not use the net to store heavyloads.

Roof Rack System

{ WARNING

If something is carried on top ofthe vehicle that is longer or widerthan the roof rack— like paneling,plywood, or a mattress— thewind can catch it while the vehicleis being driven. The item beingcarried could be violently torn off,and this could cause a collisionand damage the vehicle. Nevercarry something longer or widerthan the roof rack on top of thevehicle unless using a GMcertified accessory carrier.

This vehicle may be equippedwith a roof rack. For roof racks thatdo not have cross rails included,GM certified cross rails can bepurchased as an accessory.See your dealer for additionalinformation.


Storage 4-3

Notice: Loading cargo on theroof rack that weighs more than100 kg (220 lbs) or hangs over therear or sides of the vehicle maydamage the vehicle. Load cargoso that it rests evenly betweenthe crossrails, making sure tofasten cargo securely.

To prevent damage or loss of cargowhen driving, check to make surecross rails and cargo are securelyfastened. Loading cargo on the roofrack will make the vehicle's centerof gravity higher. Avoid high speeds,sudden starts, sharp turns, suddenbraking, or abrupt maneuvers;otherwise it may result in loss ofcontrol. If driving for a long distance,on rough roads, or at high speeds,occasionally stop the vehicle tomake sure the cargo remains in itsplace. Do not exceed the maximumvehicle capacity when loading thevehicle. For more information onvehicle capacity and loading, seeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑18.

The roof rack cross rails can belocked in four positions along theroof rack side rails. These are theonly positions that the cross railswill lock.

Lift the lever to release and movethe cross rail.

Position the cross rail on both sidesof the vehicle at the same time.


4-4 Storage

Push the lever down to completelyengage into the side rail holes. If thelever is not tight, then the cross railis not engaged in a side rail hole.

Slide the cross rails back and forthuntil the lock pins engage in theholes and a click is heard as thepins align and the cross rail locks.

Try sliding the cross rails forwardand backward to ensure that theyare correctly secured and that thelevers stay tight to the cross rails.

Do not stand on the plastic lowerbody panels when loading cargo onthe roof rack.

When the roof rack is not in use,lock one cross rail at the furthestforward position and lock the othercross rail at the furthest rearwardposition to reduce wind noise.


Instruments and Controls 5-1

Instruments andControls

ControlsSteering Wheel Adjustment . . . 5-2Steering Wheel Controls . . . . . . 5-2Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3Windshield Wiper/Washer . . . . . 5-3Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9

Fuel Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10

Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . 5-11Airbag Readiness Light . . . . . . 5-11Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Charging System Light . . . . . . 5-13MalfunctionIndicator Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13

Brake System WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-16

Antilock Brake System (ABS)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Lane Departure Warning(LDW) Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Forward Collision Alert (FCA)Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Traction Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-18StabiliTrak® OFF Light . . . . . . . 5-19Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . 5-19

Tire Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . 5-20Engine Oil Pressure Light . . . . 5-20

Fuel Economy Light . . . . . . . . . 5-21Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . 5-21Security Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22Front Fog Lamp Light . . . . . . . . 5-22Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . . 5-22Cruise Control Light . . . . . . . . . 5-22

Information DisplaysDriver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Vehicle MessagesVehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26

Brake System Messages . . . . 5-27Compass Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-27Cruise Control Messages . . . . 5-27Door Ajar Messages . . . . . . . . . 5-27Engine Cooling SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-28

Engine Oil Messages . . . . . . . . 5-28Engine Power Messages . . . . 5-29Fuel System Messages . . . . . . 5-29


5-2 Instruments and Controls

Key and Lock Messages . . . . . 5-29Object Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Ride Control SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

Airbag System Messages . . . . 5-31Safety Belt Messages . . . . . . . 5-31Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-31

Service Vehicle Messages . . . 5-31Tire Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32Transmission Messages . . . . . 5-32Vehicle ReminderMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-33

Vehicle PersonalizationVehicle Personalization . . . . . . 5-33

Controls

Steering WheelAdjustment

To adjust the steering wheel:

1. Pull the lever (A) down.

2. Move the steering wheel upor down.

3. Pull or push the steering wheelcloser or away from you.

4. Pull the lever (A) up to lock thesteering wheel in place.

Do not adjust the steering wheelwhile driving.


For vehicles with audio steeringwheel controls, some audio controlscan be adjusted at the steeringwheel.



b / g (Push to Talk): For vehicleswith Bluetooth® or OnStar®, pressto interact with those systems. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑35or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑37 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑41 orOnStar Overview on page 14‑1for more information.

$ /i (Mute/End Call): Press toreject an incoming call, or end acurrent call. Press to silence thevehicle speakers while using theinfotainment system. Press againto turn the sound on.

_ SRC ^ (Toggle Switch): Press toselect an audio source.

Toggle up or down to select the nextor previous favorite radio station orCD/MP3 track.

+ x − (Volume): Press + or − toincrease or decrease the volume.

Horn

Pressa on the steering wheelpad to sound the horn.

Windshield Wiper/Washer

The windshield wiper/washer leveris located on the right side of thesteering column. With the ignitionin ACC/ACCESSORY or ON/RUN/START, move the windshield wiperlever to select the wiper speed.

HI: Use for fast wipes.

LO: Use for slow wipes.



INT: (Intermittent Wipes): Movethe lever up to INT for intermittentwipes, then turn the3 INT bandup for more frequent wipes or downfor less frequent wipes.

OFF: Use to turn the wipers off.

8 (Mist): For a single wipe,briefly move the wiper lever down.For several wipes, hold the wiperlever down.

nL FRONT (WindshieldWasher): Pull the windshieldwiper lever toward you to spraywindshield washer fluid and activatethe wipers. The wipers will continueuntil the lever is released or themaximum wash time is reached.When the windshield wiper leveris released, additional wipes mayoccur depending on how longthe windshield washer had beenactivated. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24 for information onfilling the windshield washerfluid reservoir.

{ WARNING

In freezing weather, do not usethe washer until the windshieldis warmed. Otherwise thewasher fluid can form ice on thewindshield, blocking your vision.

Clear snow and ice from the wiperblades before using them. If frozento the windshield, carefully loosenor thaw them. Damaged bladesshould be replaced. See WiperBlade Replacement on page 10‑30.

Heavy snow or ice can overload thewiper motor.

Wipe Parking

If the ignition is turned toLOCK/OFF while the wipersare on LO, HI, or INT, they willimmediately stop.

If the windshield wiper lever is thenmoved to off before the driver dooris opened or within 10 minutes, thewipers will restart and move to thebase of the windshield.

If the ignition is turned toLOCK/OFF while the wipers areperforming wipes due to windshieldwashing, the wipers continue torun until they reach the base ofthe windshield.



Rear WindowWiper/WasherThe rear wiper controls are on theend of the windshield wiper lever.

ON: Press the upper portion of thebutton for continuous rear windowwipes.

OFF: The rear wiper turns off whenthe button is returned to the middleposition.

INT (Intermittent Rear Wipes):Press the lower portion of the buttonto set a delay between wipes.

m = REAR (Rear Washer): Pushthe windshield wiper lever forwardto spray washer fluid on the rearwindow. The lever returns to itsstarting position when released.

Reverse Gear Wipes

If the rear wiper control is off, therear wiper will automatically operatecontinuously when the shift leveris in R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performing lowor high speed wipes. If the rearwiper control is off, the shift leveris in R (Reverse), and the frontwindshield wiper is performinginterval wipes, then the rear wiperautomatically performs intervalwipes.

The windshield washer reservoir isused for the windshield and the rearwindow. Check the fluid level in thereservoir if either washer is notworking. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

CompassThe vehicle may have a compassdisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). The compass receivesits heading and other informationfrom the Global PositioningSystem (GPS) antenna, StabiliTrak,and vehicle speed information.

Avoid covering the GPS antennafor long periods of time with objectsthat may interfere with the antenna'sability to receive a satellite signal.



See Multi-Band Antenna onpage 7‑13 for the location of thevehicle's antenna. The compasssystem is designed to operate for acertain number of miles or degreesof turn before needing a signalfrom the GPS satellites. When thecompass display shows CAL, drivethe vehicle for a short distance inan open area where it can receivea GPS signal. The compass systemwill automatically determine when aGPS signal is restored and providea heading again. See CompassMessages on page 5‑27 for moreinformation on the messages thatmay be displayed for the compass.

ClockTo set the time:

1. Press the CONFIG buttonto enter the menu options.Turn the TUNE/MENU knobto scroll through the availablesetup features. Press theTUNE/MENU knob or press theTime screen button to displayother options within that feature.

2. Press + or − to decrease orincrease the Hours and Minutesdisplayed on the clock.

12/24 HR Format: Press the 12 HRscreen button for standard time;press the 24 HR screen buttonfor military time.

Day + or Day −: Press the Day +or Day − display buttons to increaseor decrease the day.

Display: Press Display to turn thedisplay of the time on the screen onor off.

Power OutletsThe accessory power outletscan be used to connect electricalequipment, such as a cell phoneor MP3 player.

There are four accessory poweroutlets in the following locations:below the CD slot, inside the centerconsole storage, on the rear of thecenter console storage, and in therear cargo compartment.

To use the outlets, remove the coverand close when not in use.

Notice: Leaving electricalequipment plugged in for anextended period of time whilethe vehicle is off will drain thebattery. Always unplug electricalequipment when not in use anddo not plug in equipment thatexceeds the maximum 20 ampererating.



Certain accessory plugs may notbe compatible with the accessorypower outlets and could overloadvehicle and adapter fuses. If aproblem is experienced, see yourdealer.

When adding electrical equipment,be sure to follow the installationinstructions included with theequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑67.

Notice: Hanging heavyequipment from the poweroutlet can cause damage notcovered by the vehicle warranty.The power outlets are designedfor accessory power plugs only,such as cell phone charge cords.

Warning Lights,Gauges, andIndicatorsWarning lights and gauges cansignal that something is wrongbefore it becomes serious enoughto cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention tothe warning lights and gaugescould prevent injury.

Warning lights come on when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Some warning lights comeon briefly when the engine is startedto indicate they are working.

Gauges can indicate when therecould be a problem with a vehiclefunction. Often gauges and warninglights work together to indicate aproblem with the vehicle.

When one of the warning lightscomes on and stays on whiledriving, or when one of the gaugesshows there may be a problem,check the section that explains whatto do. Follow this manual's advice.Waiting to do repairs can be costlyand even dangerous.



Instrument Cluster

English Shown, Metric Similar



SpeedometerThe vehicle's speed can be selectedto display on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) and the speedometerin either kilometers per hour (km/h)or miles per hour (mph). Telltales onthe speedometer indicate whetherkilometers or miles were chosen.The DIC will show the vehicle'sspeed after the limit on thespeedometer has been reached.

OdometerThe odometer shows how far thevehicle has been driven, in eitherkilometers or miles.

This vehicle has a tamper‐resistantodometer. The digital odometer willread 999,999 if it is turned back.

If the vehicle needs a new odometerinstalled, it must be set to themileage total of the old odometer.

TachometerThe tachometer displays theengine speed in revolutions perminute (rpm).

Fuel Gauge

Metric

English

When the ignition is on, the fuelgauge shows about how much fuelthe vehicle has left in the fuel tank.

An arrow on the fuel gaugeindicates the side of the vehiclethe fuel door is on.

The gauge will first indicate emptybefore the vehicle is out of fuel andthe low fuel light comes on, butthe vehicle's fuel tank should befilled soon.



Here are some situations that canoccur with the fuel gauge. None ofthese indicate a problem with thefuel gauge.. At the service station, the fuel

pump shuts off before the gaugereads full.

. It takes a little more or lessfuel to fill up than the gaugeindicated. For example, thegauge may have indicated thetank was half full, but it actuallytook a little more or less thanhalf the tank's capacity to fillthe tank.

. The gauge moves a little whileturning a corner or speeding up.

. The gauge takes a few secondsto stabilize after the ignition isturned on, and goes back toempty when the ignition isturned off.

Engine CoolantTemperature Gauge

Metric

English

This gauge measures thetemperature of the vehicle's engine.

If the indicator needle moves to thehot side of the gauge toward thecolored line, the engine is too hot.

If the vehicle has been operatedunder normal driving conditions,pull off the road, stop the vehicle,and turn off the engine as soon aspossible.



Safety Belt Reminders

Driver Safety Belt ReminderLight

There is a driver safety beltreminder light on the instrumentpanel cluster.

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind the driver to fastentheir safety belt. Then the light stayson solid until the belt is buckled.

This cycle may continue severaltimes if the driver remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the driver safety belt is buckled,neither the light nor the chimecomes on.

Passenger Safety BeltReminder Light

When the vehicle is started, thislight flashes and a chime may comeon to remind front passengers tofasten their safety belt. Then thelight stays on solid until the belt isbuckled.

This cycle continues several timesif the front passenger remains orbecomes unbuckled while thevehicle is moving.

If the front passenger safety belt isbuckled, neither the chime nor thelight comes on.

The front passenger safety beltreminder light and chime may turnon if an object is put on the seatsuch as a briefcase, handbag,grocery bag, laptop, or otherelectronic device. To turn off thereminder light and/or chime, removethe object from the seat or bucklethe safety belt.

Airbag Readiness LightThis light shows if there is anelectrical problem. The systemcheck includes the airbag sensor(s),passenger sensing system, thepretensioners, the airbag modules,the wiring, and the crash sensingand diagnostic module. For moreinformation on the airbag system,see Airbag System on page 3‑21.



The airbag readiness light comes onand stays on for several secondswhen the vehicle is started. Thenthe light goes out.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light stayson after the vehicle is started orcomes on while driving, it meansthe airbag system might not beworking properly. The airbags inthe vehicle might not inflate in acrash, or they could even inflatewithout a crash. To help avoidinjury, have the vehicle servicedright away.

Passenger Airbag StatusIndicatorThe vehicle has a passengersensing system. See PassengerSensing System on page 3‑28for important safety information.The overhead console has apassenger airbag status indicator.

United States

Canada and Mexico

When the vehicle is started, thepassenger airbag status indicatorwill light ON and OFF, or the symbolfor on and off, for several secondsas a system check. If you are usingremote start, if equipped, to startthe vehicle from a distance, youmay not see the system check.Then, after several more seconds,the status indicator will light eitherON or OFF, or either the on or offsymbol to let you know the statusof the right front passenger frontalairbag.

If the word ON or the on symbol islit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the rightfront passenger frontal airbag isenabled (may inflate).

If the word OFF or the off symbolis lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that thepassenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passengerfrontal airbag.



If, after several seconds, bothstatus indicator lights remain on,or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lightsor the passenger sensing system.See your dealer for service.

{ WARNING

If the airbag readiness light evercomes on and stays on, it meansthat something may be wrongwith the airbag system. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others,have the vehicle serviced rightaway. See Airbag ReadinessLight on page 5‑11 for moreinformation, including importantsafety information.

Charging System Light

The charging system light comeson briefly when the ignition is turnedon, but the engine is not running, asa check to show the light is working.The light turns off when the engineis started. If it does not, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light stays on, or comeson while driving, there may be aproblem with the electrical chargingsystem. Have it checked by yourdealer. Driving while this light ison could drain the battery.

When this light comes on, theDriver Information Center (DIC)also displays a message.

See Battery Voltage and ChargingMessages on page 5‑26.

If a short distance must be drivenwith the light on, be sure to turn offall accessories, such as the radioand air conditioner.

MalfunctionIndicator LampA computer system called OBD II(On-Board Diagnostics-SecondGeneration) monitors the operationof the vehicle to ensure emissionsare at acceptable levels, to producea cleaner environment. This lightcomes on when the vehicle isplaced in ON/RUN, as a check toshow it is working. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. See Ignition Positions onpage 9‑24 for more information.



If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on and stays on while theengine is running, this indicatesthat there is an OBD II problemand service is required.

Malfunctions often are indicated bythe system before any problem isapparent. Being aware of the lightcan prevent more serious damageto the vehicle. This system assiststhe service technician in correctlydiagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If the vehicle iscontinually driven with this lighton, the emission controls mightnot work as well, the vehicle fueleconomy might not be as good,and the engine might not runas smoothly. This could lead tocostly repairs that might not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Notice: Modifications madeto the engine, transmission,exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof the vehicle or the replacementof the original tires with otherthan those of the same TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)can affect the vehicle's emissioncontrols and can cause thislight to come on. Modificationsto these systems could lead tocostly repairs not covered bythe vehicle warranty. This couldalso result in a failure topass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenancetest. See Accessories andModifications on page 10‑3.

This light comes on during amalfunction in one of two ways:

Light Flashing: A misfire conditionhas been detected. A misfireincreases vehicle emissions andcould damage the emission controlsystem on the vehicle. Diagnosisand service might be required.

To prevent more serious damage tothe vehicle:. Reduce vehicle speed.. Avoid hard accelerations.. Avoid steep uphill grades.. If towing a trailer, reduce the

amount of cargo being hauledas soon as it is possible.

If the light continues to flash, stopand park the vehicle. Turn thevehicle off, wait at least 10 seconds,and restart the engine. If the light isstill flashing, follow the previoussteps and see your dealer forservice as soon as possible.

Light On Steady: An emissioncontrol system malfunction hasbeen detected on the vehicle.Diagnosis and service might berequired.



The following may correct anemission system malfunction:. Check that the fuel cap is fully

installed. See Filling the Tank onpage 9‑58. The diagnosticsystem can determine if thefuel cap has been left off orimproperly installed. A loose ormissing fuel cap allows fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere.A few driving trips with the capproperly installed should turnthe light off.

. Check that good quality fuelis used. Poor fuel qualitycauses the engine not to runas efficiently as designed andmay cause stalling after start-up,stalling when the vehicle ischanged into gear, misfiring,hesitation on acceleration,or stumbling on acceleration.These conditions might go awayonce the engine is warmed up.

If one or more of these conditionsoccurs, change the fuel brand used.It will require at least one full tank ofthe proper fuel to turn the light off.

See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑54.

If none of the above have madethe light turn off, your dealer cancheck the vehicle. The dealerhas the proper test equipmentand diagnostic tools to fix anymechanical or electrical problemsthat might have developed.

Emissions Inspection andMaintenance Programs

Some local governments mayhave programs to inspect theon-vehicle emission controlequipment. For the inspection, theemission system test equipmentis connected to the vehicle’s DataLink Connector (DLC).

The DLC is under the instrumentpanel to the left of the steeringwheel. See your dealer if assistanceis needed.

The vehicle may not passinspection if:. The malfunction indicator lamp is

on with the engine running, or ifthe light does not come on whenthe ignition is turned to ON/RUNwhile the engine is off.



. The OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics) system determinesthat critical emission controlsystems have not beencompletely diagnosed. Thevehicle would be considered notready for inspection. This canhappen if the 12-volt battery hasrecently been replaced or rundown. The diagnostic systemis designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems duringnormal driving. This can takeseveral days of routine driving.If this has been done and thevehicle still does not pass theinspection for lack of OBD IIsystem readiness, your dealercan prepare the vehicle forinspection.

Brake System WarningLightThe vehicle brake systemconsists of two hydraulic circuits.If one circuit is not working, theremaining circuit can still work tostop the vehicle. For normal brakingperformance, both circuits need tobe working

Metric English

The brake indicator light shouldcome on briefly as the engine isstarted. If it does not come on havethe vehicle serviced by your dealer.

When the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light comes onwhen the parking brake is set.The light stays on if the parkingbrake does not fully release. If it

stays on after the parking brakeis fully released, there is a brakeproblem. Have the brake systeminspected immediately.

{ WARNING

The brake system might not beworking properly if the brakesystem warning light is on.Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to acrash. If the light is still on afterthe vehicle has been pulled offthe road and carefully stopped,have the vehicle towed forservice.

If the light comes on while driving,a chime sounds. Pull off the roadand stop. The pedal might be harderto push or go closer to the floor.It might also take longer to stop.If the light is still on, have thevehicle towed for service. SeeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑80.



Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning Light

For vehicles with the Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS), this light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, haveit fixed so it will be ready to warn ifthere is a problem.

If the ABS light comes on and stayson while driving, stop as soon aspossible and turn the ignition off.

Start the engine again to reset thesystem. If the light stays on afterdriving at a speed above 20 km/h(13 mph), see your dealer forservice. A chime may also soundwhen the light comes on steady.

If the regular brake system warninglight is not on, the vehicle still hasbrakes, but not antilock brakes.If the regular brake system warninglight is also on, the vehicle does nothave antilock brakes and there isa problem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

See Brake System Messages onpage 5‑27 for all brake‐related DICmessages.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) Light

For vehicles with the lane departurewarning system, this light is locatedon the center of the instrumentpanel. This light briefly comes ongreen while starting the vehicle.

If it does not, have the vehicleserviced by your dealer. If thesystem is working normally theindicator light then turns off.



This light also comes on greenwhen the system is switched onand ready to operate.

See Lane Departure Warning (LDW)on page 9‑51 for more information.

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning LightThese lights are located on thecenter of the instrument panel.

The vehicle ahead light comes onwhen a vehicle is ahead and apossible collision can occur.

The forward collision alert comeson and warns when following avehicle closely. The light thenflashes when a vehicle is beingrapidly approached.

See Forward Collision Alert (FCA)System on page 9‑43 for moreinformation.

Traction Off Light

This light comes on briefly whilestarting the engine. If it does not,have the vehicle serviced by yourdealer. If the system is workingnormally, the indicator light thenturns off.

The traction off light comes on whenthe Traction Control System (TCS)has been turned off by pressingand releasing the TCS/StabiliTrakbutton.

This light and the StabiliTrak OFFlight come on when StabiliTrak isturned off.



If the TCS is off, wheel spin is notlimited. Adjust driving accordingly.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑39 for moreinformation.

StabiliTrak® OFF Light

This light comes on when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.If the Traction Control System (TCS)is off, wheel spin is not limited. If theStabiliTrak system is off, the systemdoes not assist in controlling thevehicle. Turn on the TCS and theStabiliTrak system and the warninglight turns off.

Check the DIC for applicablemessages. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑30for more information.

See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37 and StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑39 for moreinformation.

Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light

The StabiliTrak system or theTraction Control System (TCS)indicator/warning light comes onbriefly when the engine is started.

If the light does not come on, havethe vehicle serviced by the dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light is on and not flashing, theTCS, and potentially the StabiliTraksystem have been disabled. A DICmessage may display. Check theDIC messages to determine whichfeature(s) is no longer functioningand whether the vehicle requiresservice.

If the indicator/warning light is onand flashing, the TCS and/or theStabiliTrak system is activelyworking.

See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑39 and Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑37 formore information.



Tire Pressure Light

For vehicles with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS), this lightcomes on briefly when the engineis started. It provides informationabout tire pressures and the TPMS.

When the Light Is On Steady

This indicates that one or moreof the tires are significantlyunderinflated.

A tire pressure message canaccompany the light. See TireMessages on page 5‑32 for moreinformation. Stop as soon aspossible, and inflate the tires tothe pressure value shown on theTire and Loading Information label.See Tire Pressure on page 10‑53for more information.

When the Light Flashes First andThen Is On Steady

This indicates that there maybe a problem with the TPMS.The light flashes for about aminute and stays on steady forthe remainder of the ignition cycle.This sequence repeats with everyignition cycle. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑55for more information.

Engine Oil Pressure Light

{ WARNING

Do not keep driving if the oilpressure is low. The engine canbecome so hot that it catches fire.Someone could be burned. Checkthe oil as soon as possible andhave the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engineoil maintenance can damage theengine. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always follow the maintenanceschedule for changing engine oil.

The oil pressure light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.

If the light comes on and stays on, itmeans that oil is not flowing throughthe engine properly. The vehiclecould be low on oil and mighthave some other system problem.See your dealer.



Fuel Economy Light

For vehicles with the fuel economymode light, it comes on when theeco (economy) switch, located onthe center console near the shifter,is pressed. For vehicles with aDriver Information Center (DIC) anECO MODE ON message displays.See Fuel System Messages onpage 5‑29 for more information.Press the switch again to turnoff the light and exit the fuelsaver mode.

Low Fuel Warning Light

English Shown, Metric Similar

This light comes on for a fewseconds when the ignition is turnedon as a check to indicate it isworking. If it does not come on,have it fixed.

The low fuel warning light is acircle located on the fuel gauge.This light comes on and a chimesounds periodically when thevehicle is low on fuel. The lightgoes off when fuel is added tothe fuel tank.

For vehicles with a DriverInformation Center (DIC), see FuelSystem Messages on page 5‑29for more information.

Security Light

The immobilizer light should comeon briefly as the engine is started.If it does not come on, have thevehicle serviced by your dealer.If the system is working normally,the indicator light turns off.

If the light stays on and the enginedoes not start, there could be aproblem with the theft-deterrentsystem. See Immobilizer Operationon page 2‑15 for more information.



High-Beam On Light

The high‐beam on light comes onwhen the high-beam headlamps arein use.

See Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger on page 6‑2 for moreinformation.

Front Fog Lamp Light

The front fog lamp light comes onwhen the fog lamps are in use.

The light goes out when the foglamps are turned off. See FogLamps on page 6‑4 for moreinformation.

Lamps On Reminder

For vehicles with the lamps onreminder light, it comes on whenthe lights are in use.

Cruise Control Light

The cruise control light is whitewhenever the cruise control is set,and turns green when the cruisecontrol is active.

The light turns off when the cruisecontrol is turned off. See CruiseControl on page 9‑41 for moreinformation.



Information Displays

Driver InformationCenter (DIC)The vehicle may have a DriverInformation Center (DIC). It displaysinformation about the vehicle andwarning messages if there is asystem problem detected. DICmessages display in the centerof the instrument panel cluster.See Vehicle Messages onpage 5‑26 for more information.

The vehicle may also have featuresthat can be customized through thecontrols on the radio. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑33 formore information.

DIC Operation and Displays

Use the DIC buttons located in thecenter of the instrument panel toaccess different displays. The DICdisplays trip, fuel, vehicle systeminformation, and warning messages.

It also shows the shift lever position,the odometer, and the direction thevehicle is driving.

DIC Buttons

MENU: Press this button to get tothe Trip/Fuel Menu and the VehicleInformation Menu.

Q or R : Use these buttons toscroll through the items in eachmenu. A small marker will movealong the page as you scroll throughthe items. This shows where eachpage is in the menu.

SET/CLR (Set/Clear): Use thisbutton to set or clear the menu itemwhen it is displayed.

Trip/Fuel Menu Items

Press the MENU button until Trip/Fuel Information Menu is displayed.Then press R to scroll through thefollowing menu items:. Trip 1. Trip 2. Fuel Range. Average Fuel Economy. Instantaneous Fuel Economy. Average Vehicle Speed. Timer. Digital Speedometer. Turn-by-Turn. Blank Display



Trip 1 and Trip 2

This display shows the currentdistance traveled, in eitherkilometers (km) or miles (mi), sincethe last reset for the trip odometer.The trip odometer can be reset tozero by pressing SET/CLR while thetrip odometer display is showing.

Fuel Range

This display shows the approximatedistance the vehicle can be drivenwithout refueling. The fuel rangeestimate is based on an averageof the vehicle's fuel economy overrecent driving history and theamount of fuel remaining in the fueltank. Fuel range cannot be reset.

Average Fuel Economy

This display shows theapproximate average liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This number iscalculated based on the number ofL/100 km (mpg) recorded since thelast time this menu item was reset.The fuel economy can be resetby pressing SET/CLR while theAverage Fuel Economy displayis showing. The display may notreset to zero.

Instantaneous Fuel Economy

This display shows the currentfuel economy in either liters per100 kilometers (L/100 km) or milesper gallon (mpg). This numberreflects only the fuel economythat the vehicle has right nowand changes frequently as drivingconditions change. Unlike averageeconomy, this display cannot bereset.

Average Vehicle Speed

This display shows the averagespeed of the vehicle in kilometersper hour (km/h) or miles perhour (mph). This average iscalculated based on the variousvehicle speeds recorded sincethe last reset of this value.The average speed can be resetby pressing SET/CLR while theAverage Vehicle Speed displayis showing.

Timer

This display can be used asa timer. To start the timer, pressSET/CLR while Timer is displayed.The display will show the amount oftime that has passed since the timerwas last reset, not including time theignition is off. Time will continue tobe counted as long as the ignition ison, even if another display is beingshown on the DIC. The timer willrecord up to 99 hours, 59 minutesand 59 seconds (99:59:59) afterwhich the display will return to zero.



To stop the timer, press SET/CLRbriefly while Timer is displayed.To reset the timer to zero, pressand hold SET/CLR.

Digital Speedometer

The speedometer shows howfast the vehicle is moving in eitherkilometers per hour (km/h) or milesper hour (mph). The speedometercannot be reset.

Turn-by-Turn

This display is used for the OnStaror Navigation System Turn-by-Turnguidance. See OnStar Overview onpage 14‑1 or the Navigation manual,if the vehicle has navigation, formore information.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Vehicle Information MenuItems

Press the MENU button until VehicleInformation Menu is displayed.Then press R to scroll throughthe following menu items:. Unit. Tire Pressure. Remaining Oil Life. Blank Display

Unit

Press SET/CLR to enter the unitmenu. Then press Q or R to switchbetween METRIC or US whenthe Unit display is active. PressSET/CLR to confirm the setting.This will change the displays onthe cluster and DIC to either metricor English (US) measurements.

Tire Pressure

The display will show a vehiclewith the approximate pressuresof all four tires. Tire pressure isdisplayed in either kilopascal (kPa)or in pounds per square inch (psi).

See Tire Pressure Monitor Systemon page 10‑54 and Tire PressureMonitor Operation on page 10‑55for more information.

Remaining Oil Life

This display shows an estimateof the oil's remaining useful life.If REMAINING OIL LIFE 99% isdisplayed, that means 99% of thecurrent oil life remains.

When the remaining oil life is low,the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage will appear on the display.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑28. The oil should bechanged as soon as possible.See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.In addition to the engine oil lifesystem monitoring the oil life,additional maintenance is



recommended in the MaintenanceSchedule in this manual.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Remember, the Oil Life displaymust be reset after each oil change.It will not reset itself. Also, becareful not to reset the Oil Lifedisplay accidentally at any timeother than when the oil has justbeen changed. It cannot be resetaccurately until the next oil change.To reset the engine oil life system,press SET/CLR while the Oil Lifedisplay is active. The display willask for confirmation of a reset.Press Q or R to select Yes or No.Then press SET/CLR to confirmthe selection. See Engine Oil LifeSystem on page 10‑13.

Blank Display

This display shows no information.

Compass

The vehicle may have a compass inthe Driver Information Center (DIC).See Compass on page 5‑5.

Vehicle MessagesMessages are displayed on the DICto notify the driver that the status ofthe vehicle has changed and thatsome action may be needed bythe driver to correct the condition.Multiple messages may appearone after another.

Some messages may not requireimmediate action, but you can pressSET/CLR to acknowledge thatyou received the messages andto clear them from the display.Some messages cannot be clearedfrom the DIC display because theyare more urgent. These messagesrequire action before they canbe cleared. You should take anymessages that appear on thedisplay seriously and rememberthat clearing the messages will onlymake the messages disappear, notcorrect the problem. You will findthe possible messages that can bedisplayed and some informationabout them grouped by subjectin the following information.

Battery Voltage andCharging Messages

BATTERY SAVER ACTIVE

This message displays whenthe vehicle has detected that thebattery voltage is dropping beyonda reasonable point. The batterysaver system starts reducing certainfeatures of the vehicle that you maybe able to notice. At the point thatfeatures are disabled, this messageis displayed. It means that thevehicle is trying to save the chargein the battery. Turn off unnecessaryaccessories to allow the battery torecharge.

LOW BATTERY

This message is displayed when thebattery voltage is low. See Batteryon page 10‑27 for more information.



SERVICE BATTERYCHARGING SYSTEM

This message is displayed whenthere is a fault in the batterycharging system. Take the vehicleto your dealer for service.

Brake System Messages

BRAKE FLUID LOW

This message is displayed when thebrake fluid level is low; see BrakeFluid on page 10‑26.

RELEASE PARKING BRAKE

This message is displayed as areminder that the parking brake ison. Release it before you attemptto drive.

Compass Messages

CAL

This message is displayed whenthe compass needs to be calibrated.See Compass on page 5‑5.

– – –

Three dashes will be displayed if thecompass needs service. See yourdealer for service.

Cruise Control Messages

APPLY BRAKE BEFORECRUISE

If this message displays whenattempting to activate cruise control,apply the brake pedal and try again.

CRUISE SET TO XXX

This message displays when thecruise control is set and shows thespeed it was set to. See CruiseControl on page 9‑41 for moreinformation.

Door Ajar Messages

DOOR OPEN

A door open symbol will bedisplayed on the DIC showingwhich door is open. If the vehiclehas been shifted out of P (Park),a DOOR OPEN message will alsobe displayed. Close the doorcompletely.

MANUALLY CLOSE THEPOWER LIFTGATE

This message will display if thepower liftgate encounters multipleobstacles on the same power cycle.After removing the obstructions, theliftgate will resume normal poweroperation.

REAR ACCESS OPEN

This message will display along witha symbol when the liftgate is open.Close the liftgate completely.



Engine Cooling SystemMessages

A/C OFF DUE TO HIGHENGINE TEMP

This message displays whenthe engine coolant becomeshotter than the normal operatingtemperature. To avoid added strainon a hot engine, the air conditioningcompressor automatically turnsoff. When the coolant temperaturereturns to normal, the airconditioning compressor turnsback on. You can continue todrive the vehicle.

If this message continues to appear,have the system repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible to avoiddamage to the engine.

COOLANT LEVEL LOW ADDCOOLANT

This message will display if thecoolant is low. See Engine Coolanton page 10‑17.

ENGINEOVERHEATED — IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine coolant temperature is toohot. Stop and allow the vehicle toidle until it cools down.

ENGINEOVERHEATED — STOPENGINE

This message displays and acontinuous chime sounds if theengine cooling system reachesunsafe temperatures for operation.Stop and turn off the vehicle assoon as it is safe to do so to avoidsevere damage. This messageclears when the engine has cooledto a safe operating temperature.

HIGH COOLANTTEMPERATURE

This message displays if the coolanttemperature is hot. See EngineOverheating on page 10‑21.

Engine Oil Messages

CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOON

This message displays when theengine oil needs to be changed.When you change the engine oil,be sure to reset the Oil Life System.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13 and Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23 forinformation on how to reset thesystem. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10 and MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 formore information.

ENGINE OIL HOT, IDLEENGINE

This message displays when theengine oil temperature is too hot.Stop and allow the vehicle to idleuntil it cools down.

ENGINE OIL LOW — ADD OIL

This message displays when theengine oil level is too low. Checkthe oil level. See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.



OIL PRESSURE LOW — STOPENGINE

This message displays if low oilpressure levels occur. Stop thevehicle as soon as safely possibleand do not operate it until the causeof the low oil pressure has beencorrected. Check the oil as soonas possible and have the vehicleserviced by your dealer.

Engine Power Messages

ENGINE POWER IS REDUCED

This message displays when thevehicle's engine power is reduced.Reduced engine power can affectthe vehicle's ability to accelerate.If this message is on, but thereis no reduction in performance,proceed to your destination.The performance may be reducedthe next time the vehicle is driven.The vehicle may be driven at areduced speed while this messageis on, but maximum accelerationand speed may be reduced.

Anytime this message stays on,the vehicle should be taken toyour dealer for service as soon aspossible.

Fuel System Messages

ECO MODE ON

On some models, this messagedisplays when the fuel economymode has been turned on bypressing the eco button near theshift lever. See Fuel Economy Modeon page 9‑34 for more information.

FUEL LEVEL LOW

This message displays when thevehicle is low on fuel. Refuel assoon as possible.

TIGHTEN GAS CAP

This message displays when thefuel cap is not on tight. Tighten thefuel cap.

Key and Lock Messages

REPLACE BATTERY INREMOTE KEY

This message displays when thebattery in the Remote KeylessEntry (RKE) transmitter needsto be replaced.

Object Detection SystemMessages

FORWARD COLLISIONALERT OFF

If your vehicle has the ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) system, thismessage may display if the FCAsystem cannot activate due to atemporary condition. See ForwardCollision Alert (FCA) System onpage 9‑43.



FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED,CLEAN WINDSHIELD

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW)and Forward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled because thecamera view is blocked and cannotoperate properly. It may alsoactivate during heavy rain or dueto road spray. To clean the system,clean the outside of the windshieldarea in front of the LDW/FCAcamera sensor.

LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE

If your vehicle has the LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) system,this message may display if theLDW system cannot activate dueto a temporary condition. See LaneDeparture Warning (LDW) onpage 9‑51 for more information.

PARK ASSIST OFF

This message displays when thepark assist system has been turnedoff or when there is a temporarycondition causing the system to bedisabled. See Ultrasonic ParkingAssist on page 9‑46.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA

This message displays when theLane Departure Warning (LDW)and Forward Collision Alert (FCA)systems are disabled and needservice. See your dealer/retailer.

SERVICE PARK ASSIST

This message displays if there is aproblem with the Ultrasonic RearParking Assist (URPA) system.Do not use this system to help youpark. See Ultrasonic Parking Assiston page 9‑46 for more information.See your dealer for service.

Ride Control SystemMessages

ALL WHEEL DRIVE OFF

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays when the rear drive systemis overheating. This message turnsoff when the rear drive system coolsdown. If the warning message stayson for a while, you need to resetthe warning message. To reset thewarning message, turn the ignitionoff and then back on again. If themessage stays on, see your dealerright away. See All-Wheel Drive onpage 9‑35 for more information.



SERVICE ALL WHEEL DRIVE

If your vehicle has the All-WheelDrive (AWD) system, this messagedisplays if a problem occurs withthis system. If this messageappears, stop as soon as possibleand turn off the vehicle. Restart thevehicle and check for the messageon the DIC display. If the messageis still displayed or appears againwhen you begin driving, the AWDsystem needs service. See yourdealer.

SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL

This message displays whenthere is a problem with theTraction Control System (TCS).See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 9‑37.

SERVICE STABILITRAK

This message displays if there is aproblem with the StabiliTrak system.StabiliTrak® System on page 9‑39.

STABILITRAK OFF

This message displays when theStabiliTrak system is turned off.See StabiliTrak® System onpage 9‑39 for more information.

TRACTION CONTROL OFF

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS)is turned off. Adjust your drivingaccordingly.

TRACTION CONTROL ON

This message displays when theTraction Control System (TCS) isfirst turned on. See Traction ControlSystem (TCS) on page 9‑37 formore information.

Airbag System Messages

SERVICE AIRBAG

This message displays if there isa problem with the airbag system.Take the vehicle to your dealer forservice.

Safety Belt Messages

BUCKLE SEATBELT

This message displays as areminder when the safety beltis not buckled.

Anti-theft Alarm SystemMessages

THEFT ATTEMPTED

This message displays if the vehicledetects a tamper condition.

Service Vehicle Messages

SERVICE AC SYSTEM

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the air conditioningsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.

SERVICE POWER STEERING

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the power steeringsystem. Take the vehicle to yourdealer for service.



SERVICE VEHICLE SOON

This message is displayed if there isa problem with the vehicle. Take thevehicle to your dealer for service.

Tire Messages

SERVICE TIRE MONITORSYSTEM

This message displays if there isa problem with the Tire PressureMonitor System (TPMS). See TirePressure Monitor Operation onpage 10‑55 for more information.

TIRE LEARNING ACTIVE

This message displays whenthe system is learning new tires.See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑55 formore information.

TIRE LOW ADD AIR TO TIRE

This message displays when thepressure in one or more of the tiresis low.

This message also displaysLEFT FRONT, RIGHT FRONT,LEFT REAR, or RIGHT REAR toindicate the location of the low tire.

The low tire pressure warninglight will also come on. See TirePressure Light on page 5‑20.

If a tire pressure message appearson the DIC, stop as soon as youcan. Inflate the tires by adding airuntil the tire pressure is equal tothe values shown on the Tire andLoading Information label. See Tireson page 10‑46, Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑18, and Tire Pressure onpage 10‑53.

You can receive more than onetire pressure message at a time.The DIC also shows the tirepressure values. See DriverInformation Center (DIC) onpage 5‑23.

Transmission Messages

SERVICE TRANSMISSION

This message displays if there isa problem with the transmission.See your dealer.

SHIFT TO PARK

This message displays when thetransmission needs to be shiftedto P (Park). This may appear whenattempting to remove the key fromthe ignition or from the vehicle if thevehicle is not in P (Park).

TRANSMISSION HOT — IDLEENGINE

This message displays and a chimesounds if the transmission fluid inthe vehicle gets hot. Driving with thetransmission fluid temperature highcan cause damage to the vehicle.Stop the vehicle and let it idle toallow the transmission to cool.This message clears when the fluidtemperature reaches a safe level.



Vehicle ReminderMessages

ICE POSSIBLE DRIVEWITH CARE

This message is displayed when iceconditions are possible.

TURN WIPER CONTROL TOINTERMITTENT FIRST

This message is displayed whenattempting to adjust the intermittentwiper speed without intermittentselected on the wiper control.See Windshield Wiper/Washer onpage 5‑3.

VehiclePersonalizationThe audio system controls areused to access the personalizationmenus for customizing vehiclefeatures.

CONFIG (Configuration): Pressto access the ConfigurationSettings Menu.

MENU/SELECT Knob: Pressthe center of this knob to enterthe menus and select menu items.Turn the knob to scroll through themenus.

E BACK: Press to exit or movebackwards in a menu.

Entering the PersonalizationMenus

1. Turn the infotainment system onand press the CONFIG buttonto access the ConfigurationSettings menu.

2. Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight Vehicle Settings.

3. Press the center of theMENU/SELECT knob to selectthe Vehicle Settings menu.

The following list of menu items willbe available:. Climate and Air Quality. Comfort and Convenience. Collision/Detection Systems. Languages. Lighting. Power Door Locks. Remote Lock/Unlock/Start. Return to Factory Settings

Turn the MENU/SELECT knob tohighlight the menu. Press the knobto select it. Each of the menus isdetailed in the following information.All of the menus may not beavailable. Only those tied to thefeatures on your vehicle will beshown.



Climate and Air Quality

Select the Climate and Air Qualitymenu and the following will bedisplayed:. Auto Fan Speed. Air Conditioning Mode. Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

Auto Fan Speed

This selection is available onvehicles with the Automatic ClimateControl System. Choose from thefollowing blower speed settings:

High: Increased speed.

Low: Reduced speed.

Normal: Moderate speed.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Auto Fan Speed ishighlighted. Turn the knob tohighlight “High,” “Normal,” or “Low.”Press the knob to confirm theselection and go back to thelast menu.

Air Conditioning Mode

This will allow you to select whetheror not the air conditioning comeson automatically the next time thevehicle is started. “On” means thatthe air conditioning will be on atstart up, regardless of whetherit was on or off the last time thevehicle was turned off. “Off” meansthe air conditioning will be off atthe next start up, regardless ofwhether it was on or off the lasttime the vehicle was turned off.“Last Setting” means that whenthe vehicle is started, the airconditioning will resume whicheversetting it was at the last time thevehicle was turned off.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when Air ConditioningMode is highlighted. Turn theknob to highlight “On,” “Off,” or“Last Setting.” Press the knob toconfirm the selection and go backto the last menu.

Remote Start Auto Heat Seats

When on, this feature will turn theheated seats on when using remotestart on cold days.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when “Remote Start AutoHeat Seats” is highlighted totoggle between “On” or “Off.” PressE BACK to confirm the selectionand go back to the last menu.



Comfort and Convenience

Select the Comfort andConvenience menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Easy Exit Driver Seat. Chime Volume. Reverse Tilt Mirror


When on, this feature will move thedriver seat rearward upon turningthe ignition off and the driver dooropening. This may be performed tomake it easier to exit the vehicle.See the “Easy Exit Driver Seat”information under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

This allows you to turn the easy exitseat feature on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Easy Exit Driver Seat” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“On” or “Off.” Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Chime Volume

This allows the selection of thechime volume level.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when “Chime Volume” ishighlighted. Turn the knob toselect “Normal” or “High.” Pressthe knob to confirm and go backto the last menu.

Reverse Tilt Mirror

When on, both the driver andpassenger mirrors will tilt downwardwhen vehicle is shifted toR (Reverse) to improve visibility ofthe ground near the rear wheels.They will return to their previousdriving position when the vehicleis shifted out of R (Reverse), theignition is turned to OFF, or thevehicle is left in reverse. See ParkTilt Mirrors on page 2‑18 for moreinformation.

This allows you to turn the park tiltmirrors feature on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Reverse Tilt Mirror” ishighlighted. Turn the knob toselect “On” or “Off.” Press theknob to confirm and go backto the last menu.

Collision/Detection Systems

Select the Collision/DetectionSystems menu and the followingwill be displayed:. Park Assist

Park Assist

This allows the Ultrasonic ParkingAssist feature to be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Park Assist” is highlighted.Turn the knob to select “On,” “Off,”or “Tow Bar.” Press the knob toconfirm and go back to thelast menu.

See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑46 for more information



Languages

Select the Languages menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. English. French. Spanish

Turn the MENU/SELECT knobto select the language. Press theknob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Lighting

Select the Lighting menu and thefollowing will be displayed:. Vehicle Locator Lights. Exit Lighting

Vehicle Locator Lights

This allows the vehicle locator lightsto be turned on or off.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Vehicle Locator Lights” ishighlighted to toggle between “On”

or “Off.” PressE BACK to confirmthe selection and go back to thelast menu.

Exit Lighting

This allows the selection of howlong the exterior lamps stay onwhen leaving the vehicle when it isdark outside.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Exit Lighting” is highlighted.Turn the knob to select “Off,”“30 Seconds,” “1 Minute,” or“2 Minutes.” Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.

Power Door Locks

Select Power Door Locks and thefollowing will be displayed:. Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out. Auto Door Unlock. Delayed Door Lock

Unlocked Door Anti Lock Out

When on, this feature will keep thedriver door from locking when thedoor is open. If off is selected, theDelayed Door Lock menu will beavailable.

Press the MENU/SELECTknob when “Unlocked DoorAnti Lock Out” is highlighted totoggle between “On” or “Off.” PressE BACK to confirm the selectionand go back to the last menu.



Auto Door Unlock

This allows selection of which of thedoors will automatically unlock whenthe vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Auto Door Unlock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“All Doors,” “Driver Door,” or “Off.”Press the knob to confirm and goback to the last menu.

Delayed Door Lock

When on, this feature will delay thelocking of the doors. If you want tooverride the delay you can press thepower door lock on the instrumentpanel.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Delayed Door Lock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob toselect “On” or “Off.” Press theknob to confirm and go backto the last menu.

Remote Lock/Unlock/Start

Select Remote Lock/Unlock/Startand the following will be displayed:. Remote Unlock Light Feedback. Remote Lock Feedback. Remote Door Unlock. Memory Remote Recall

Remote Unlock Light Feedback

When on, the exterior lamps willflash when unlocking the vehiclewith the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Remote Unlock LightFeedback” is highlighted. Turn theknob to select “Flash Lights” or“Off.” Press the knob to confirmand go back to the last menu.

Remote Lock Feedback

This allows selection of what type offeedback is given when unlockingthe vehicle with the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Remote Lock Feedback” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“Lights and Horn,” “Lights Only,”“Horn Only,” or “Off.” Press theknob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.

Remote Door Unlock

This allows selection of which doorswill unlock when pressing the unlockbutton on the RKE transmitter.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Remote Door Unlock” ishighlighted. Turn the knob to select“All Doors” or “Driver Door.” Pressthe knob to confirm and go back tothe last menu.



Memory Remote Recall

This allows the Memory RemoteRecall feature to be turned on or off.

When on, this feature will recall thecurrent driver's last seat, outsidemirrors upon unlocking the driverdoor with the RKE, and opening thatdoor. The current driver is identifiedwhen the RKE transmitter is used tounlock the driver door. See “MemoryRemote Recall” under Power SeatAdjustment on page 3‑4 for moreinformation.

Memory Remote Recall is when thememorized settings will be recalledas you unlock the vehicle.

Press the MENU/SELECT knobwhen “Memory Remote Recall” ishighlighted to toggle between “On”

or “Off.” PressE BACK to confirmthe selection and go back to thelast menu.

Return to Factory Settings

Select “Return to Factory Settings”to return all of the vehiclepersonalization to the defaultsettings. Turn the knob to select“Yes” or “No.” Press the knobto confirm and go back to thelast menu.


Lighting 6-1

Lighting

Exterior LightingExterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . 6-1Headlamp High/Low-BeamChanger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Automatic HeadlampSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Hazard Warning Flashers . . . . . 6-3Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Interior LightingInstrument Panel IlluminationControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lighting FeaturesEntry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Battery Load Management . . . . 6-5

Exterior Lighting

Exterior Lamp Controls

The exterior lamp control is on theturn signal/lane change lever.

O (Exterior Lamp Control):Operates the exterior lamps. Turnto one of the following positions:

O (Off): Briefly turn to this positionto turn the automatic light control offor on again.

AUTO (Automatic Headlamps):Turns the exterior lamps on andoff automatically depending on theexterior light. The vehicle will defaultto the AUTO setting when it is firststarted.

; (Parking Lamps): Turns onthe parking lamps together with thefollowing:. Sidemarker Lamps. Taillamps. License Plate Lamps. Instrument Panel Lights

5 (Headlamps): Turns on theheadlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.


6-2 Lighting

Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer23 Headlamp High/Low‐BeamChanger: Push the turn signal/lanechange lever away from you andrelease, to turn the high beams on.To return to low beams, push thelever again or pull it toward you andrelease.

This indicator light turns on in theinstrument panel cluster when thehigh‐beam headlamps are on.

Flash-to-PassThe flash‐to‐pass feature works withthe low beams or Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) on or off.

To flash the high beams, pull theturn signal/lane change lever all theway toward you, then release it.

Daytime RunningLamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)system makes the low-beamheadlamps come on at a reducedbrightness in daylight when thefollowing conditions are met:. The ignition is on.. The exterior lamp band is in the

automatic position.. The transmission is not in

P (Park).. The light sensor determines it is

daytime.. The parking brake is released.

Fully functional Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) are required on allvehicles first sold in Canada.

When the DRL are on the taillamps,sidemarker, instrument panel lightsand other lamps will not be on.The instrument panel cluster willbe lit.

When the exterior lamp band isturned to the headlamp position,the low-beam headlamps come on.The other lamps that come on withthe headlamps will also come on.

To idle your vehicle with the DRLoff, move the shift lever to P (Park).The DRL will stay off until the shiftlever is moved out of the P (Park)position.

The regular headlamp systemshould be turned on when needed.


Lighting 6-3

Automatic HeadlampSystemWhen it is dark enough outside, theheadlamps come on automatically.

Do not cover the light sensor ontop of the instrument panel or theheadlamps will come on when theyare not needed.

The system may also turn on theheadlamps when driving through aparking garage or tunnel.

Hazard Warning Flashers

| (Hazard Warning Flasher):Press this button, on the center ofthe instrument panel, to make thefront and rear turn signal lampsflash on and off. This warns othersthat you are having trouble.

Press| again to turn theflashers off.

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals

An arrow on the instrument panelcluster will flash in the direction ofthe turn or lane change.

Move the lever all the way up ordown to signal a turn.

Raise or lower the lever until thearrow starts to flash to signal a lanechange. Hold it there until the lanechange is complete. If the lever isbriefly pressed and released, theturn signal flashes three times.

The lever returns to its startingposition when it is released.


6-4 Lighting

If after signaling a turn or a lanechange the arrows flash rapidly ordo not come on, a signal bulb maybe burned out.

Have the bulbs replaced. If the bulbis not burned out, check the fuse;see Fuses on page 10‑39 for moreinformation.

Fog Lamps

The fog lamps control is located onthe turn/lane change lever.

Use the fog lamps for better visionin foggy or misty conditions.

# FOG (Fog Lamps): Turn the foglamp band on the lever to # andrelease it, to turn the fog lamps onor off. The band will return to itsoriginal position.

The parking lamps or low‐beamheadlamps must be on to use thefog lamps.

The fog lamps will go off wheneverthe high-beam headlamps areturned on. When the high‐beamheadlamps are turned off, the foglamps will come on again.

Some localities have laws thatrequire the headlamps to be onalong with the fog lamps.

Interior Lighting

Instrument PanelIllumination ControlThis control is located on theinstrument panel, to the left ofthe steering column.

D (Instrument PanelBrightness): Turn clockwise orcounterclockwise to brighten ordim the lights.

Dome LampsThere are front and rear domelamps.

The dome lamp controls are locatedin the overhead console. To changethe settings, press the following:

* (Dome Lamp Override): Turnsthe lamps off, even when a dooris open.


Lighting 6-5

1 (Door): The lamps come onautomatically when a door isopened.

+ (On): Turns the dome lamps on.

The dome lamps can also be turnedon and off by pressing the buttonsnext to the lamps.

Reading LampsThe reading lamps are located onthe overhead console. These lampscome on automatically when anydoor is opened.

For manual operation, press thebutton next to each lamp to turn iton or off.

Lighting Features

Entry LightingThe dome lamp, cargo lamp, andfoot lamp inside the vehicle comeon when any door is opened, if thedome lamp is in the door position.In addition, these lamps come onwhen the Remote Keyless Entry(RKE) unlock button is pressed.They stay on for 20 seconds or untila door is opened. After the door isopened and then closed, the lightremains on for 20 seconds, or untilthe ignition is turned to ON/RUN.

Battery LoadManagementThe vehicle has Electric PowerManagement (EPM) that estimatesthe battery's temperature and stateof charge. It then adjusts the voltagefor best performance and extendedlife of the battery.

When the battery's state of chargeis low, the voltage is raised slightlyto quickly bring the charge back up.When the state of charge is high,the voltage is lowered slightly toprevent overcharging. If the vehiclehas a voltmeter gauge or a voltagedisplay on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC), you may see thevoltage move up or down. This isnormal. If there is a problem, analert will be displayed.


6-6 Lighting

The battery can be discharged atidle if the electrical loads are veryhigh. This is true for all vehicles.This is because the generator(alternator) may not be spinningfast enough at idle to produce allof the power needed for very highelectrical loads.

A high electrical load occurs whenseveral of the following are on,such as: headlamps, high beams,fog lamps, rear window defogger,climate control fan at high speed,heated seats, engine cooling fans,trailer loads, and loads plugged intoaccessory power outlets.

EPM works to prevent excessivedischarge of the battery. It does thisby balancing the generator's outputand the vehicle's electrical needs.

It can increase engine idle speedto generate more power wheneverneeded. It can temporarily reducethe power demands of someaccessories.

Normally, these actions occurin steps or levels, without beingnoticeable. In rare cases at thehighest levels of corrective action,this action may be noticeable to thedriver. If so, a DIC message mightbe displayed, such as BATTERYSAVER ACTIVE, BATTERYVOLTAGE LOW, or LOW BATTERY.If one of these messages displays,it is recommended that the driverreduce the electrical loads as muchas possible. See Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23.


Infotainment System 7-1

InfotainmentSystem

IntroductionInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . 7-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

RadioAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Radio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13Multi-Band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . 7-13

Audio PlayersCD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17

Rear Seat InfotainmentRear Seat Entertainment(RSE) System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

PhoneBluetooth (Overview) . . . . . . . . 7-35Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-37

Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-41

Trademarks and LicenseAgreementsTrademarks and LicenseAgreements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-47

Introduction

InfotainmentRead the following pages tobecome familiar with the audiosystem's features.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the roadfor extended periods couldcause a crash resulting ininjury or death to you or others.Do not give extended attention toentertainment tasks while driving.

This system provides access tomany audio and non‐audio listings.


7-2 Infotainment System

To minimize taking your eyes off theroad while driving, do the followingwhile the vehicle is parked:. Become familiar with the

operation and controls of theaudio system.

. Set up the tone, speakeradjustments, and preset radiostations.

For more information, see DefensiveDriving on page 9‑3.

This vehicle's infotainment systemmay be equipped with a noisereduction system which can workimproperly if the audio amplifier,engine calibrations, exhaust system,microphones, radio, or speakersare modified or replaced. This couldresult in more noticeable enginenoise at certain speeds.

Notice: Contact your dealerbefore adding any equipment.

Adding audio or communicationequipment could interfere withthe operation of the engine,radio, or other systems, andcould damage them. Followfederal rules covering mobileradio and telephone equipment.

The vehicle has RetainedAccessory Power (RAP). With RAP,the audio system can be playedeven after the ignition is turned off.See Retained Accessory Power(RAP) on page 9‑28 for moreinformation.

Navigation System

For vehicles with a navigationsystem, see the separate navigationmanual.

Theft-Deterrent FeatureThe theft-deterrent feature worksby learning a portion of theVehicle Identification Number(VIN) to the infotainment system.The infotainment system does notoperate if it is stolen or moved toa different vehicle.



OverviewKeeping your eyes on the roadand your mind on the drive isimportant for safe driving. Theinfotainment system has built-infeatures intended to help with thisby disabling some features whendriving. A grayed-out function isnot available when the vehicle ismoving.

All functions are available when thevehicle is parked. Do the followingbefore driving:. Become familiar with the

infotainment system operation,buttons on the faceplate, andtouch-sensitive screen buttons.

. Set up the audio by presettingfavorite stations, settingthe tone, and adjustingthe speakers.

. Set up phone numbers inadvance so they can becalled easily by pressinga single button or a singlevoice command for vehiclesequipped with phone capability.

{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often while using thenavigation system could causea crash and you or others couldbe injured or killed. Focus yourattention on driving and limitglances at the moving map onthe navigation screen. Use voiceguidance whenever possible.

Infotainment System Overview

The infotainment system iscontrolled by using the buttons onthe faceplate and the touch screen.

See “Infotainment Control Buttons”in this section for more information.



A. VOL/ O

B. g (Seek Down)

C. FAV (Favorite Pages 1-6)

D. SOURCE

E. Buttons 1 to 6

F. F HOME (Home Page)

G. E BACK

H. INFO (Information)

I. MENU/SEL (Menu/Select)

J. k (Play/Pause)

K. ? (Mute)

L. 5 (Phone Menu)

M. l (Seek Up)

N. H (Clock Menu)

O. CONFIG (Configuration Menu)

P. X (Eject)

Q. TONE



Infotainment Control Buttons

The buttons on the faceplate areused to start primary functions whileusing the infotainment system.

VOL/O (Volume/Power):

1. Press to turn the system onand off.

2. Turn to adjust the volume.

k (Play/Pause): Pressk tostart, pause, and resume playback.See CD Player on page 7‑14,and MP3 on page 7‑16 for moreinformation.

SOURCE: Press to change theaudio sources such as AM-FMRadio, XM™ (if equipped), CD,and AUX.

TONE: Press to access thesound menu screen to adjust bass,midrange, and treble. See AM-FMRadio on page 7‑8 for moreinformation.

INFO (Information): Press totoggle through an audio informationscreen.

CONFIG (Configure): Press toadjust features for radio, display,phone, vehicle, and time.

HOME: See “Home Page” followingin this section.

MENU/SEL: Turn to highlighta feature. Press to activate thehighlighted feature.

5 (Phone): See Bluetooth(Overview) on page 7‑35 orBluetooth (Infotainment Controls) onpage 7‑37 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑41 formore information.

E BACK: Press to return to theprevious screen in a menu.

If on a page accessed directly bya faceplate button or Home Pagescreen button, pressingE BACKwill go to the previous menu.

FAV (Favorite Pages 1-6):Press to display the current pagenumber above the preset buttons.The stored stations for each listdisplay on the touch-sensitivepreset buttons at the bottom ofthe screen. The number of presetFAV lists can be changed in theConfiguration Menu.

l (Seek Up):

1. Press to seek the next track.

2. Press and hold to fast forwardthrough a track.

3. Release the button to return toplaying speed. See CD Playeron page 7‑14 and MP3 onpage 7‑16 for more information.

4. For AM, FM, or XM (if equipped),press to seek to the next strongstation.



g (Seek Down):

1. Press to seek to the beginningof the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, it seeksthe previous track. If longer thanfive seconds, the current trackstarts from the beginning.

2. Press and hold to quicklyreverse through a track.Release the button to return toplaying speed. See CD Playeron page 7‑14 and MP3 onpage 7‑16 for more information.

3. For AM, FM, or XM (if equipped),press to seek to the previousstrong station.

Preset Buttons (1-6): The presetbuttons numbered one through sixcan be used to select stored AM,FM, and XM (if equipped) stations.

H : Press to set the time.

X (Eject): Press to eject a discfrom the CD player. See CD Playeron page 7‑14.

Touch Screen Buttons

Touch screen buttons are on thescreen and highlighted when afeature is available. Some togglescreen buttons highlight when activeand gray out when inactive.

Home Page

The infotainment system displays ahome page that makes accessingmany of the features an easyprocess.

Back: If on page two of the HomePage, press Back to return to pageone of the Home Page. If on pageone, Back serves no function.

Home: While navigating throughother menus, press to go back tothe Home Page to start a differentfeature.

FAV: Press to display a pageof stored (favorite) AM, FM, orXM (if equipped) stations. Keeppressing FAV to scroll through thefavorite pages.

Info: Press to toggle through anaudio information screen.

The Home Page Menu lists theoptions Customize Home Pageand Restore Home Page Defaults.

Out of all available Home Pageicons, up to eight icons can beselected and sorted for the firstHome Page screen.

Home Page Features

Various functions are disabled whenthe vehicle is moving.

Press the Now Playing screenbutton to display the active sourcepage. The sources available areAM, FM, XM (if equipped), CD,USB/iPod, and AUX.

See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑8,Satellite Radio on page 7‑10, CDPlayer on page 7‑14, and AuxiliaryDevices on page 7‑17.



Press the Phone screen button todisplay the Phone main page. SeeBluetooth (Overview) on page 7‑35or Bluetooth (Infotainment Controls)on page 7‑37 or Bluetooth (VoiceRecognition) on page 7‑41.

Press the Config screen buttonto display the Config main page.From this display, you can adjustfeatures such as time and date,radio, phone, vehicle, and display.

Press the Tone screen buttonto display the Tone main page.Adjust the tone and speakers bypressing the screen buttons tochange the levels of sound fortreble, midrange, bass, fade, andbalance. See AM-FM Radio onpage 7‑8.

Press the FM screen button todisplay the FM main page and playthe current or last tuned FM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑8.

Press the AM screen button todisplay the AM main page and playthe current or last tuned AM station.See AM-FM Radio on page 7‑8.

Press the XM screen button(if equipped) to display the XM mainpage and play the current or lasttuned XM channel. See AM-FMRadio on page 7‑8 and SatelliteRadio on page 7‑10.

Press the CD screen button todisplay the CD main page andplay the current or last CD trackselected. See CD Player onpage 7‑14.

Press the USB screen button todisplay the USB main page and playthe current or last track selected.See Auxiliary Devices on page 7‑17.

Press the AUX screen button toaccess any connected auxiliarydevice. See Auxiliary Devices onpage 7‑17.

Languages

The vehicle supports English,French (Canadian), and Spanish.The default language is English.

To change the display language,see Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33 for more information.



English and Metric UnitConversion

To change the display unitsbetween English and metric units,see Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23 for more information.

Cleaning the Display

Notice: Using abrasive cleanerswhen cleaning glass surfacescould scratch the glass. Use onlya soft cloth and do not spraycleaner directly on the systemas it could affect the mechanicalparts.

Do not wipe the panel with a hardcloth or use a volatile liquid such aspaint thinner; it could scratch thesurface or erase the characters onthe buttons.

Radio

AM-FM Radio

Playing the Radio

Audio Source

VOL/O (Power/Volume):

1. Press to turn the radio on or off.

2. Turn to increase or decreasethe volume of the active source(i.e., current audio source, activenavigation voice guidance,or traffic prompts).

The steering wheel controls canalso be used to adjust the volume.See “Steering Wheel Controls” inthe vehicle owner manual for moreinformation.

To access the radio main page,press the SOURCE button on thefaceplate, the Now Playing screenbutton, or one of the audio screenbuttons on the Home Page.

While on the audio main page,press the Source button repeatedlyto display and cycle through theavailable sources (AM, FM, andXM (if equipped), CD, USB/iPod,and AUX).

Infotainment System Menus

Tone Settings

To access the tone settings, pressthe Home Page Tone button or theTONE button on the faceplate.

Use the tone settings to adjust thefollowing features:. Setting the tone. Adjusting the speakers

Setting the Tone

To adjust the tone:. Treble: Press + or − to change

the level.. Middle (Midrange): Press + or −

to change the level.. Bass: Press + or − to change

the level.



Adjusting the Speakers

To adjust the speaker balance:. Press the left arrow on the

bottom for more sound fromthe left speakers or the rightarrow on the bottom for moresound from the right speakers.The middle position balancesthe sound between the left andright speakers.

To adjust the speaker fade:. Press the upper arrow for more

sound from the front speakersand the lower arrow for moresound from the rear speakers.The middle position balancesthe sound between the frontand rear speakers.

EQ Settings

The EQ settings are selectedthrough the tone menu. Press theleft or right arrows to cycle throughthe EQ options. The availablechoices are Pop, Rock, Jazz,Classical, and Talk.

Finding a Station

To select the band, see “AudioSource” earlier in this section.

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to finda radio station. To select a presetstation, touch the FAV button andchoose a preset station.

Seeking a Station

Pressg orl to search for astation.

AM

1. Press the AM screen buttonon the Home Page or selectAM from the source pop-up todisplay the AM main page.

2. From the AM screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe AM stations.

3. Press to select the desiredoption. To update the station list,touch Refresh.

FM

1. Press the FM screen button onthe Home Page or select FMfrom the source pop-up todisplay the FM main page.

2. From the FM screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe FM stations.

3. Press to select the desiredoption. To update the station list,touch Refresh.

XM (If Equipped)

1. Press the XM screen button onthe Home Page or select XMfrom the source pop-up todisplay the XM main page.

2. From the XM screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe XM categories.

3. Touch a desired category andthen turn the TUNE/MENU knobto scroll the station list.



Changing the Sources

To change audio sources fromany of the audio main pages(AM, FM, XM, CD, USB/iPod,or AUX), press the SOURCE buttonon the faceplate or the Sourcescreen button to display a pop-up ofavailable audio sources. Touch-tapor press the SOURCE button on thefaceplate repeatedly to change thedesired source.

Storing Radio Station Presets

There are a few ways to storepresets.

Up to 36 preset stations canbe stored. AM, FM, and XM,if equipped, can be mixed.

1. From the AM, FM, or XM mainpage, press and hold one of thepreset screen buttons locatedat the bottom of the screen.After a few seconds, a beep willbe heard and the new presetinformation will display on thatscreen button.

2. Touch and hold a preset buttonto store the currently activestation. After a few seconds,a beep will be heard and thenew preset information willdisplay on a small pop-updisplay at the bottom of thescreen.

3. Repeat the steps for eachpreset.

To change the number of presetpages, see “Mixed-Band Presets”following for more information.

Recalling a Preset Station

To recall a preset station from a FAVpage, do the following:. Press the FAV button on the

faceplate to display the FAVpop-up. Select the desiredpreset from the pop-up.

. Press the FAV screen button atthe top bar to display the presetpop-up that appears at thebottom of the page. Press one ofthe preset screen buttons to goto the selected preset station.

. In the AM, FM, or XM(if equipped) main page,press one of the preset screenbuttons to go to the selectedpreset station.

Mixed-Band Presets

Each page can store six presetstations. The presets within a pagecan be from different radio bands.

To scroll through the pages, pressthe FAV button located on thefaceplate or the FAV screen buttonon the top bar. The current pagenumber displays above the presetbuttons. The stored stations foreach FAV page display on thepreset buttons at the bottom ofthe screen. The number of FAVpages displayed can be changedin the Radio Settings in theConfiguration Menu.

Satellite RadioVehicles with an XM™ SatelliteRadio tuner and a valid XM SatelliteRadio subscription can receive XMprogramming.



XM Satellite Radio Service

XM is a satellite radio service basedin the 48 contiguous United Statesand 10 Canadian provinces. XMSatellite Radio has a wide variety ofprogramming and commercial-freemusic, coast to coast, and indigital-quality sound. If XM serviceneeds to be reactivated, the radiowill display “No Subscription PleaseRenew on channel XM1.” A servicefee is required to receive the XMservice. For more information,contact XM at www.xmradio.comor call 1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.and www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

XM Categories

XM stations are organized incategories.

To customize which XM categoriesare used and displayed in thesystem, see “Adding or RemovingXM Categories” following.

Adding or RemovingCategories

1. From the Home Page pressthe Config screen button or theCONFIG button on the faceplate.

2. Select Radio Settings from theConfig Menu list.

3. Select Add/Remove XMCategories.

4. From the Add/Remove XMCategories screen, select ordeselect any category to beused in XM mode. A checkmarkwill indicate that the category isselected.

Turning XM Album Art Onor Off

1. From the Home Page pressthe Config screen button or theCONFIG button on the faceplate.

2. Select Radio Settings from theConfig Menu list.

3. Select XM Album Art to turn onor off.

XM Messages

XL (Explicit LanguageChannels): These channels, or anyothers, can be blocked by request,by calling 1-800-929-2100 in theU.S. and 1-877-438-9677 inCanada.

XM Updating: The encryption codein the receiver is being updated,no action is required. This processshould take no longer than30 seconds.

Loading XM: The audio systemis acquiring and processing audioand text data; no action is needed.This message should disappearshortly.

Channel Off Air: This channel isnot currently in service. Tune in toanother channel.



Channel Unauth: This channel isblocked or cannot be received withyour XM subscription package.

Channel Unavailable: Thispreviously assigned channel is nolonger assigned. Tune to anotherstation.

No Artist Info: The systemis working properly. No artistinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No Title Info: The system isworking properly. No song titleinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No CAT Info: The system isworking properly. No categoryinformation is available at thistime on this channel.

No Information: The systemis working properly. No text orinformational messages areavailable at this time on thischannel.

No Subscription PleaseRenew: The XM subscriptionneeds to be reactivated. ContactXM at www.xmradio.com or1-800-929-2100 in the U.S.,and www.xmradio.ca or1-877-438-9677 in Canada.

No XM Signal: The system isworking properly. The vehicle maybe in a location where the XMsignal is being blocked. Whenthe vehicle is moved into an openarea, the signal should return.

CAT Not Found: The system isworking properly. There are nochannels available for the selectedcategory.

XM Radio ID: If tuned to channel 0,this message alternates with theXM Radio eight‐digit radio ID label.This label is needed to activate theservice.

Unknown: If this message isreceived when tuned to channel 0,there could be a receiver fault.Consult with your dealer.

Check Antenna: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.

XM Not Available: If this messagedoes not clear within a short periodof time, the receiver could have afault. Consult with your dealer.



Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and staticcan occur during normal radioreception if items such as cell phonechargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronicdevices are plugged into theaccessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug theitem from the accessory poweroutlet.

FM

FM signals only reach about 16 to65 km (10 to 40 mi). Although theradio has a built-in electronic circuitthat automatically works to reduceinterference, some static can occur,especially around tall buildings orhills, causing the sound to fade inand out.

AM

The range for most AM stations isgreater than for FM, especially atnight. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere witheach other. Static can occur whenthings like storms and power linesinterfere with radio reception. Whenthis happens, try reducing the trebleon the radio.

XM™ Satellite Radio Service

XM Satellite Radio Service givesdigital radio reception from coast tocoast in the 48 contiguous UnitedStates, and in Canada. Just aswith FM, tall buildings or hills caninterfere with satellite radio signals,causing the sound to fade in andout. In addition, traveling or standingunder heavy foliage, bridges,garages, or tunnels may cause lossof the XM signal for a period of time.

Cellular Phone Usage

Cellular phone usage can causeinterference with the vehicle's radio.

Multi-Band AntennaThe multi-band antenna is on theroof of the vehicle. The antennais used for the AM‐FM radio,OnStar, the XM Satellite RadioService System, and GPS (GlobalPositioning System), if the vehiclehas these features. Keep theantenna clear of obstructionsfor clear reception.



Audio Players

CD PlayerThe player can be used for CD andMP3 audio.

With the vehicle on, insert adisc into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and beginsplaying. While playing, thenavigation system is available.

The system is capable of playing:. Most audio CDs. CD-R. CD-RW. MP3 or unprotected WMA

formats

When playing any compatiblerecordable disc, the sound qualitycan be reduced due to discquality, the method of recording,the quality of the music that hasbeen recorded, or the way thedisc has been handled.

There can be increased skipping,difficulty in recording tracks,difficulty in finding tracks, and/ordifficulty in loading and ejecting.If these problems occur, check thedisc for damage or try a knowngood disc.

To avoid damage to the CD player:. Do not use scratched or

damaged discs.. Do not apply labels to discs.

The labels could get caught inthe player.

. Insert only one disc at a time.

. Keep the loading slot free offoreign materials, liquids, anddebris.

. Use a marking pen to label thetop of the disc.

Loading and Ejecting Discs

To load a disc:

1. Turn the vehicle on.

2. Insert a disc into the slot, labelside up. The player pulls it inthe rest of the way. If the disc isdamaged or improperly loaded,there is an error and the discejects.

The disc automatically plays onceloaded.

PressX to eject a disc from theCD player. If the disc is not removedwithin a short period of time, it isautomatically pulled back into theplayer.



Playing an Audio CD

1. Press the CD screen button onthe Home Page or select CDfrom the source pop-up todisplay the CD main page.

2. From the CD screen, press theMenu screen button to displaythe menu options.

3. Press to select the desiredoption.

On the CD main page a tracknumber displays at the beginning ofeach track. Song, Artist, and Albuminformation displays when available.

Use the following controls to playthe disc:

k (Play/Pause): Use to start,pause, or resume play.

g SEEK (Seek Down):. Press to seek to the beginning

of the current or previous track.If the track has been playing forless than five seconds, it seeksto the previous track. If longerthan five seconds, the currenttrack starts from the beginning.

. Press and hold to fast reversethrough a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

l SEEK (Seek Up):. Press to seek to the next track.. Press and hold to fast forward

through a track. Release thebutton to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

MENU/SEL: Turn to the right or leftto select the next or previous track.Press this knob to select the menu.If a track is selected from the list,the system plays the track andreturns to the CD screen.

Error Messages

If Disc Error displays and/or the disccomes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:. The disc has an invalid or

unknown format.. The disc is very hot. Try the disc

again when the temperaturereturns to normal.

. The road is very rough. Try thedisc again when the road issmoother.

. The disc is dirty, scratched,wet, or upside down.

. The air is very humid. Try thedisc again later.

. There was a problem whileburning the disc.

. The label is caught in the CDplayer.



If the CD is not playing correctly,for any other reason, try a knowngood CD.

If any error continues, contact yourdealer.

MP3

Playing an MP3 CD

To play an MP3 CD, follow thesame instructions as “Playing anAudio CD.”

The following guidelines must bemet when creating an MP3 disc,otherwise the CD might not play:. Sampling rate: 16 kHz,

22.05 kHz, 24 kHz, 32 kHz,44.1 kHz, and 48 kHz.

. Bit rates supported: 8, 16, 24,32, 40, 48, 56, 64, 80, 96, 112,128, 144, 160, 192, 224, 256,and 320 kbps.

. Maximum number of folders:eight folders with 255 files perfolder.

. Maximum of 1,000 files ona disc.

. Recorded on a CD-R or CD-RWwith a maximum capacity of700 MB.

. The Artist/Album/Song Titles/Genre information requires aCD to be fully scanned beforethe music navigator works withthese menus.

MP3 Music Menu

Press the Menu screen button whilethat source is active to accessthe menu.

Press any of the following buttonson the MP3 Menu:

Shuffle Songs: Press to play thetracks randomly. Press again to stopshuffle.

Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the disc. Select aplaylist to view the list of all songs inthat playlist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the disc. Select anartist name to view a list of all songsby the artist. There might be a delaybefore the list displays. Select asong from the list to begin playback.

Albums: Press to view the albumson the disc. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the disc. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Press to view the genres.Select a genre to view a list of allsongs of that genre. Select a songfrom the list to begin playback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.



Root Directory

The root directory is treatedas a folder. All files containeddirectly under the root directoryare accessed prior to any rootdirectory folders.

Empty Folders

If a root directory or folder isempty or contains only folders, theplayer advances to the next folderin the file structure that contains acompressed audio file. The emptyfolder(s) are not displayed ornumbered.

No Folder

When the CD only containscompressed audio files withoutany folders or playlists, all filesare under the root folder.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums,and genres are taken from the file'sID3 tag and are only displayed ifpresent in the tag. If a song titleis not present in the ID3 tag, theradio displays the file name as thetrack name.

Preprogrammed Playlists

The radio recognizespreprogrammed playlists; however,there is no editing capability.These playlists are treatedas special folders containingcompressed audio song files.

Auxiliary DevicesThis vehicle has an auxiliary inputjack in the center console. Possibleauxiliary audio sources include:. Laptop computer. MP3 player. Tape player

The auxiliary input is located in thecenter console.



This jack is not an audio output.Do not plug headphones into theauxiliary input jack. Drivers areencouraged to set up any auxiliarydevice while the vehicle is inP (Park).

Connect a 3.5 mm (1/8 in) cablefrom the auxiliary device to theauxiliary input jack. When adevice is connected, the systemautomatically begins playing audiofrom the device over the vehiclespeakers.

If an auxiliary device has alreadybeen connected, but a differentsource is currently active, pressthe Now Playing screen button onthe Home Page, then press Sourcerepeatedly to cycle through all of theavailable audio source screens, untilthe AUX source screen is selected.

Playback of an audio deviceconnected to the 3.5 mm auxiliaryinput jack can only be controlledusing the controls on the device.

Playing from a USB

A USB mass storage device orMicrosoft Transfer Protocal (MTP)device can be connected to theUSB port.

The USB port is in the centerconsole.

The USB icon displays when theUSB device is connected.

USB MP3 Player and USB Drives. The USB MP3 players and USB

drives connected must complywith the USB Mass StorageClass specification (USB MSC).

. Only USB MP3 players and USBdrives with a sector size or512 bytes and a cluster sizesmaller or equal to 32 kbytesin the FAT32 file system aresupported.

. Hard disk drives are notsupported.

. The following restrictions applyfor the data stored on a USBMP3 player or USB device:

‐ Maximum folder structuredepth: 11 levels.

‐ Maximum number ofMP3/WMA files that canbe displayed: 1,000

. WMA with Digital RightsManagement (DRM) from onlinemusic shops cannot be played.WMA files can only be playedback safely if they were createdwith Windows Media Playerversion 8 or later.

‐ Applicable playlist extensionsare: .m3u, .pls.

‐ Playlist entries must be in theform of relative paths.

‐ The system attribute forfolders/files that contain audiodata must not be set.



To play a USB device, do one of thefollowing:. Connect the USB and it begins

to play.. Press the Now Playing screen

button on the Home Page, thenpress the SOURCE button onthe faceplate repeatedly to cyclethrough all of the available audiosource screens, until the USBsource screen is selected.

While the USB source is active,use the following to operate USBfunction:

k (Play/Pause): Press to start,pause, or resume play of the currentmedia source.

g SEEK (Seek Down):

1. Press to seek to the beginningof the current or previous track.If the track has been playingfor less than five seconds, theprevious track plays. If playinglonger than five seconds, thecurrent track restarts.

2. Press and hold to reversequickly through playback.

3. Release to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

l SEEK (Seek Up):

1. Press to seek to the next track.

2. Press and hold to advancequickly through playback.Release to return to playingspeed. Elapsed time displays.

USB Menu

Press any of the following buttonson the USB Menu:


Playlists: Press to view theplaylists stored on the USB. Selecta playlist to view the list of allsongs in that playlist. There mightbe a delay before the list displays.Select a song from the list to beginplayback.

Artists: Press to view the list ofartists stored on the USB. Selectan artist name to view a list of allalbums by the artist. There mightbe a delay before the list displays.To select a song, touch All Songsthen select a song or touch analbum then select a song from thelist to begin playback.



Albums: Press to view the albumson the USB. Select the album toview a list of all songs on the album.There might be a delay before thelist displays. Select a song from thelist to begin playback.

Song Titles: Press to display a listof all songs on the USB. Songs aredisplayed as stored on the disc.There might be a delay before thelist displays. To begin playback,select a song from the list.

Genres: Press to view the genreson the USB. Select a genre toview a list of all songs of that genre.Select a song from the list to beginplayback.

Folders: Press to open a folder listto access the files within the folderstructure.

File System and Naming

The song titles, artists, albums, andgenres are taken from the file's ID3tag and are only displayed if presentin the tag. If a song title is notpresent in the ID3 tag, the radiodisplays the file name as thetrack name.

Playing from an iPod®

This feature supports the followingiPod models:. iPod nano (1st, 2nd, 3rd, and

4th generation). iPod with video (5.0 and

5.5 generation). Video is notshown; only audio is supported.

. iPod classic (6th generation)

. iPod touch (1st and2nd generation)

There may be problems withoperation and function in thefollowing situations:. When connecting an iPod on

which a more recent version ofthe firmware is installed than issupported by the infotainmentsystem.

. When connecting an iPod onwhich firmware from otherproviders is installed.

To connect and control an iPod,connect one end of the standardiPod USB cable to the iPod's dockconnector. Connect the other end tothe USB port in the center console.

iPod music information displayson the radio’s display and beginsplaying through the vehicle’s audiosystem.



The iPod battery rechargesautomatically while the vehicle is on.When the vehicle is off while aniPod is connected using the iPodUSB cable, the iPod battery stopscharging and the iPod automaticallyturns off.

If the iPod is an unsupportedmodel, it can still be listened toin the vehicle by connecting to theauxiliary input jack using a standard3.5 mm (1/8 in) stereo cable.


Press any of the following buttonson the iPod Menu:

Playlists:

1. Press to view the playlists storedon the iPod.

2. Select a playlist name to view alist of all songs in the playlist.

3. Select the desired song from thelist to begin playback.

Artists:

1. Press to view the artists storedon the iPod.

2. Select an artist name to view alist of all songs by the artist.


Albums:

1. Press to view the albums storedon the iPod.

2. Select an album name to viewa list of all songs on the albumor select All Songs to view allsongsby the artist.


Song Titles:

1. Press to view a list of all songsstored on the iPod.


Genres:

1. Press to view the genres storedon the iPod.

2. Select a genre name to view alist of artists of that genre.

3. Select an artist to view albumsor All Songs to view all songs ofthat genre.

4. Select album to view songs.


Podcasts:

1. Press to view the podcastsstored on the iPod.

2. Select a podcast name to playthe desired podcast.



Composers:

1. Press to view the composersstored on the iPod.

2. Select a composer name toview a list of all songs by thatcomposer.


Audio Books:

1. Press to view the audio booksstored on the iPod.

2. Select an audio book name toview a list of all audio books.

3. Select the desired audio bookfrom the list to begin playback.

Playing from an iPhone®

This feature supports the followingiPhone model:. iPhone (3G ‐ 3GS)

To use the iPhone, follow the sameinstructions as stated earlier forusing an iPod.

Rear SeatInfotainment

Rear Seat Entertainment(RSE) SystemThe vehicle may have a DVD RearSeat Entertainment (RSE) system.The RSE system works with thevehicle's infotainment system.The DVD player is part of the frontradio. The RSE system includesa radio with a DVD player, tworear seat video display screens,audio/video jacks, two wirelessheadphones, and a remote control.See the separate navigation manualfor more information.

Before Driving

The RSE is for rear seatpassengers only. The drivercannot safely view the videoscreen while driving.

In severe or extreme weatherconditions, the RSE system maynot work until the temperatureis within the operating range.The operating range is above−20°C (−4°F) and below60°C (140°F). If the temperatureis outside of this range, heat orcool the vehicle until it is withinthe operating range.



Global Off

Depending on the infotainmentsystem, the RSE system mayhave a Global Off feature.The Global Off feature disables allRSE system features. Press andhold the radio power button for morethan three seconds for Global Off todisable the RSE features. On someinfotainment systems, the GlobalOff feature can be turned off byperforming one of the following:. Press and hold the radio

power button for more thanthree seconds.

. Insert or eject any disc.

. Insert a DVD video disc.

. Press the remote control powerbutton.

. Press the SOURCE buttonork when a DVD video discis in the player.

. Press the SRC button on thesteering wheel when a DVDvideo disc is in the player.

. Cycle the ignition.

Headphones

A. Battery Cover

B. Channel 1 or 2 Switch

C. Power Button

D. Volume Control

E. Power Indicator Light

RSE includes two 2-channelwireless headphones. Channel 1is dedicated to the DVD player,and Channel 2 is dedicated to anyexternal auxiliary device connectedto the A/V jacks. The headphonesare used to listen to variousmulti‐media. The wirelessheadphones have a power button,channel 1/2 switch, and a volumecontrol. Turn the headphones offwhen not in use.

Push the power button to turn onthe headphones. A light on theheadphones comes on. If thelight does not come on, check thebatteries. Intermittent sound or staticcan also indicate weak batteries.See “Battery Replacement” later inthis section for more information.

Infrared transmitters are on thetop of the left seatback videoscreen. The headphones shut offautomatically to save the batterypower if the RSE system is shutoff or if the headphones are outof range of the transmitters formore than three minutes.



Moving too far forward or steppingout of the vehicle can cause theheadphones to lose the signal orhave static.

To adjust the volume on theheadphones, use the volumecontrol.

For optimal audio performance, theheadphones must be worn correctly.Headphones should be worn withthe headband over the top of thehead for best audio reception.The symbol L (Left) appears on theoutside bottom edge of the ear cupand should be positioned on the leftear. The symbol R (Right) appearson the outside bottom edge of theear cup and should be positionedon the right ear.

Notice: Do not store theheadphones in heat or directsunlight. This could damagethe headphones and repairs willnot be covered by the warranty.Storage in extreme cold canweaken the batteries. Keep theheadphones stored in a cool,dry place.

If the foam ear pads attached tothe headphones become worn ordamaged, the pads can be replacedseparately from the headphone set.To purchase replacement ear pads,call 1‐888‐293‐3332, then promptzero (0), or contact your dealer.

Battery Replacement

To change the batteries:

1. Loosen the screw to the batterydoor located on the left side ofthe headphones.

2. Slide the battery door open.

3. Replace the two AAA batteries.

4. Replace the battery door andtighten the screw.

Remove the batteries if theheadphones are not going to beused for a long period of time.



Audio/Video (A/V) Jacks

If available, the A/V jacks arelocated on the rear of the floorconsole. They allow audio orvideo cables to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game system.

The A/V jacks are color coded:. Yellow for video input.. White for left audio input.. Red for right audio input.

Power for auxiliary devices is notsupplied by the radio system.

To use the auxiliary inputs of theRSE system:

1. Connect the auxiliary devicecables to the A/V jacks.

2. Power on both the auxiliarydevice and the RSE videoscreen.

Changing the Source on the VideoDisplay Screens

The image from the auxiliary devicecan be switched between the videodisplay screens.

To change the display:

1. Press the AUX button on theremote control to change thesource of both video screensfrom the DVD player to theauxiliary device.

2. Press the AUX button a secondtime to change the left videoscreen source to the DVD playerand the right video screen to theauxiliary device.

3. Press the AUX button a thirdtime to change the left videoscreen source to the auxiliarydevice and the right videoscreen to the DVD player.

4. Press the AUX button a fourthtime to change the source ofboth video screens to the DVDplayer.

Changing the RSE Video ScreenSettings

The screen display mode,brightness, and language can bechanged from the setup menu usingthe remote control. To change asetting:

1. Pressz.

2. Usen,q, p,o, andr toselect the settings.

3. Pressz again to exit thesetup menu.



Audio Output

Audio from the DVD player orauxiliary inputs can be heardthrough the following:. Wireless Headphones. Vehicle Speakers

The RSE system transmits theaudio signal to the wirelessheadphones if an audio signal isavailable. See “Headphones” earlierin this section for more information.

The front seat passengers are ableto listen to playback from the A/Vjacks through the vehicle speakersby selecting Rear A/V as the sourceon the radio.

Video Screens

The video screens are locatedin the back of the driver and frontpassenger seats.

To use the video screen:

1. Push the release button locatedon the seatback console.

2. Move the screen to the desiredviewing position.

Push the video screen down into itslocked position when it is not in use.The screen turns off automatically.

Only the left RSE seatback consolecontains the infrared transmitters forthe wireless headphones. They maybe visible as eight illuminated LEDs.These LEDs are not on the rightvideo screen. Both seatbackconsoles contain an infraredreceiver for the remote control.They are located at the top ofeach console.

Notice: Avoid directly touchingthe video screen, as damage mayoccur. See “Cleaning the VideoScreens” later in this section formore information.



Video Screen Input Jack

Each video screen is equippedwith a video input jack to allowvideo cables to be connectedfrom an auxiliary device such as acamcorder or a video game system.This signal will override any videoprovided by the RSE system; eitherthe DVD or auxiliary A/V jacksource. The RSE system mustbe on for this input to operate.

Remote Control

To use the remote control, aim itat the transmitter window at eitherseatback console and press thebutton. Direct sunlight or very brightlight could affect the ability of theRSE transmitter to receive signalsfrom the remote control. Check thebatteries if the remote control does

not seem to be working. See“Battery Replacement” later in thissection. Objects blocking the line ofsight could also affect the functionof the remote control.

If a CD, DVD, or MP3 disc is in theRadio DVD slot, the remote controlO button can be used to turn onthe video screen display and startthe disc. The infotainment systemcan also turn on the video screendisplay. See the separate navigationmanual for more information.

Notice: Storing the remotecontrol in a hot area or in directsunlight can damage it, and therepairs will not be covered bythe warranty. Storage in extremecold can weaken the batteries.Keep the remote control storedin a cool, dry place.



Remote Control Buttons

O (Power): Press to turn the videoscreens on and off.

P (Illumination): Press to turnthe remote control backlight on.The backlight times out after severalseconds if no other button ispressed.

v (Title): Press to return tothe main menu of the DVD.This function could vary foreach disc.

y (Main Menu): Press to accessthe DVD menu. The DVD menu isdifferent on every DVD. Use thenavigation arrows to move thecursor. After making a selectionpress the enter button. This buttononly operates when using a DVD.

n,q , p ,o (Menu NavigationArrows): Use the arrow buttons tonavigate through a menu.

r (Enter): Press to select thehighlighted choice in any menu.

z (Display Menu): Press toadjust the brightness and screendisplay mode, and display thelanguage menu.

q (Return): Press to exit thecurrent active menu and return tothe previous menu. This buttonoperates only when the displaymenu or a DVD menu is active.

c (Stop): Press to stop playing,rewinding, or fast forwarding aDVD. Press twice to return tothe beginning of the DVD.

s (Play/Pause): Press to startplaying a DVD. Press to pause aDVD while it is playing. Press againto continue playing.

Depending on the infotainmentsystem in the vehicle, DVDplayback may be slowed downby pressings then[. Reverse

slow play by pressings thenr.

Presss again to cancel slow play.

t (Previous Track/Chapter):Press to go to the start of thecurrent track or chapter. Pressagain to go to the previous trackor chapter. This button may notwork when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.



u (Next Track/Chapter): Pressto go to the beginning of the nextchapter or track. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

r (Fast Reverse): Press toquickly reverse the DVD or CD.To stop fast reversing a DVD video,presss. To stop fast reversing

a DVD audio or CD, releaser.This button might not work whenthe DVD is playing the copyrightinformation or the previews.

[ (Fast Forward): Press to fastforward the DVD or CD. To stop fastforwarding a DVD video, presss.To stop fast forwarding a DVD audioor CD, release[. This button mightnot work when the DVD is playingthe copyright information or thepreviews.

e (Audio): Press to change audiotracks on DVDs that have thisfeature when the DVD is playing.

{ (Subtitles): Press to turnON/OFF subtitles and to movethrough subtitle options when aDVD is playing.

AUX (Auxiliary): Press to switchthe video display between the DVDplayer and an auxiliary source.

The AUX button also controls thesource display between the left andright video screens as described inthe table below:

AuxButtonPress

LeftScreen

RightScreen

DefaultState (NoPress)

DVDMedia

DVDMedia

FirstPress

Aux VideoSource

Aux VideoSource

SecondPress

DVDMedia

Aux VideoSource

ThirdPress

Aux VideoSource

DVDMedia

FourthPress

Return toDefaultState

Return toDefaultState



2 (Camera): Press to change thecamera angle on DVDs that havethis feature when the DVD isplaying.

\ (Clear) (If Available): Press thisbutton within three seconds afterinputting a numeric selection, toclear all numeric inputs.

} 10 (Double Digit Entries)(If Available): Press this button toselect chapter or track numbersgreater than 9. Press this buttonbefore inputting the number.

1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad):The numbered keypad provides thecapability of direct chapter or tracknumber selection.

Replacing the Remote Control

If the remote control becomeslost or damaged, a new universalremote control can be purchased.Use a Toshiba® code set forreplacement universal remotecontrols.

Battery Replacement

To change the remote controlbatteries:

1. Slide back the rear cover on theremote control.

2. Replace the two batteries in thecompartment.

3. Replace the battery cover.

Remove the batteries from theremote control if unused for anextended period of time.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart

Problem Recommended Action

No power. The ignition might not be turned to ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

The picture does not fill the screen. There are blackborders on the top and bottom or on both sides, or itlooks stretched out.

Check the display mode settings in the setup menu bypressing the display menu button on the remote control.

In auxiliary mode, the picture moves or scrolls. Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

The remote control does not work. Check to make sure there is no obstruction between theremote control and the transmitter window.Check the batteries to make sure they are not dead orinstalled incorrectly.

After stopping the player, the pushing play, sometimesthe DVD starts where it left off and sometimes at thebeginning.

If the Stop button was pressed one time, the DVD playerresumes playing where the DVD was stopped. If theStop button was pressed two times, the DVD playerbegins to play from the beginning of the DVD.



Tips and Troubleshooting Chart (cont.)

Problem Recommended Action

The auxiliary source is running but there is no picture orsound.

Check that the RSE video screen is in the auxiliarysource mode by pressing the AUX button on the remotecontrol.Check the auxiliary input connections at both devices.

Sometimes the wireless headphone audio cuts out orbuzzes.

Check for obstructions, low batteries, reception range,and interference from cellular telephone towers or byusing a cellular telephone in the vehicle.Check that the headphones are on correctly using theL (left) and R (right) on the headphones.Check that the headphones are positioned properly withthe headband across the top of the head.

The remote and/or the headphones are lost. See your dealer for assistance.

The DVD is playing, but there is no picture or sound. Check that the RSE video screen is sourced to the DVDplayer by pressing the AUX button on the remotecontrol.



DVD Display Error Messages

The video screen may display oneof the following error messages:

Disc Load/Eject Error orMechanical Error: There aredisc load or eject problems.

Disc Format Error or UnknownFormat: The disc is inserted withthe disc label wrong side up, or thedisc is damaged.

Disc Region Error or Disc Error:The disc is not from a correctregion.

No Disc Inserted: No disc ispresent whenX is pressed onthe radio.

DVD Distortion

Video distortion can occur whenoperating cellular phones, scanners,CB radios, Global PositioningSystems (GPS)*, two-way radios,mobile faxes, or walkie talkies.

It might be necessary to turn off theDVD player when operating one ofthese devices in or near the vehicle.

*Excludes the OnStar System.

Cleaning the RSE SeatbackConsole

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water to clean the RSEseatback console surface.

Cleaning the Video Screen

Use only a clean cloth dampenedwith clean water. Use care whentouching or cleaning the screenas damage could result.

Rear Seat Audio (RSA)SystemVehicles with this feature allowthe rear seat passengers to listento and control any of the musicsources: radio, CDs, DVDs, or otherauxiliary sources. RSA can onlycontrol music sources that the frontseat passengers are not listening to,except on radios where dual controlis allowed.

RSA can function when the frontradio is off.X displays on theinfotainment system when RSAis on.

Audio can be heard throughwired headphones (not included)plugged into the jacks on the RSA.If the vehicle has a Rear SeatEntertainment system with wirelessheadphones, audio can also beheard on Channel 2 of the wirelessheadphones.



To listen to a portable audiodevice through the RSA, attachthe portable audio device to eitherthe front or rear auxiliary input,if available. Turn the device on,then choose the front auxiliary inputwith the RSA SRCE button.

P (Power): Press to turn the RSAon or off.

Volume: Turn to increase ordecrease the volume of the wiredheadphones. The left knob controlsthe left headphones and the rightknob controls the right. Use thevolume control on the headphonesfor wireless headphones.

SRCE (Source): Press to selectbetween the radio, CD, and if thesefeatures are available: DVD, frontor rear auxiliary, HDD, USB. Thefront radio may override the rearselection as required.

© ¨ (Seek): While listening to theradio, press to go to the previous orto the next station and stay there.If the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio, this functionmay be inactive on some radios.

Press and hold © or ¨ until “Tune”

displays. Continue to press © or ¨to tune to an individual station. Tunestays active until © or ¨ has notbeen pressed for several seconds.If the front seat passengers arelistening to the radio, this functionmay be inactive on some radios.

While listening to a disc, press ¨ togo to the next track or chapter onthe disc. Press © to go back to thestart of the current track or chapter ifmore than 10 seconds have played.If the front seat passengers arelistening to a disc, this function maybe inactive on some radios. Pressand hold © or ¨ to fast reverse orfast forward.

When a DVD video menu is beingdisplayed, press © or ¨ to cursor up

or down on the menu. Hold © or ¨ tocursor left or right on the menu.

PROG (Program): Press to goto the next preset radio station orchannel set on the main radio. If thefront seat passengers are listeningto the radio, this function may beinactive on some radios.



When a CD or DVD audio disc isplaying, press PROG to go to thebeginning of the disc or display discinfo. If the front seat passengers arelistening to a disc, this function maybe inactive on some radios.

When a disc is playing in the CDor DVD changer, press and holdPROG to select the next disc,if multiple discs are loaded. If thefront seat passengers are listeningto a disc, this function may beinactive on some radios.

The PROG button may be used toaccess the menu of an MP3. Oncein the menu, use © or ¨ to makeselections.

When a DVD video menu isdisplayed, press PROG, or pressand hold PROG to perform themenu function, then press ENTER.

Phone

Bluetooth (Overview)For vehicles equipped withBluetooth capability, the systemcan interact with many cell phones,allowing:. Placement and receipt of calls in

a hands-free mode.. Sharing of the cell phone’s

address book or contact listwith the vehicle.

To minimize driver distraction,before driving, and with the vehicleparked:. Become familiar with the

features of the cell phone.Organize the phone book andcontact lists clearly and deleteduplicate or rarely used entries.If possible, program speed dialor other shortcuts.

. Review the controls andoperation of the infotainmentsystem.

. Pair cell phone(s) to the vehicle.The system may not work withall cell phones. See “Pairing” inthis section for more information.

. If the cell phone has voicedialing capability, learn to usethat feature to access theaddress book or contact list.See “Voice Pass-Thru” in thissection for more information.

. See “Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers” in this section formore information.

{ WARNING

When using a cell phone, it canbe distracting to look too longor too often at the screen ofthe phone or the infotainment(navigation) system. Takingyour eyes off the road too longor too often could cause a crashresulting in injury or death. Focusyour attention on driving.



Vehicles with a Bluetooth systemcan use a Bluetooth‐capable cellphone with a Hands‐Free Profileto make and receive phone calls.The infotainment system and voicerecognition are used to controlthe system. The system can beused while in ON/RUN or ACC/ACCESSORY. The range of theBluetooth system can be up to9.1 m (30 ft). Not all phones supportall functions and not all phoneswork with the Bluetooth system.See www.gm.com/bluetooth formore information about compatiblephones.

Bluetooth Controls

Use the buttons located on theinfotainment system and thesteering wheel to operate theBluetooth system.


b / g (Push To Talk): Press toanswer incoming calls, confirmsystem information, and start voicerecognition.

$ /i (End Call/Mute): Press toend a call, reject a call, or cancel anoperation.

Infotainment System Controls

If equipped, the infotainmentsystem allows certain controls to beselected on the infotainment display.

For information about how tonavigate the menu system using theinfotainment controls, see Overviewon page 7‑3.

5 (Phone): Press to enter thePhone main menu. Press 5 tomute the audio system.

? (Mute): Press ? to mute theaudio system.

Voice Recognition

The voice recognition system usescommands to control the systemand dial phone numbers.

Noise: The system may notrecognize voice commands if thereis too much background noise.

When to Speak: A tone sounds toindicate that the system is ready fora voice command. Wait for the toneand then speak.

How to Speak: Speak clearly in acalm and natural voice.



Audio System

When using the Bluetooth system,sound comes through the vehicle'sfront audio system speakersand overrides the audio system.Use the VOL/ O knob during acall to change the volume level.The adjusted volume levelremains in memory for later calls.The system maintains a minimumvolume level.

Other Information

The Bluetooth® word mark andlogos are owned by the Bluetooth®

SIG, Inc. and any use of such marksby General Motors is under license.Other trademarks and trade namesare those of their respective owners.

See Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Bluetooth (InfotainmentControls)For information about how tonavigate the menu system usingthe infotainment controls, seeOverview on page 7‑3.

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected tothe vehicle before it can be used.See your cell phone manufacturer'suser guide for Bluetooth functionsbefore pairing the cell phone. If aBluetooth phone is not connected,calls will be made using OnStarHands‐Free Calling, if available.See OnStar Overview on page 14‑1for more information.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phonesare within range of the system,the system connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone in theorder that they were first pairedto the system. To link to adifferent paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.



Pairing a Phone

1. Press the CONFIG button.

2. Select Phone Settings orBluetooth Settings.

3. Select Bluetooth.

4. Select Pair Device (Phone).A four‐digit PersonalIdentification Number (PIN)appears on the display.The PIN is used in Step 6.

5. Start the pairing process on thecell phone to be paired to thevehicle. See the cell phonemanufacturer's user guide forinformation on this process.

6. Locate the device named“Your Vehicle” in the list onthe cell phone. Follow theinstructions on the cell phone toenter the PIN provided in Step 4.After the PIN is successfullyentered, the system prompts youto provide a name for the pairedcell phone. This name will beused to indicate which phonesare paired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

7. Repeat Steps 1 through 6 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones




4. Select Device List.

Deleting a Paired Phone





5. Select the phone to delete andfollow the on screen prompts.



Linking to a Different Phone

To link to a different phone, the newphone must be in the vehicle andavailable to be connected to theBluetooth system before theprocess is started.





5. Select the new phone to linkto and follow the on screenprompts.

If delete is selected, thehighlighted phone will bedeleted.

Making a Call UsingPhone Book

For cell phones that support thephone book feature, the Bluetoothsystem can use the contacts storedon your cell phone to make calls.See your cell phone manufacturer”suser guide or contact your wirelessprovider to find out if this feature issupported by your phone.

When a cell phone supports thephone book feature, the PhoneBook and Call Lists menus areautomatically available.

The Phone Book menu allows youto access the phone book stored inthe cell phone to make a call.

The Call Lists menu allows you toaccess the phone numbers from theIncoming Calls, Outgoing Calls, andMissed Calls menus on your cellphone to make a call.

To make a call using the PhoneBook menu:

1. Press 5 once or twice(depending on the radio).

2. Select Phone Book.

3. Search through the list byselecting the letter group thephone book entry begins with,or press the MENU/SEL buttonto scroll through the entirelist of names/numbers in thephone book.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.

To make a call using the CallLists menu:


2. Select Call Lists.

3. Select the Incoming Calls,Outgoing Calls, or MissedCalls list.

4. Select the name or number youwant to call.



Making a Call

To make a call:


2. Enter the phone number.

3. Select Call to start dialing thenumber.

Accepting or Declining a Call

When an incoming call is received,the infotainment system mutes anda ring tone is heard in the vehicle.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELknob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELknob to decline the call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe Bluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

Accepting a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Answer” and press the MENU/SELknob to accept the call.

Declining a Call

Turn the MENU/SEL knob to“Decline” and press the MENU/SELknob to decline the call.

Switching Between Calls(Call Waiting Calls Only)

To switch between calls:

1. Turn or press theMENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Switch Call fromthe menu.

Conference Calling

Conference calling and three‐waycalling must be supported on theBluetooth phone and enabled bythe wireless service carrier to work.

To start a conference while in acurrent call:

1. Turn or press theMENU/SEL knob.

2. Select Enter Number.


4. After the call has been placed,turn or press the MENU/SELknob and choose Merge Calls.

5. To add more callers to theconference call, repeat Steps 1through 4. The number of callersthat can be added is limited byyour wireless service carrier.

Ending a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Hang Up.



Muting a Call

To Mute a Call

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Mute Call.

To Cancel Mute

Turn or press the MENU/SEL knoband select Mute Call.

Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The in‐vehicle Bluetooth system cansend numbers during a call. This isused when calling a menu‐drivenphone system.

1. Turn or press the MENU/SELknob and select Enter Number.


Bluetooth(Voice Recognition)

Using Voice Recognition

To use voice recognition, pressthe b / g button located on thesteering wheel. Use the commandsbelow for the various voice features.For additional information, say“Help” while you are in a voicerecognition menu.

Pairing

A Bluetooth‐enabled cell phonemust be paired to the Bluetoothsystem and then connected to thevehicle before it can be used. Seeyour cell phone manufacturer's userguide for Bluetooth functions beforepairing the cell phone. If a Bluetoothphone is not connected, calls willbe made using OnStar Hands‐FreeCalling, if available. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Pairing Information. A Bluetooth phone with MP3

capability cannot be paired tothe vehicle as a phone and anMP3 player at the same time.

. Up to five cell phones can bepaired to the Bluetooth system.

. The pairing process is disabledwhen the vehicle is moving.

. Pairing only needs to becompleted once, unless thepairing information on the cellphone changes or the cell phoneis deleted from the system.

. Only one paired cell phone canbe connected to the Bluetoothsystem at a time.

. If multiple paired cell phonesare within range of the system,the system connects to the firstavailable paired cell phone inthe order that they were firstpaired to the system. To link toa different paired phone, see“Linking to a Different Phone”later in this section.



Pairing a Phone

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followed bya tone.

2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Pair.” The system respondswith instructions and a four‐digitPersonal Identification Number(PIN). The PIN is used in Step 5.

4. Start the pairing process on thecell phone that you want to pair.For help with this process, seeyour cell phone manufacturer'suser guide.

5. Locate the device named “YourVehicle” in the list on the cellphone. Follow the instructionson the cell phone to enter thePIN provided in Step 3. After thePIN is successfully entered, thesystem prompts you to provide aname for the paired cell phone.This name will be used toindicate which phones arepaired and connected to thevehicle. The system respondswith “<Phone name> has beensuccessfully paired” after thepairing process is complete.

6. Repeat Steps 1 through 5 to pairadditional phones.

Listing All Paired and ConnectedPhones

The system can list all cell phonespaired to it. If a paired cell phone isalso connected to the vehicle, thesystem responds with “is connected”after that phone name.


2. Say “Bluetooth.”

3. Say “List.”

Deleting a Paired Phone

If the phone name you want todelete is unknown, see “Listing AllPaired and Connected Phones.”



3. Say “Delete.” The system asksfor which phone to delete.

4. Say the name of the phone youwant to delete.



Connecting to a Different Phone

To connect to a different cell phone,the Bluetooth system looks for thenext available cell phone in theorder in which all available cellphones were paired. Dependingon which cell phone you want toconnect to, you may have to usethis command several times.

1. Press b / g. The systemresponds “Ready,” followedby a tone.


3. Say “Change phone.”. If another cell phone is

found, the response will be“<Phone name> is nowconnected.”

. If another cell phone is notfound, the original phoneremains connected.

Storing and Deleting PhoneNumbers

The system can store up to30 phone numbers as name tagsin the Hands‐Free Directory that isshared between the Bluetooth andOnStar systems.

The following commands are usedto delete and store phone numbers.

Store: This command will storea phone number, or a group ofnumbers as a name tag.

Digit Store: This command allowsa phone number to be stored as aname tag by entering the digits oneat a time.

Delete: This command is used todelete individual name tags.

Delete All Name Tags: Thiscommand deletes all stored nametags in the Hands‐Free CallingDirectory and the DestinationsDirectory.

Using the “Store” Command


2. Say “Store.”

3. Say the phone number or groupof numbers you want to storeall at once with no pauses, thenfollow the directions given by thesystem to save a name tag forthis number.

Using the “Digit Store” Command

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system, say“Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Store.”



3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to store. Aftereach digit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Store,” and then follow thedirections given by the system tosave a name tag for this number.

Using the “Delete” Command


2. Say “Delete.”

3. Say the name tag you want todelete.

Using the “Delete All Name Tags”Command

This command deletes all storedname tags in the Hands‐FreeCalling Directory and theDestinations Directory.

To delete all name tags:


2. Say “Delete all name tags.”

Listing Stored Numbers

The list command will list all storednumbers and name tags.

Using the “List” Command


2. Say “Directory.”

3. Say “Hands‐Free Calling.”

4. Say “List.”

Making a Call

Calls can be made using thefollowing commands.

Dial or Call: The dial orcall command can be usedinterchangeably to dial a phonenumber or a stored name tag.

Digit Dial: This command allowsa phone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.

Re‐dial: This command is used todial the last number used on the cellphone.

Using the “Dial” or “Call”Command


2. Say “Dial” or “Call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing or say the name tag.

Once connected, the person calledwill be heard through the audiospeakers.



Using the “Digit Dial” Command

The digit dial command allows aphone number to be dialed byentering the digits one at a time.After each digit is entered, thesystem repeats back the digit itheard followed by a tone.

If an unwanted number isrecognized by the system, say“Clear” at any time to clear thelast number.

To hear all of the numbersrecognized by the system,say “Verify” at any time.


2. Say “Digit Dial.”

3. Say each digit, one at a time,that you want to dial. After eachdigit is entered, the systemrepeats back the digit it heardfollowed by a tone. After thelast digit has been entered,say “Dial.”


Using the “Re‐dial” Command


2. After the tone, say “Re‐dial.”The system dials the lastnumber called from theconnected cell phone.


Receiving a Call

When an incoming call is received,the audio system mutes and a ringtone is heard in the vehicle.

. Press b / g to answer the call.

. Press $ /i to ignore a call.

Call Waiting

Call waiting must be supported onthe cell phone and enabled by thewireless service carrier.

. Press b / g to answer anincoming call when another callis active. The original call isplaced on hold.

. Press b / g again to return tothe original call.

. To ignore the incoming call, noaction is required.

. Press $ /i to disconnect thecurrent call and switch to the callon hold.

Three‐Way Calling

Three‐way calling must besupported on the cell phone andenabled by the wireless servicecarrier.

1. While on a call, press b / g.2. Say “Three‐way call.”



3. Use the dial or call command todial the number of the third partyto be called.

4. Once the call is connected,press b / g to link all callerstogether.

Ending a Call

Press $ /i to end a call.

Muting a Call

During a call, all sounds from insidethe vehicle can be muted so that theperson on the other end of the callcannot hear them.

To mute a call, press b / g, andthen say “Mute Call.”

To cancel mute, press b / g, andthen say “Un‐mute Call.”

Transferring a Call

Audio can be transferred betweenthe Bluetooth system and the cellphone.

The cell phone must be pairedand connected with the Bluetoothsystem before a call can betransferred. The connection processcan take up to two minutes after theignition is turned to ON/RUN.

To Transfer Audio from theBluetooth System to a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio in thevehicle:

1. Press b / g.2. Say “Transfer Call.”

To Transfer Audio to the BluetoothSystem from a Cell Phone

During a call with the audio on thecell phone, press b / g. The audiotransfers to the vehicle. If the audiodoes not transfer to the vehicle,use the audio transfer feature onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide for moreinformation.

Voice Pass-Thru

Voice pass‐thru allows access tothe voice recognition commands onthe cell phone. See your cell phonemanufacturer's user guide to see ifthe cell phone supports this feature.

To access contacts stored in the cellphone:


2. Say “Bluetooth.” This commandcan be skipped.

3. Say “Voice.” The systemresponds “OK, accessing<phone name>.”

The cell phone's normal promptmessages will go through their cycleaccording to the phone's operatinginstructions.



Dual Tone Multi-Frequency(DTMF) Tones

The Bluetooth system can sendnumbers and the numbers storedas name tags during a call. You canuse this feature when calling amenu‐driven phone system.Account numbers can also bestored for use.

Sending a Number or Name TagDuring a Call


2. Say “Dial.”

3. Say the number or name tagto send.

Clearing the System

Unless information is deleted outof the in‐vehicle Bluetooth system,it will be retained indefinitely.This includes all saved name tags inthe phone book and phone pairinginformation. For information on howto delete this information, see theprevious sections on “Deleting aPaired Phone” and “Storing andDeleting Name Tags.”

Trademarks andLicense Agreements

Manufactured under licenseunder U.S. Patent #'s: 5,451,942;5,956,674; 5,974,380; 5,978,762;6,487,535 & other U.S. andworldwide patents issued &pending. DTS and the Symbolare registered trademarks andDTS Digital Surround and theDTS logos are trademarks of DTS,Inc. Product includes software.All Rights Reserved.



Manufactured under license fromDolby® Laboratories. Dolby and thedouble-D symbol are registeredtrademarks of Dolby Laboratories.

"Made for iPod and iPhone" meanthat an electronic accessoryhas been designed to connectspecifically to iPod or iPhone,respectively, and has beencertified by the developer to meetApple performance standards.

Apple is not responsible for theoperation of this device or itscompliance with safety andregulatory standards. Pleasenote that the use of this accessorywith iPod or iPhone may affectwireless preformance.

iPhone, iPod, iPod classic,iPod nano, and iPod touch aretrademarks of Apple Inc., registeredin the U.S. and other countries.


Climate Controls 8-1

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemsClimate Control Systems . . . . . . 8-1Automatic Climate ControlSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3

Air VentsAir Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5

MaintenancePassenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Climate Control SystemsThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith this system.

A. Fan Control

B. Air Delivery Mode Controls

C. Temperature Control

D. Outside Air

E. Front Defrost

F. Rear Window Defogger

G. Recirculation

H. Air Conditioning

A (Fan Control): Turn to increaseor decrease the fan speed. Turn theknob completely to T to turn thefan off.

Temperature Control: Turnto increase or decrease thetemperature.


8-2 Climate Controls

Air Delivery Mode Control: Tochange the current mode, selectone of the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 FRONT (Front Defrost):Clears the windshield of fog or frostmore quickly. Air is directed to thewindshield and side window outlets.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.

Do not drive the vehicle until all thewindows are clear.

Air Conditioning

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing,the air conditioning will not work.

h (Recirculation): Press to turnon the recirculation. An indicatorlight comes on. Air is recirculatedinside the vehicle. It helps to quicklycool the air inside the vehicle orprevent outside air and odors fromentering. The air conditioning maycome on under certain conditions.

To improve fuel efficiency and tocool the vehicle faster, recirculationmay be automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. To overridethis feature, select outside air.

% (Outside Air): Press to turnon the outside air. An indicator lightcomes on. Outside air is circulatedthroughout the vehicle.

Rear Window Defogger

1 REAR (Rear Defogger): Pressto turn the rear window defogger onor off. The rear window defoggerturns off after about 10 minutes.It can also be turned off by turningthe ignition to ACC/ACCESSORYor LOCK/OFF. If turned on again,it runs for about five minutes beforeturning off.


Notice: Do not use a razorblade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defoggergrid lines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.



Automatic Climate Control SystemThe vehicle's heating, cooling, defrosting, and ventilation can be controlledwith this system.

A. Fan Control

B. AUTO (Automatic Operation)

C. Air Delivery Mode Controls

D. Front Defrost

E. Recirculation

F. Temperature Control

G. Power

H. Driver and Passenger HeatedSeats

I. Rear Window Defogger

J. Air Conditioning

Automatic Operation

The system automatically controlsthe fan speed, air delivery, airconditioning, and recirculationto heat or cool the vehicle tothe selected temperature.

When the AUTO indicator light ison, the system is in full automaticoperation.

To place the system inautomatic mode:

1. Press AUTO.

2. Set the temperature. Allowthe system time to stabilize.Then adjust the temperatureas needed.

To improve fuel efficiencyand to cool the vehiclefaster, recirculation maybe automatically selected inwarm weather. The recirculationlight will not come on. Presstheh to select recirculation;press it again to selectoutside air.



Manual Operation

O (Power): Press to turn theclimate control system on or off.

A (Fan Control): Turn toincrease or decrease the fan speed.Adjusting the fan speed while inautomatic mode places the fanunder manual control. The AUTOindicator light turns off. The airdelivery mode remains in automaticcontrol.

Temperature Control: Turnto increase or decrease thetemperature inside the vehicle.

H / G (Air Delivery ModeControl): Press mode up or modedown to cycle through the differentair delivery modes. The currentmode is shown on the display.

Select from the following:

F (Vent): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets.

* (Bi-Level): Air is directed to theinstrument panel outlets and thefloor outlets.

7 (Floor): Air is directed to thefloor outlets.

W (Defog): Clears the windows offog or moisture. Air is directed to thewindshield and floor outlets.

0 FRONT (Front Defrost):Clears the windshield of fog orfrost more quickly. Air is directedto the windshield and side windowoutlets. Selecting defrost disablesthe automatic mode.

For best results, clear all snow andice from the windshield beforedefrosting.


Air Conditioning

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press toturn the air conditioning on or off.If the fan is turned off or the outsidetemperature falls below freezing,the air conditioning will not work.When in AUTO, the air conditioningwill come on automatically asneeded.

h (Recirculation): Press toturn on the recirculation. Press toalternate between recirculation andoutside air, if the vehicle does nothave a separate outside air button.

The indicator light turns on whenrecirculation is selected. Air isrecirculated inside the vehicle.It helps quickly cool the air insidethe vehicle or prevent outside airand odors from entering.

% (Outside Air, If Equipped):Press to turn on the outside air. Anindicator light comes on. Outside airis circulated throughout the vehicle.



Rear Window Defogger

1 REAR (Rear Defogger): Pressto turn the rear window defogger onor off. The rear window defoggerturns off after about 10 minutes.It can also be turned off by turningthe ignition to ACC/ACCESSORYor LOCK/OFF. If turned on again,it runs for about five minutes beforeturning off.


Notice: Do not use a razorblade or sharp object to clearthe inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defoggergrid lines in the rear glass. Theseactions may damage the reardefogger. Repairs would notbe covered by your warranty.

L / M (Driver and PassengerHeated Seats): For vehicles withheated seats, see Heated FrontSeats on page 3‑9.

Remote Start Climate ControlOperation: For vehicles withthe remote vehicle start feature,the climate control system mayrun when the vehicle is startedremotely. The system uses thedriver's previous settings to heator cool the inside of the vehicle.The front heated seats will turnon if it is cold outside. The heatedseat indicator lights do not come onduring a remote start. See RemoteVehicle Start on page 2‑5.

Sensors

The solar sensor, located on topof the instrument panel near thewindshield, monitors the solar heat.

The climate control systemuses the information to adjustthe temperature, fan speed,recirculation, and air delivery mode.

Do not cover the solar sensor or thesystem will not work properly.

Air VentsUse the air outlets, located inthe center and on the side of theinstrument panel, to direct theairflow. Use the thumbwheelslocated near the center air outlets,to open or close off the airflow.

Operation Tips. Clear away any ice, snow,

or leaves from air inlets atthe base of the windshield thatcould block the flow of air intothe vehicle.

. Keep the path under the frontseats clear of objects to helpcirculate the air inside of thevehicle more effectively.

. Use of non‐GM approved hooddeflectors can adversely affectthe performance of the system.Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outsideof the vehicle.



Maintenance

Passenger CompartmentAir FilterThe filter removes dust, pollen, andother airborne irritants from outsideair that is pulled into the vehicle.

The filter should be replaced as partof routine scheduled maintenance.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for replacement intervals.To find out what type of filter to use,see Maintenance ReplacementParts on page 11‑14.

The passenger compartment airfilter can be accessed by removingthe entire glove box.

1. Open the glove box completelyand locate the stop tab on top ofthe glove box door.

2. Push the stop tab upwardsuntil the stop tab is under theinstrument panel assembly andthe glove box is released.

3. Unsnap the tabs beneath theglove box that connects it to thebottom of the instrument panelassembly.

4. Remove the glove box.

5. Locate the service door for thepassenger compartment air filter.

6. Push the two tabs upwardsand release the latches holdingthe service door. Lift theservice door.

7. Remove the old air filter.

8. Install the new air filter.

9. Close the service door andlatches.

10. Re‐install the glove box.

See your dealer if additionalassistance is needed.


Driving and Operating 9-1

Driving andOperating

Driving InformationDistracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving on Wet Roads . . . . . . . 9-12Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . 9-14Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15If the Vehicle Is Stuck . . . . . . . . 9-17Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . 9-18

Starting and OperatingNew Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . 9-23Ignition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Engine Coolant Heater . . . . . . . 9-28Shifting Into Park . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-29Shifting out of Park . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Parking over ThingsThat Burn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30

Engine ExhaustEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31

Automatic TransmissionAutomatic Transmission . . . . . 9-32Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

BrakesAntilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-36Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . 9-37

Ride Control SystemsTraction ControlSystem (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37

StabiliTrak® System . . . . . . . . . 9-39

Cruise ControlCruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41

Object Detection SystemsForward Collision Alert (FCA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-43

Ultrasonic Parking Assist . . . . 9-46Rear VisionCamera (RVC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-48

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-51


9-2 Driving and Operating

FuelFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Recommended Fuel . . . . . . . . . 9-54Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only) . . . . 9-54

California FuelRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55

Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . 9-55Fuel Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-55Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . 9-56Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-58Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-59

TowingGeneral TowingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Driving Characteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-60

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64Towing Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Trailer SwayControl (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Conversions and Add-OnsAdd-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Driving Information

Distracted DrivingDistraction comes in many formsand can take your focus from thetask of driving. Exercise goodjudgment and do not let otheractivities divert your attentionaway from the road. Many localgovernments have enactedlaws regarding driver distraction.Become familiar with the locallaws in your area.

To avoid distracted driving, alwayskeep your eyes on the road, handson the wheel, and mind on the drive.. Do not use a phone in

demanding driving situations.Use a hands-free method toplace or receive necessaryphone calls.

. Watch the road. Do notread, take notes, or look upinformation on phones orother electronic devices.

. Designate a front seatpassenger to handle potentialdistractions.

. Become familiar with vehiclefeatures before driving, suchas programming favorite radiostations and adjusting climatecontrol and seat settings.Program all trip informationinto any navigation deviceprior to driving.

. Wait until the vehicle is parkedto retrieve items that have fallento the floor.

. Stop or park the vehicle to tendto children.

. Keep pets in an appropriatecarrier or restraint.

. Avoid stressful conversationswhile driving, whether with apassenger or on a cell phone.



{ WARNING

Taking your eyes off the road toolong or too often could cause acrash resulting in injury or death.Focus your attention on driving.

Refer to the Infotainment sectionfor more information on using thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

If equipped, refer to the navigationmanual for information on thatsystem, including pairing and usinga cell phone.

Defensive DrivingDefensive driving means “alwaysexpect the unexpected.” The firststep in driving defensively is to wearthe safety belt. See Safety Belts onpage 3‑12.. Assume that other road users

(pedestrians, bicyclists, andother drivers) are going to becareless and make mistakes.Anticipate what they might doand be ready.

. Allow enough following distancebetween you and the driver infront of you.

. Focus on the task of driving.

Drunk DrivingDeath and injury associated withdrinking and driving is a globaltragedy.

{ WARNING

Drinking and then driving isvery dangerous. Your reflexes,perceptions, attentiveness, andjudgment can be affected byeven a small amount of alcohol.You can have a serious — oreven fatal — collision if youdrive after drinking.

Do not drink and drive or ride witha driver who has been drinking.Ride home in a cab; or if you arewith a group, designate a driverwho will not drink.



Control of a VehicleBraking, steering, and acceleratingare important factors in helping tocontrol a vehicle while driving.

BrakingBraking action involves perceptiontime and reaction time. Deciding topush the brake pedal is perceptiontime. Actually doing it isreaction time.

Average driver reaction time isabout three‐fourths of a second.In that time, a vehicle moving at100 km/h (60 mph) travels 20 m(66 ft), which could be a lot ofdistance in an emergency.

Helpful braking tips to keep in mindinclude:. Keep enough distance between

you and the vehicle in frontof you.

. Avoid needless heavy braking.

. Keep pace with traffic.

If the engine ever stops while thevehicle is being driven, brakenormally but do not pump thebrakes. Doing so could make thepedal harder to push down. If theengine stops, there will be somepower brake assist but it will beused when the brake is applied.Once the power assist is used up,it can take longer to stop and thebrake pedal will be harder to push.

Steering

Electric Power Steering(2.4L L4 Engine)

If the engine stalls while driving, thepower steering assist system willcontinue to operate until you areable to stop the vehicle.

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

If the steering wheel is turnedin either direction several timesuntil it stops, or it is held until itis stopped for an extended time,power steering assist may bereduced. The normal power steeringassist should return shortly after afew normal steering movements.



The electric power steeringsystem does not require regularmaintenance. If you suspectsteering system problems, such asabnormally high steering effort fora prolonged period of time, contactyour dealer for service repairs.

Hydraulic Power Steering(3.0L V6 Engine)

If power steering assist is lost dueto a system malfunction, the vehiclecan be steered, but may requireincreased effort.

Curve Tips. Take curves at a reasonable

speed.. Reduce speed before entering a

curve.

. Maintain a reasonable steadyspeed through the curve

. Wait until the vehicle is out ofthe curve before acceleratinggently into the straightaway.

Steering in Emergencies. There are some situations when

steering around a problem maybe more effective than braking.

. Holding both sides of thesteering wheel allows you to turn180 degrees without removinga hand.

. Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)allows steering while braking.

Off-Road Recovery

The vehicle's right wheels candrop off the edge of a roadonto the shoulder while driving.Follow these tips:

1. Ease off the accelerator andthen, if there is nothing in theway, steer the vehicle so thatit straddles the edge of thepavement.



2. Turn the steering wheel aboutone-eighth of a turn, until theright front tire contacts thepavement edge.

3. Then turn the steering wheel togo straight down the roadway.

Loss of Control

Skidding

There are three types of skids thatcorrespond to the vehicle's threecontrol systems:. Braking Skid — wheels are not

rolling.. Steering or Cornering

Skid — too much speed orsteering in a curve causes tiresto slip and lose cornering force.

. Acceleration Skid — too muchthrottle causes the drivingwheels to spin.

Defensive drivers avoid most skidsby taking reasonable care suitedto existing conditions, and bynot overdriving those conditions.But skids are always possible.

If the vehicle starts to slide,follow these suggestions:. Ease your foot off the

accelerator pedal and quicklysteer the way you want thevehicle to go. The vehicle maystraighten out. Be ready for asecond skid if it occurs.

. Slow down and adjust yourdriving according to weatherconditions. Stopping distancecan be longer and vehiclecontrol can be affected whentraction is reduced by water,snow, ice, gravel, or othermaterial on the road. Learn torecognize warning clues — suchas enough water, ice, or packedsnow on the road to make amirrored surface — and slowdown when you have any doubt.

. Try to avoid sudden steering,acceleration, or braking,including reducing vehiclespeed by shifting to a lowergear. Any sudden changescould cause the tires to slide.

Remember: Antilock brakes helpavoid only the braking skid.



Off-Road DrivingAll-wheel-drive vehicles can beused for off-road driving. Vehicleswithout all-wheel drive and vehiclesnot equipped with All Terrain (AT) orOn-Off Road (OOR) tires must notbe driven off-road except on a level,solid surface. To contact the tiremanufacturer for more informationabout the original equipment tires,see the Limited Warranty andOwner Assistance Informationmanual.

Controlling the vehicle is the key tosuccessful off-road driving. One ofthe best ways to control the vehicleis to control the speed.

{ WARNING

When driving off-road, bouncingand quick changes in directioncan easily throw you out ofposition. This could cause you tolose control and crash. You andyour passengers should alwayswear safety belts.

Before Driving Off-Road. Have all necessary maintenance

and service work completed.. Fuel the vehicle, fill fluid levels,

and check inflation pressure inall tires, including the spare,if equipped.

. Read all the information aboutall-wheel-drive vehicles in thismanual.

. Make sure all underbodyshields, if equipped, are properlyattached.

. Know the local laws that apply tooff-road driving.

To gain more ground clearance ifneeded, it may be necessary toremove the front fascia lowerair dam.

Notice: Operating the vehiclefor extended periods withoutthe front fascia lower air daminstalled can cause improper airflow to the engine. Re‐attach thefront fascia air dam after off-roaddriving.



Loading the Vehicle forOff-Road Driving

{ WARNING

. Unsecured cargo on theload floor can be tossedabout when driving overrough terrain. You or yourpassengers can be struckby flying objects. Securethe cargo properly.

. Keep cargo in the cargo areaas far forward and as lowas possible. The heaviestthings should be on the floor,forward of the rear axle.

. Heavy loads on the roof raisethe vehicle's center of gravity,making it more likely to rollover. You can be seriously orfatally injured if the vehiclerolls over. Put heavy loadsinside the cargo area, noton the roof.

For more information about loadingthe vehicle, see Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑18.

Environmental Concerns. Always use established trails,

roads, and areas that havebeen set aside for public off-roadrecreational driving and obey allposted regulations.

. Do not damage shrubs, flowers,trees, or grasses or disturbwildlife.

. Do not park over things thatburn. See Parking over ThingsThat Burn on page 9‑30.

Driving on Hills

Driving safely on hills requires goodjudgment and an understanding ofwhat the vehicle can and cannot do.

{ WARNING

Many hills are simply too steepfor any vehicle. Driving up hillscan cause the vehicle to stall.Driving down hills can cause lossof control. Driving across hills cancause a rollover. You could beinjured or killed. Do not drive onsteep hills.

Before driving on a hill, assessthe steepness, traction, andobstructions. If the terrain aheadcannot be seen, get out of thevehicle and walk the hill beforedriving further.



When driving on hills:. Use a low gear and keep a firm

grip on the steering wheel.. Maintain a slow speed.. When possible, drive straight up

or down the hill.. Slow down when approaching

the top of the hill.. Use headlamps even during the

day to make the vehicle morevisible.

{ WARNING

Driving to the top of a hill at highspeed can cause an accident.There could be a drop-off,embankment, cliff, or evenanother vehicle. You couldbe seriously injured or killed.As you near the top of a hill,slow down and stay alert.

. Never go downhill forward orbackward with the transmissionin N (Neutral). The brakes couldoverheat and you could losecontrol.

. When driving down a hill, keepthe vehicle headed straightdown. Use a low gear becausethe engine will work with thebrakes to slow the vehicle andhelp keep the vehicle undercontrol.

{ WARNING

Heavy braking when going downa hill can cause your brakes tooverheat and fade. This couldcause loss of control and you orothers could be injured or killed.Apply the brakes lightly whendescending a hill and use a lowgear to keep vehicle speed undercontrol.

If the vehicle stalls on a hill:

1. Apply the brakes to stop thevehicle, and then apply theparking brake.

2. Shift into P (Park) and thenrestart the engine.. If driving uphill when

the vehicle stalls, shift toR (Reverse), release theparking brake, and backstraight down.

. Never try to turn the vehiclearound. If the hill is steepenough to stall the vehicle,it is steep enough to causeit to roll over.

. If you cannot make it upthe hill, back straight downthe hill.

. Never back down a hill inN (Neutral) using only thebrake.



. The vehicle can rollbackward quickly andyou could lose control.

. If driving downhill whenthe vehicle stalls, shift toa lower gear, release theparking brake, and drivestraight down the hill.

3. If the vehicle cannot be restartedafter stalling, set the parkingbrake, shift an automatictransmission into P (Park),and turn the vehicle off.

3.1. Leave the vehicle andseek help.

3.2. Stay clear of the path thevehicle would take if itrolled downhill.

. Avoid turns that take the vehicleacross the incline of the hill.A hill that can be driven straightup or down might be too steep todrive across. Driving across anincline puts more weight on thedownhill wheels which couldcause a downhill slide or arollover.

. Surface conditions can be aproblem. Loose gravel, muddyspots, or even wet grass cancause the tires to slip sideways,downhill. If the vehicle slipssideways, it can hit somethingthat will trip it – a rock, a rut,etc. – and roll over.

. Hidden obstacles can make thesteepness of the incline moresevere. If a rock is driven acrosswith the uphill wheels, or if thedownhill wheels drop into a rutor depression, the vehicle cantilt even more.

. If an incline must be drivenacross, and the vehicle starts toslide, turn downhill. This shouldhelp straighten out the vehicleand prevent the side slipping.

{ WARNING

Getting out of the vehicle onthe downhill side when stoppedacross an incline is dangerous.If the vehicle rolls over, you couldbe crushed or killed. Always getout on the uphill side of thevehicle and stay well clear ofthe rollover path.



Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow,or Ice

Use a low gear when driving inmud – the deeper the mud, thelower the gear. Keep the vehiclemoving to avoid getting stuck.

Traction changes when drivingon sand. On loose sand, suchas on beaches or sand dunes,the tires tend to sink into the sand.This affects steering, accelerating,and braking. Drive at a reducedspeed and avoid sharp turns orabrupt maneuvers.

Traction is reduced on hard packedsnow and ice and it is easy tolose control. Reduce vehicle speedwhen driving on hard packed snowand ice.

{ WARNING

Driving on frozen lakes, ponds,or rivers can be dangerous.Ice conditions vary greatly andthe vehicle could fall through theice; you and your passengerscould drown. Drive your vehicleon safe surfaces only.

Driving in Water

{ WARNING

Driving through rushing water canbe dangerous. Deep water cansweep your vehicle downstreamand you and your passengerscould drown. If it is only shallowwater, it can still wash away theground from under your tires.Traction could be lost, and thevehicle could roll over. Do notdrive through rushing water.

Notice: Do not drive throughstanding water if it is deepenough to cover the wheel hubs,axles or exhaust pipe. Deep watercan damage the axle and othervehicle parts.

If the standing water is not too deep,drive slowly through it. At fasterspeeds, water splashes on theignition system and the vehicle canstall. Stalling can also occur if youget the exhaust pipe under water.While the exhaust pipe is underwater, you will not be able to startthe engine. When going throughwater, the brakes get wet, andit might take longer to stop.See Driving on Wet Roads onpage 9‑12.



After Off-Road Driving

Remove any brush or debris thathas collected on the underbodyor chassis, or under the hood.These accumulations can bea fire hazard.

After operation in mud or sand,have the brake linings cleaned andchecked. These substances cancause glazing and uneven braking.Check the body structure, steering,suspension, wheels, tires, andexhaust system for damage andcheck the fuel lines and coolingsystem for any leakage.

More frequent maintenanceservice is required. Refer tothe Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Driving on Wet RoadsRain and wet roads can reducevehicle traction and affect yourability to stop and accelerate.Always drive slower in these typesof driving conditions and avoiddriving through large puddles anddeep‐standing or flowing water.

{ WARNING

Wet brakes can cause crashes.They might not work as well ina quick stop and could causepulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

After driving through a largepuddle of water or a car/vehiclewash, lightly apply the brakepedal until the brakes worknormally.

Flowing or rushing water createsstrong forces. Driving throughflowing water could cause thevehicle to be carried away. If thishappens, you and other vehicleoccupants could drown. Do notignore police warnings and bevery cautious about trying todrive through flowing water.



Hydroplaning

Hydroplaning is dangerous. Watercan build up under the vehicle'stires so they actually ride on thewater. This can happen if the roadis wet enough and you are goingfast enough. When the vehicle ishydroplaning, it has little or nocontact with the road.

There is no hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is toslow down when the road is wet.

Other Rainy Weather Tips

Besides slowing down, other wetweather driving tips include:. Allow extra following distance.. Pass with caution.. Keep windshield wiping

equipment in good shape.. Keep the windshield washer fluid

reservoir filled.. Have good tires with proper

tread depth. See Tires onpage 10‑46.

. Turn off cruise control.

Highway HypnosisAlways be alert and pay attentionto your surroundings while driving.If you become tired or sleepy, finda safe place to park the vehicleand rest.

Other driving tips include:. Keep the vehicle well ventilated.. Keep the interior

temperature cool.. Keep your eyes moving — scan

the road ahead and to the sides.. Check the rearview mirror and

vehicle instruments often.



Hill and Mountain RoadsDriving on steep hills or throughmountains is different than drivingon flat or rolling terrain. Tips fordriving in these conditions include:. Keep the vehicle serviced and in

good shape.. Check all fluid levels and brakes,

tires, cooling system, andtransmission.

. Shift to a lower gear when goingdown steep or long hills.

{ WARNING

If you do not shift down, thebrakes could get so hot that theywould not work well. You wouldthen have poor braking or evennone going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engineassist the brakes on a steepdownhill slope.

{ WARNING

Coasting downhill in N (Neutral)or with the ignition off isdangerous. The brakes will haveto do all the work of slowingdown and they could get so hotthat they would not work well.You would then have poor brakingor even none going down a hill.You could crash. Always have theengine running and the vehicle ingear when going downhill.



. Stay in your own lane. Do notswing wide or cut across thecenter of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay inyour own lane.

. Be alert on top of hills,something could be in yourlane (stalled car, accident).

. Pay attention to special roadsigns (falling rocks area, windingroads, long grades, passing orno-passing zones) and takeappropriate action.

Winter Driving

Driving on Snow or Ice

Drive carefully when there issnow or ice between the tires andthe road, creating less traction orgrip. Wet ice can occur at about0°C (32°F) when freezing rainbegins to fall, resulting in evenless traction. Avoid driving on wetice or in freezing rain until roadscan be treated with salt or sand.

Drive with caution, whatever thecondition. Accelerate gently sotraction is not lost. Accelerating tooquickly causes the wheels to spinand makes the surface under thetires slick, so there is even lesstraction.

Try not to break the fragile traction.If you accelerate too fast, the drivewheels will spin and polish thesurface under the tires even more.

The Antilock Brake System (ABS)on page 9‑35 improves vehiclestability during hard stops onslippery roads, but apply the brakessooner than when on dry pavement.

Allow greater following distance onany slippery road and watch forslippery spots. Icy patches canoccur on otherwise clear roads inshaded areas. The surface of acurve or an overpass can remainicy when the surrounding roadsare clear. Avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers and braking whileon ice.

Turn off cruise control on slipperysurfaces.



Blizzard Conditions

Being stuck in snow can be aserious situation. Stay with thevehicle unless there is help nearby.If possible, use the RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10. To get help and keepeveryone in the vehicle safe:. Turn on the hazard warning

flashers.. Tie a red cloth to an outside

mirror.

{ WARNING

Snow can trap engine exhaustunder the vehicle. This maycause exhaust gases to getinside. Engine exhaust containsCarbon Monoxide (CO) whichcannot be seen or smelled. It cancause unconsciousness and evendeath.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

If the vehicle is stuck in the snow:. Clear away snow from aroundthe base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust pipe.

. Check again from time totime to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

. Open a window about 5 cm(2 in) on the side of thevehicle that is away fromthe wind to bring in fresh air.

. Fully open the air outletson or under the instrumentpanel.

. Adjust the climate controlsystem to a setting thatcirculates the air insidethe vehicle and set the fanspeed to the highest setting.See Climate Control Systemin the Index.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)


Snow can trap exhaust gasesunder your vehicle. This cancause deadly CO (CarbonMonoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you.You cannot see it or smell it, soyou might not know it is in yourvehicle. Clear away snow fromaround the base of your vehicle,especially any that is blockingthe exhaust.

Run the engine for short periodsonly as needed to keep warm,but be careful.



To save fuel, run the engine for onlyshort periods as needed to warmthe vehicle and then shut the engineoff and close the window most ofthe way to save heat. Repeat thisuntil help arrives but only when youfeel really uncomfortable from thecold. Moving about to keep warmalso helps.

If it takes some time for help toarrive, now and then when you runthe engine, push the acceleratorpedal slightly so the engineruns faster than the idle speed.This keeps the battery charged torestart the vehicle and to signal forhelp with the headlamps. Do thisas little as possible to save fuel.

If the Vehicle Is StuckSlowly and cautiously spin thewheels to free the vehicle whenstuck in sand, mud, ice, or snow.

If stuck too severely for the tractionsystem to free the vehicle, turn thetraction system off and use therocking method. See TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑37.

{ WARNING

If the vehicle's tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, andyou or others could be injured.The vehicle can overheat,causing an engine compartmentfire or other damage. Spin thewheels as little as possible andavoid going above 55 km/h(35 mph).

For information about using tirechains on the vehicle, see TireChains on page 10‑66.

Rocking the Vehicle to Getit Out

Turn the steering wheel left andright to clear the area around thefront wheels. Turn off any tractionsystem. Shift back and forthbetween R (Reverse) and a forwardgear, spinning the wheels as little aspossible. To prevent transmissionwear, wait until the wheels stopspinning before shifting gears.Release the accelerator pedalwhile shifting, and press lightly onthe accelerator pedal when thetransmission is in gear. Slowlyspinning the wheels in the forwardand reverse directions causes arocking motion that could free thevehicle. If that does not get thevehicle out after a few tries, it mightneed to be towed out. If the vehicledoes need to be towed out, seeTowing the Vehicle on page 10‑80.



Vehicle Load LimitsIt is very important to knowhow much weight the vehiclecan carry. This weight is calledthe vehicle capacity weightand includes the weight ofall occupants, cargo and allnonfactory‐installed options.Two labels on the vehicleshow how much weight itmay properly carry, the Tireand Loading Information labeland the Certification label.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicle anyheavier than the GrossVehicle Weight Rating(GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Tire and Loading InformationLabel

Label Example

A vehicle specific Tire andLoading Information labelis attached to the vehicle'scenter pillar (B-pillar). Withthe driver's door open, youwill find the label attachednear the door lock post.



The Tire and LoadingInformation label shows thenumber of occupant seatingpositions (A), and the maximumvehicle capacity weight (B) inkilograms and pounds.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label also showsthe tire size of the originalequipment tires (C) and therecommended cold tire inflationpressures (D). For moreinformation on tires and inflationsee Tires on page 10‑46 andTire Pressure on page 10‑53.

There is also important loadinginformation on the Certificationlabel. It tells you the GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the frontand rear axle. See “CertificationLabel” later in this section.

Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit

1. Locate the statement“The combined weight ofoccupants and cargo shouldnever exceed XXX kg orXXX lbs” on your vehicle'splacard.

2. Determine the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers that will beriding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combinedweight of the driver andpassengers from XXX kgor XXX lbs.

4. The resulting figure equalsthe available amount of cargoand luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX”amount equals 1400 lbsand there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle,the amount of available cargoand luggage load capacityis 650 lbs (1400 − 750(5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combinedweight of luggage and cargobeing loaded on the vehicle.That weight may not safelyexceed the available cargoand luggage load capacitycalculated in Step 4.



6. If your vehicle will be towinga trailer, the load from yourtrailer will be transferred toyour vehicle. Consult thismanual to determine how thisreduces the available cargoand luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle.

See Trailer Towing on page 9‑64for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safetyrules and trailering tips. Example 1

A. Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

B. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg(150 lbs) × 2 = 136 kg(300 lbs).

C. Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 317 kg(700 lbs).

Example 2


B. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 68 kg(150 lbs) × 5 = 340 kg(750 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 113 kg (250 lbs).



Example 3


B. Subtract OccupantWeight @ 91 kg(200 lbs) × 5 = 453 kg(1,000 lbs).

C. Available CargoWeight = 0 kg (0 lbs).

Refer to the vehicle's Tire andLoading Information label forspecific information about thevehicle's capacity weight andseating positions. The combinedweight of the driver, passengers,and cargo should never exceedthe vehicle's capacity weight.

Certification Label

Label Example

A vehicle-specific Certificationlabel is attached to the lowercenter pillar on the driver side of

the vehicle or on the rear edgeof the driver door. The labelshows the size of the vehicle'soriginal tires and the inflationpressures needed to obtain thegross weight capacity of thevehicle. This is called GrossVehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).The GVWR includes the weightof the vehicle, all occupants,fuel, and cargo.

The Certification/Tire label alsotells you the maximum weightsfor the front and rear axles,called Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR). To find out theactual loads on the front andrear axles, you need to go toa weigh station and weigh thevehicle. Your dealer can helpyou with this. Be sure to spreadout the load equally on bothsides of the center line.



Never exceed the GVWR for thevehicle, or the GAWR for eitherthe front or rear axle.

If the vehicle is carrying aheavy load, it should be spreadout. See “Steps for DeterminingCorrect Load Limit” earlier in thissection.

{ WARNING

Do not load the vehicleany heavier than theGross Vehicle WeightRating (GVWR), or either themaximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR).This can cause systems tobreak and change the way thevehicle handles. This couldcause loss of control and acrash. Overloading can alsoshorten the life of the vehicle.

Your warranty does not coverparts or components that failbecause of overloading.

The label will help you decidehow much cargo and installedequipment your vehicle cancarry.

Using heavier suspensioncomponents to get addeddurability might not change yourweight ratings. Ask your dealerto help you load your vehiclethe right way.

If you put things inside yourvehicle – like suitcases,tools, packages, or anythingelse – they will go as fast asthe vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if thereis a crash, they will keep going.

{ WARNING

Things inside the vehicle canstrike and injure people in asudden stop or turn, or in acrash.

. Put things in the cargoarea of the vehicle. In thecargo area, put them asfar forward as possible.Try to spread the weightevenly.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. Never stack heavierthings, like suitcases,inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are abovethe tops of the seats.

. Do not leave anunsecured childrestraint in the vehicle.

. Secure loose items in thevehicle.

. Do not leave a seat foldeddown unless needed.

Starting andOperating

New Vehicle Break-InNotice: The vehicle does notneed an elaborate break-in. But itwill perform better in the long runif you follow these guidelines:. Do not drive at any oneconstant speed, fast or slow,for the first 805 km (500mi).Do not make full-throttlestarts. Avoid downshiftingto brake or slow the vehicle.

. During the first 1 000 km(600mi), avoid using morethan moderate accelerationin lower gears and avoidvehicle speeds above110 km/h (68mph).

. Between the first1 000 km (600mi) and5 000 km (3,000 mi), heavyacceleration in lower gears

can be used. Vehicle speedsabove 110 km/h (68mph)should be limited tofive minutes per use.

. Avoid making hard stopsfor the first 322 km (200mi)or so. During this time thenew brake linings are notyet broken in. Hard stopswith new linings can meanpremature wear and earlierreplacement. Follow thisbreaking-in guideline everytime you get new brakelinings.

. Do not tow a trailer duringbreak-in. See DrivingCharacteristics and TowingTips on page 9‑60 for thetrailer towing capabilitiesof your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break‐in, enginespeed and load can be graduallyincreased.



Ignition Positions

The ignition switch has four differentpositions.

Notice: Using a tool to force thekey to turn in the ignition couldcause damage to the switch orbreak the key. Use the correctkey, make sure it is all the way in,and turn it only with your hand.If the key cannot be turned byhand, see your dealer.

The key must be fully extended tostart the vehicle.

To shift out of P (Park), turn theignition to ON/RUN and apply thebrake pedal.

A (STOPPING THE ENGINE/LOCK/OFF): When the vehicle isstopped, turn the ignition switch toLOCK/OFF to turn the engine off.Retained Accessory Power (RAP)will remain active. See RetainedAccessory Power (RAP) onpage 9‑28.

This is the only position from whichthe key can be removed. This locksthe steering wheel, ignition andautomatic transmission.

Do not turn the engine off when thevehicle is moving. This will causea loss of power assist in the brakeand steering systems and disablethe airbags.

If the vehicle must be shut off in anemergency:

1. Brake using a firm and steadypressure. Do not pump thebrakes repeatedly. This maydeplete power assist, requiringincreased brake pedal force.

2. Shift the vehicle to N (Neutral).This can be done while thevehicle is moving. After shiftingto N (Neutral), firmly apply thebrakes and steer the vehicleto a safe location.

3. Come to a complete stop, shiftto P (Park), and turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF. On vehicles withan automatic transmission, theshift lever must be in P (Park)to turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK/OFF position.

4. Set the parking brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.



{ WARNING

Turning off the vehicle whilemoving may cause loss of powerassist in the brake and steeringsystems and disable the airbags.While driving, only shut thevehicle off in an emergency.

If the vehicle cannot be pulledover, and must be shut offwhile driving, turn the ignitionto ACC/ACCESSORY.

The ignition switch can bind in theLOCK/OFF position with the wheelsturned off center. If this happens,move the steering wheel fromright to left while turning the keyto ACC/ACCESSORY. If this doesnot work, then the vehicle needsservice.

B (ACC/ACCESSORY): Thisposition provides power to someof the electrical accessories.It unlocks the steering wheel andignition. To move the key fromACC/ACCESSORY to LOCK/OFF,push in the key and then turn it toLOCK/OFF.

C (ON/RUN): The ignitionswitch stays in this positionwhen the engine is running.This position can be used tooperate the electrical accessories,including the ventilation fan and12‐volt power outlets, as well as todisplay some warning and indicatorlights. This position can also beused for service and diagnostics,and to verify the proper operationof the malfunction indicatorlamp as may be required foremission inspection purposes.The transmission is also unlockedin this position on automatictransmission vehicles.

The battery could be drained if thekey is left in the ACC/ACCESSORYor ON/RUN position with the engineoff. The vehicle might not start if thebattery is allowed to drain for anextended period of time.

D (START): This position startsthe engine. When the engine starts,release the key. The ignition switchwill return to ON/RUN for normaldriving.

A warning tone sounds when thedriver door is opened if the ignitionis still in ACC/ACCESSORY and thekey is in the ignition.



Key Lock Release

Vehicles with an automatictransmission are equipped with anelectronic key lock release system.The key lock release is designed toprevent ignition key removal unlessthe shift lever is in P (Park).

The key lock release is alwaysfunctional except in the case of anuncharged or low voltage (less than9‐volt) battery. If the vehicle has anuncharged battery or a battery withlow voltage, try charging or jumpstarting the battery. See JumpStarting on page 10‑76.

If charging or jump starting thebattery does not work, locate thehole below the ignition lock. Inserta flat bladed tool or another keyfrom the key chain into the opening.When the lever can be felt, actuatethe lever toward the driver, andremove the key from the ignition.

Starting the EngineMove the shift lever to P (Park) orN (Neutral). The engine will not startin any other position. To restart thevehicle when it is already moving,use N (Neutral) only.

Notice: Do not try to shift toP (Park) if the vehicle is moving.If you do, you could damage thetransmission. Shift to P (Park)only when the vehicle is stopped.

Starting Procedure

1. With your foot off theaccelerator pedal, turn theignition key to START. When theengine starts, let go of the key.The idle speed will go down asthe engine warms. Do not racethe engine immediately afterstarting it. Operate the engineand transmission gently to allowthe oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.



The vehicle has aComputer-ControlledCranking System. This featureassists in starting the engineand protects components.If the ignition key is turned tothe START position, and thenreleased when the enginebegins cranking, the enginewill continue cranking for a fewseconds or until the vehiclestarts. If the engine does notstart and the key is held inSTART for many seconds,cranking will be stopped after15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To preventgear damage, this system alsoprevents cranking if the engineis already running. Enginecranking can be stopped byturning the ignition switchto ACC/ACCESSORY orLOCK/OFF.

Notice: Cranking the engine forlong periods of time, by returningthe key to the START positionimmediately after cranking hasended, can overheat and damagethe cranking motor, and drain thebattery. Wait at least 15 secondsbetween each try, to let thecranking motor cool down.

2. If the engine does not start after5 to 10 seconds, especially invery cold weather (below −18°Cor 0°F), it could be flooded withtoo much gasoline. Push theaccelerator pedal all the wayto the floor and hold it there asyou hold the key in START for amaximum of 15 seconds. Wait atleast 15 seconds between eachtry, to allow the cranking motorto cool. When the engine starts,let go of the key and accelerator.

If the vehicle starts briefly butthen stops again, repeat theprocedure. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do notrace the engine immediatelyafter starting it. Operate theengine and transmission gentlyuntil the oil warms up andlubricates all moving parts.

Notice: The engine is designedto work with the electronics inthe vehicle. If you add electricalparts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engineoperates. Before adding electricalequipment, check with yourdealer. If you do not, the enginemight not perform properly. Anyresulting damage would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.



Retained AccessoryPower (RAP)These vehicle accessories can beused for up to 10 minutes after theengine is turned off:. Audio System. Power Windows. Sunroof (if equipped)

Power to the audio system willcontinue to operate for up to10 minutes or until the driverdoor is opened.

Power to the power windows andsunroof will continue to operate forup to 10 minutes or until any dooris opened.

All these features will workwhen the key is in ON/RUN orACC/ACCESSORY.

Engine Coolant HeaterThe engine coolant heater,if available, can help in cold weatherconditions at or below −18°C (0°F)for easier starting and better fueleconomy during engine warm-up.Plug in the coolant heater at leastfour hours before starting thevehicle. An internal thermostat inthe plug-end of the cord will preventengine coolant heater operation attemperatures above −18°C (0°F).

To Use The Engine CoolantHeater

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap theelectrical cord.

The electrical cord is located onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment, in front of the aircleaner.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded110-volt AC outlet.

{ WARNING

Plugging the cord into anungrounded outlet could causean electrical shock. Also, thewrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire.You could be seriously injured.Plug the cord into a properlygrounded three-prong 110-volt ACoutlet. If the cord will not reach,use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, besure to unplug and store thecord as it was before to keepit away from moving engineparts. If you do not it couldbe damaged.

The length of time the heater shouldremain plugged in depends onseveral factors. Ask a dealer in thearea where you will be parking thevehicle for the best advice on this.



Shifting Into Park

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get out ofthe vehicle if the shift lever is notfully in P (Park) with the parkingbrake firmly set. The vehicle canroll. If you have left the enginerunning, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure the vehicle willnot move, even when you are onfairly level ground, use the stepsthat follow. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑60.

Use this procedure to shift intoP (Park):

1. Hold the brake pedal down andset the parking brake.

See Parking Brake on page 9‑36for more information.

2. Hold the button on the shift leverand push the lever toward thefront of the vehicle into P (Park).

3. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

4. Remove the key.

Leaving the Vehicle With theEngine Running

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to leave thevehicle with the engine running.The vehicle could move suddenlyif the shift lever is not fully inP (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running,it could overheat and even catchfire. You or others could beinjured. Do not leave the vehiclewith the engine running.

If you have to leave the vehiclewith the engine running, the vehiclemust be in P (Park) and the parkingbrake set.

Release the button and check thatthe shift lever cannot be moved outof P (Park).

Torque Lock

Torque lock is when the weightof the vehicle puts too muchforce on the parking pawl in thetransmission. This happens whenparking on a hill and shifting thetransmission into P (Park) is notdone properly and then it is difficultto shift out of P (Park). To preventtorque lock, set the parking brakeand then shift into P (Park). To findout how, see “Shifting Into Park”listed previously.

If torque lock does occur, thevehicle may need to be pusheduphill by another vehicle to relievethe parking pawl pressure, so youcan shift out of P (Park).



Shifting out of ParkTo shift out of P (Park):

1. Apply the brake pedal.

2. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN.

3. Press the shift lever button.

4. Move the shift lever.

If you still are unable to shift out ofP (Park):

1. Fully release the shift leverbutton.

2. Hold the brake pedal down andpress the shift lever buttonagain.

3. Move the shift lever.

If you still cannot move the shiftlever from P (Park), see your dealerfor service.

Parking over ThingsThat Burn

{ WARNING

Things that can burn could touchhot exhaust parts under thevehicle and ignite. Do not parkover papers, leaves, dry grass,or other things that can burn.

Engine Exhaust

{ WARNING

Engine exhaust contains carbonmonoxide (CO) which cannot beseen or smelled. Exposure to COcan cause unconsciousness andeven death.

Exhaust may enter the vehicle if:. The vehicle idles in areaswith poor ventilation (parkinggarages, tunnels, deep snowthat may block underbodyairflow or tail pipes).

. The exhaust smells orsounds strange or different.

. The exhaust system leaksdue to corrosion or damage.

. The vehicle exhaust systemhas been modified, damagedor improperly repaired.

(Continued)



WARNING (Continued)

. There are holes or openingsin the vehicle body fromdamage or aftermarketmodifications that are notcompletely sealed.

If unusual fumes are detected orif it is suspected that exhaust iscoming into the vehicle:

. Drive it only with the windowscompletely down.

. Have the vehicle repairedimmediately.

Never park the vehicle with theengine running in an enclosedarea such as a garage or abuilding that has no fresh airventilation.

Running the VehicleWhile ParkedIt is better not to park with theengine running. But if you ever haveto, here are some things to know.

{ WARNING

Idling a vehicle in an enclosedarea with poor ventilation isdangerous. Engine exhaust mayenter the vehicle. Engine exhaustcontains Carbon Monoxide (CO)which cannot be seen or smelled.It can cause unconsciousnessand even death. Never run theengine in an enclosed areathat has no fresh air ventilation.For more information, see EngineExhaust on page 9‑30.

{ WARNING

It can be dangerous to get outof the vehicle if the automatictransmission shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).

Follow the proper steps tobe sure the vehicle will notmove. See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑29.

If parking on a hill and pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑60.



AutomaticTransmission

The automatic transmission shiftlever is located on the consolebetween the seats.

P (Park): This position locks thefront wheels. Use P (Park) whenstarting the engine because thevehicle cannot move easily.

{ WARNING

It is dangerous to get out of thevehicle if the shift lever is not fullyin P (Park) with the parking brakefirmly set. The vehicle can roll.

Do not leave the vehicle whenthe engine is running unlessyou have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or otherscould be injured. To be sure thevehicle will not move, even whenyou are on fairly level ground,always set the parking brake andmove the shift lever to P (Park).See Shifting Into Park onpage 9‑29. If you are pulling atrailer, see Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips on page 9‑60.

The vehicle has an automatictransmission shift lock controlsystem. You must fully apply the

regular brake first and then pressthe shift lever button before shiftingfrom P (Park) when the ignition keyis in ON/RUN. If you cannot shift outof P (Park), ease pressure on theshift lever, then push the shift leverall the way into P (Park) as youmaintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button andmove the shift lever into anothergear. See Shifting out of Park onpage 9‑30.

R (Reverse): Use this gear toback up.

Notice: Shifting to R (Reverse)while the vehicle is movingforward could damage thetransmission. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Shift to R (Reverse)only after the vehicle is stopped.

To rock the vehicle back and forth toget out of snow, ice or sand withoutdamaging the transmission, see Ifthe Vehicle Is Stuck on page 9‑17.



N (Neutral): In this position theengine and transmission do notconnect. Use N (Neutral) to restarta vehicle that is already moving.

{ WARNING

Shifting into a drive gear while theengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot isfirmly on the brake pedal, thevehicle could move very rapidly.You could lose control and hitpeople or objects. Do not shiftinto a drive gear while the engineis running at high speed.

Notice: Shifting out of P (Park)or N (Neutral) with the enginerunning at high speed maydamage the transmission.The repairs would not be coveredby the vehicle warranty. Be surethe engine is not running at highspeed when shifting the vehicle.

D (Drive): This position is fornormal driving. It provides the bestfuel economy. If you need morepower for passing, and you are:. Going less than 56 km/h

(35 mph), push the acceleratorpedal about halfway down.

. Going about 56 km/h (35 mph) ormore, push the accelerator allthe way down.

Notice: If the vehicle seems toaccelerate slowly or not shiftgears when you go faster, andyou continue to drive the vehiclethat way, you could damage thetransmission. Have the vehicleserviced right away.

M (Manual Mode): Allows thedriver to select the range of gearpositions. See Manual Mode onpage 9‑33.

Manual Mode

Electronic RangeSelect (ERS) Mode

ERS or manual mode allows forthe selection of the range of gearpositions. Use this mode whendriving downhill or towing a trailer tolimit the top gear and vehicle speed.The shift position indicator withinthe Driver Information Center (DIC)will display a number next to the Mindicating the highest available gearunder manual mode and the drivingconditions when manual mode wasselected.

To use this feature:

1. Move the shift lever toM (Manual Mode).

2. Press the plus/minus buttonon the shift lever, to increaseor decrease the gear rangeavailable.



When shifting to M (Manual Mode),the transmission will shift to a presetlower gear range. For this presetrange, the highest gear available isdisplayed next to the M in the DIC.See Driver Information Center (DIC)on page 5‑23 for more information.All gears below that number areavailable to use. For example, when4 (Fourth) is shown next to the M,1 (First) through 4 (Fourth) gearsare shifted automatically. To shiftto 5 (Fifth) gear, press the + (Plus)button or shift into D (Drive).

M (Manual Mode) will preventshifting to a lower gear range if theengine speed is too high. If vehiclespeed is not reduced within the timeallowed, the lower gear range shiftwill not be completed. Slow thevehicle, then press the − (Minus)button to the desired lower gearrange.

While using the ERS, cruise controlcan be used.

Fuel Economy ModeVehicles with a 2.4L enginehave a Fuel Economy Mode.When engaged, fuel economymode can improve the vehicle'sfuel economy.

Press the “eco” (economy) buttonby the shift lever to turn this featureon or off. The “eco” light in theinstrument cluster will comeon when engaged. See FuelEconomy Light on page 5‑21.

A Driver Information Center (DIC)message “ECO MODE ON” isalso displayed. See Fuel SystemMessages on page 5‑29 for moreinformation.

When Fuel Economy Mode is on:. The transmission will upshift

sooner and downshift later.. The torque converter clutch will

apply sooner and stay on longer.. The gas pedal will be less

sensitive.. The vehicle's computer will more

aggressively shut off fuel to theengine under deceleration.

. The engine idle speed will belower.

. Driving performance is moreconservative.



Drive Systems

All-Wheel DriveVehicles with this feature alwayssend engine power to all fourwheels. It is fully automatic,and adjusts itself as neededfor road conditions.

When using a compact sparetire on an AWD vehicle, thesystem automatically detects thecompact spare and disables AWD.To restore AWD operation andprevent excessive wear on thesystem, replace the compact sparewith a full-size tire as soon aspossible. See Compact Spare Tireon page 10‑75 for more information.

Brakes

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS)This vehicle has the AntilockBrake System (ABS), an advancedelectronic braking system that helpsprevent a braking skid.

When the engine is started and thevehicle begins to drive away, ABSchecks itself. A momentary motor orclicking noise might be heard whilethis test is going on, and it mighteven be noticed that the brakepedal moves a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, thiswarning light stays on. See AntilockBrake System (ABS) Warning Lighton page 5‑17.

If driving safely on a wet roadand it becomes necessary toslam on the brakes and continuebraking to avoid a sudden obstacle,a computer senses that the wheelsare slowing down. If one of thewheels is about to stop rolling,the computer will separately workthe brakes at each wheel.

ABS can change the brake pressureto each wheel, as required, fasterthan any driver could. This can helpthe driver steer around the obstaclewhile braking hard.

As the brakes are applied, thecomputer keeps receiving updateson wheel speed and controlsbraking pressure accordingly.

Remember: ABS does not changethe time needed to get a foot upto the brake pedal or alwaysdecrease stopping distance.



If you get too close to the vehiclein front of you, there will not beenough time to apply the brakesif that vehicle suddenly slows orstops. Always leave enough roomup ahead to stop, even with ABS.

Using ABS

Do not pump the brakes. Just holdthe brake pedal down firmly and letABS work. You might hear the ABSpump or motor operating and feelthe brake pedal pulsate, but this isnormal.

Braking in Emergencies

ABS allows the driver to steer andbrake at the same time. In manyemergencies, steering can helpmore than even the very bestbraking.

Parking Brake

To set the parking brake, hold theregular brake pedal down, thenpush the parking brake pedal down.

If the ignition is on, the brakesystem warning light will come on.See Brake System Warning Light onpage 5‑16.

Notice: Driving with the parkingbrake on can overheat the brakesystem and cause prematurewear or damage to brake systemparts. Make sure that the parkingbrake is fully released and thebrake warning light is off beforedriving.

To release the parking brake, holdthe regular brake pedal down, thenpush down momentarily on theparking brake pedal until you feelthe pedal release. Slowly pull yourfoot up off the park brake pedal.If the parking brake is not releasedwhen you begin to drive, the brakesystem warning light will be on anda chime will sound warning you thatthe parking brake is still on.

If you are towing a trailer andare parking on a hill, see DrivingCharacteristics and Towing Tips onpage 9‑60.



Brake AssistThis vehicle has a brake assistfeature designed to assist thedriver in stopping or decreasingvehicle speed in emergency drivingconditions. This feature uses thestability system hydraulic brakecontrol module to supplementthe power brake system underconditions where the driver hasquickly and forcefully applied thebrake pedal in an attempt to quicklystop or slow down the vehicle.The stability system hydraulic brakecontrol module increases brakepressure at each corner of thevehicle until the ABS activates.Minor brake pedal pulsation orpedal movement during this timeis normal and the driver shouldcontinue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.The brake assist feature willautomatically disengage whenthe brake pedal is released orbrake pedal pressure is quicklydecreased.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)This vehicle has a Hill Start Assist(HSA) feature, which may be usefulwhen the vehicle is stopped on agrade. This feature is designed toprevent the vehicle from rolling,either forward or rearward, duringvehicle drive off. After the drivercompletely stops and holds thevehicle in a complete standstill ona grade, HSA will be automaticallyactivated. During the transitionperiod between when the driverreleases the brake pedal and startsto accelerate to drive off on a grade,HSA holds the braking pressureto ensure that there is no rolling.The brakes will automaticallyrelease when the accelerator pedalis applied within the two‐secondwindow. It will not activate if thevehicle is in a drive gear and facingdownhill or if the vehicle is facinguphill and in R (Reverse).

Ride Control Systems

Traction ControlSystem (TCS)The vehicle has a Traction ControlSystem (TCS) that limits wheel spin.On a front-wheel-drive vehicle, thesystem operates if it senses thatone or both of the front wheelsare spinning or beginning to losetraction. On an All-Wheel-Drive(AWD) vehicle, the system willoperate if it senses that any of thewheels are spinning or beginning tolose traction. When this happens,the system brakes the spinningwheel(s) and/or reduces enginepower to limit wheel spin.

The system may be heard or feltwhile it is working, but this isnormal.



TCS is on whenever the vehicleis started. To limit wheel spin,especially in slippery roadconditions, the system shouldalways be left on. But, TCScan be turned off if needed.

d flashes to indicate that thetraction control system is active.

If there is a problem detectedwith TCS, SERVICE TRACTIONCONTROL and SERVICESTABILITRAK may be displayed onthe Driver Information Center (DIC)and d will be on. See Ride ControlSystem Messages on page 5‑30.When this message is displayedand d comes on and stays on,the vehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.

Notice: Do not repeatedly brakeor accelerate heavily when TCS isoff. The vehicle's driveline couldbe damaged.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

A chime may also sound when thelight comes on steady.



The g is located on the console.

The TCS off light comes on andTRACTION CONTROL OFF isdisplayed on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) to indicate that thetraction control system has beenturned off. See Ride Control SystemMessages on page 5‑30.

TCS can be turned off by pressingand releasing g. When TCS is

turned off, i comes on and thesystem will not limit wheel spin.Driving should be adjustedaccordingly. Press and release gagain to turn the system back on.

When TCS is turned off on AWDvehicles, the system may still makenoise. This is normal and necessarywith AWD hardware.

It may be necessary to turn thesystem off if the vehicle ever getsstuck in sand, mud, or snow androcking the vehicle is required.See If the Vehicle Is Stuck onpage 9‑17 for more information.See also Winter Driving onpage 9‑15 for information onusing TCS when driving insnowy or icy conditions.

If cruise control is being used whenTCS activates, cruise control willautomatically disengage. Press thecruise control button to re‐engagewhen road conditions allow.See Cruise Control on page 9‑41.

Adding non‐GM accessories canaffect the vehicle's performance.See Accessories and Modificationson page 10‑3 for more information.

StabiliTrak® SystemThe vehicle has a vehicle stabilityenhancement system calledStabiliTrak. It is an advancedcomputer controlled system thatassists with directional control of thevehicle in difficult driving conditions.

StabiliTrak activates when thecomputer senses a differencebetween the intended path and thedirection the vehicle is actuallytraveling. StabiliTrak selectivelyapplies braking pressure to thevehicle's brakes to help steer thevehicle in the intended direction.

StabiliTrak is on automaticallywhenever the vehicle is started.To assist with directional controlof the vehicle, the systemshould always be left on. TrailerSway Control (TSC) is also onautomatically when the vehicle isstarted. See Trailer Sway Control(TSC) on page 9‑67 for moreinformation.



When the stability control systemactivates, the Traction ControlSystem (TCS)/StabiliTrak lightwill flash on the instrument panel.This also occurs when tractioncontrol or TSC is activated.A noise may be heard or vibrationmay be felt in the brake pedal.This is normal. Continue to steerthe vehicle in the intended direction.

If there is a problem detectedwith StabiliTrak, SERVICESTABILITRAK is displayed on theDriver Information Center (DIC)and d will stay on. See VehicleMessages on page 5‑26.

When this message is displayedand/or d comes on and stays on,the vehicle is safe to drive but thesystem is not operational. Drivingshould be adjusted accordingly.See Ride Control System Messageson page 5‑30.

If d comes on and stays on, resetthe system by:

1. Stopping the vehicle.

2. Turning the engine off andwaiting 15 seconds.

3. Starting the engine.

If d still comes on and stays on at aspeed above 20 km/h (13 mph), seeyour dealer for service.

g is located on the console.

Both StabiliTrak and TractionControl can be turned off if neededby pressing and holding g until gand i come on the instrumentpanel. This will also disable the TSCfeature. When StabiliTrak is turnedoff, the system will not assist withdirectional control of the vehicle orlimit wheel spin. Driving should beadjusted accordingly. Press andrelease g again to turn the systemback on.

If cruise control is being used whenStabiliTrak activates, the cruisecontrol will automatically disengage.Press the cruise control button tore‐engage when road conditionsallow. See Cruise Control onpage 9‑41 for more information.



Cruise ControlWith cruise control, the vehicle canmaintain a speed of about 40 km/h(25 mph) or more without keepingyour foot on the accelerator. Cruisecontrol does not work at speedsbelow 40 km/h (25 mph).

If the brakes are applied, the cruisecontrol is disengaged.

If the vehicle has the StabiliTrak®

system and begins to limit wheelspin while using cruise control,the cruise control automaticallydisengages. See StabiliTrak®

System on page 9‑39 or TractionControl System (TCS) onpage 9‑37. When road conditionsallow you to safely use it again,the cruise control can be turnedback on.

{ WARNING

Cruise control can be dangerouswhere you cannot drive safely ata steady speed. So, do not usethe cruise control on windingroads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerouson slippery roads. On such roads,fast changes in tire traction cancause excessive wheel slip, andyou could lose control. Do not usecruise control on slippery roads. ON/OFF5 CRUISE: Press to turn

the cruise control system on and off.

* CANCEL: Press to disengagecruise control without erasing theset speed from memory.



RES/+ (Resume/Accel): Move thethumbwheel up toward RES/+ tomake the vehicle resume to apreviously set speed or toaccelerate.

SET/− (Set/Coast): Move thethumbwheel down toward SET/- toset a speed and activate cruisecontrol, or to make the vehicledecelerate.

Setting Cruise Control

If the cruise button is on when not inuse, it could get bumped and go intocruise when not desired. Keep thecruise button turned off when cruisecontrol is not being used.

1. Press ON/OFF 5 CRUISE.

2. Get to the speed desired.

3. Press the thumbwheel andrelease it. The desired set speedbriefly appears in the DriverInformation Center (DIC) display.

4. Take your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

Resuming a Set Speed

If the cruise control is set at adesired speed and then the brakesare applied, the cruise control isdisengaged without erasing theset speed from memory.

Once the vehicle reaches about40 km/h (25 mph) or more, movethe thumbwheel up toward RES/+briefly. The vehicle returns to theprevious set speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel up

toward RES/+ and hold ituntil the vehicle accelerates tothe desired speed, and thenrelease it.

. To increase the speed in smallamounts, move the thumbwheelup toward RES/+ briefly andthen release it. Each time thisis done, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) faster.

Reducing Speed While UsingCruise Control

If the cruise control system isalready activated,. Move the thumbwheel toward

SET/− and hold until the desiredlower speed is reached, thenrelease it.

. To slow down in small amounts,move the thumbwheel towardSET/− briefly. Each time this isdone, the vehicle goes about1.6 km/h (1 mph) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle WhileUsing Cruise Control

Use the accelerator pedal toincrease the vehicle speed.When you take your foot off thepedal, the vehicle will slow downto the previous set cruise speed.



Using Cruise Control on Hills

How well the cruise control workson hills depends upon the vehiclespeed, load, and the steepnessof the hills. When going up steephills, you might have to step onthe accelerator pedal to maintainthe vehicle speed. When goingdownhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to maintain thevehicle's speed. When the brakesare applied the cruise control isdisengaged.

Ending Cruise Control

There are three ways to end cruisecontrol:. To disengage cruise control;

step lightly on the brake pedalor clutch, the indicator light willgo off.

. Press* CANCEL.

. To turn off the cruise control,press ON/OFF 5 CRUISE.The cruise control cannot beresumed.

Erasing Speed Memory

The cruise control set speedis erased from memory ifON/OFF5 CRUISE is pressedor if the vehicle is turned off.

Object DetectionSystems

Forward CollisionAlert (FCA) SystemFor vehicles with this feature, readthe following section before using it.

The Forward Collision Alert (FCA)system may help to avoid or reducethe harm caused by front-endcrashes. FCA provides a flashingvisual alert and beeps whenapproaching a vehicle directlyahead too quickly. FCA alsoprovides a visual alert if followinganother vehicle much too closely.The FCA symbol is on top of theinstrument panel to the right ofthe steering wheel.



The forward-looking FCA camerasensor is on the windshield aheadof the rearview mirror. FCA detectsvehicles within a distance ofapproximately 60 m (197 ft) andoperates at speeds above 40 km/h(25 mph).

{ WARNING

FCA is a warning system anddoes not apply the brakes. Whenapproaching a slower-moving orstopped vehicle ahead too rapidly,or when following a vehicle tooclosely, FCA may not provideenough time to avoid a crash.FCA does not warn of any objectsthat do not look like a vehicle to

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

the FCA camera sensor, suchas pedestrians, animals, signs,guardrails, bridges, constructionbarrels, or other objects. Be readyto take action and apply thebrakes. For more information,see Defensive Driving onpage 9‑3.

{ WARNING

There are conditions where FCAmay not detect a vehicle ahead.These include winding roadsor weather conditions such asfog, rain, or snow that can limitvisibility. You could crash into avehicle ahead. Do not rely onFCA on winding roads or in poorvisibility conditions.

Collision Alert

When your vehicle approachesanother vehicle too rapidly, the redFCA display will flash and soundseveral beeps. When this occurs,the brake system prepares fordriver braking to occur more rapidly.Continue to apply the brake pedalas the driving situation dictates.

Tailgating Alert

The red FCA display will staycontinuously illuminated if thevehicle ahead remains muchtoo close.



Selecting the Alert Timing

The Collision Alert control is on thesteering wheel. Press COLLISIONALERT to set the alert timing to far,medium, near or off. The first buttonpress shows the current controlsetting on the DIC. Additional buttonpresses will change this setting.The chosen setting will remain untilit is changed and will affect both theCollision Alert and the TailgatingAlert features. The timing of bothalerts will vary based on vehicle

speed. The faster the vehicle speed,the further away the alert will occur.Consider traffic and weatherconditions when selecting the alerttiming. The range of selectable alerttiming may not be appropriate for alldrivers and driving conditions.

Detecting the Vehicle Ahead

The green vehicle ahead indicatorwill appear when a vehicle isdetected ahead. Whenever thisindicator does not appear, FCAwill not respond. The indicatormay disappear on curves, highwayexit ramps, or hills, or due to poorvisibility. The FCA system will notdetect another vehicle ahead untilit is completely in the driving lane.

{ WARNING

If the FCA camera sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice,or if the windshield is damaged,it may not detect a vehicle ahead.FCA may not help avoid acollision under these conditions.Do not rely on FCA when thecamera is blocked by snow, ice,or dirt. Keep the windshield clean.

{ WARNING

If the headlamps are not cleanedor properly aimed, the FCAsystem may not detect a vehicleahead. FCA may not help avoid acollision under these conditions.Keep the headlamps clean andproperly aimed.



Unnecessary Alerts

FCA may sometimes setunnecessary alerts to turningvehicles, vehicles in other lanes,objects that are not vehicles,or shadows. These alerts arenormal operation and the vehicledoes not need service.

Other Messages

There are messages that mayappear on the Driver InformationCenter (DIC) in the instrumentcluster to provide information aboutFCA. See Object Detection SystemMessages on page 5‑29.

Cleaning the System

If the FCA system does not seem tooperate properly, clean the outsideof the windshield area in front of thecamera sensor before consideringtaking the vehicle in for service.

Ultrasonic Parking AssistFor vehicles with the UltrasonicRear Parking Assist (URPA) system,it assists the driver with parkingand avoiding objects while inR (Reverse). URPA operates atspeeds less than 8 km/h (5 mph),and the sensors on the rear bumperdetect objects up to 2.5 m (8 ft)behind the vehicle, and at least20 cm (8 in) off the ground.

{ WARNING

The URPA system does notdetect pedestrians, bicyclists,animals, or any other objectslocated below the bumper or thatare too close or too far from thevehicle. To prevent injury, death,or vehicle damage, even withURPA, always check behind thevehicle and check all mirrorsbefore backing.

How the System Works

URPA comes on automaticallywhen the shift lever is moved intoR (Reverse). A single tone soundsto indicate the system is working.

URPA operates only at speeds lessthan 8 km/h (5 mph).

An obstacle is indicated by audiblebeeps. The interval between thebeeps becomes shorter as thevehicle gets closer to the obstacle.When the distance is less than30 cm (12 in) the beeping is acontinuous tone for five seconds.

To be detected, objects must be atleast 20 cm (8 in) off the ground andbelow liftgate level. Objects mustalso be within 2.5 m (8 ft) from therear bumper. The distance objectscan be detected may be less duringwarmer or humid weather.



Turning the System On and Off

The URPA system can be turnedon and off using the infotainmentsystem controls. See VehiclePersonalization on page 5‑33for more information.

When the system is off, PARKASSIST OFF displays on theDriver Information Center (DIC).The message disappears after ashort period of time.

URPA defaults to the on settingeach time the vehicle is started.

When the System Does NotSeem to Work Properly

The following messages may bedisplayed on the DIC:

SERVICE PARKING ASSIST: Ifthis message occurs, take thevehicle to your dealer to repair thesystem.

PARK ASSIST OFF: If the URPAsystem does not activate due to atemporary condition, the messagedisplays on the DIC. This can occurunder the following conditions:. The driver has disabled the

system.. The ultrasonic sensors are not

clean. Keep the vehicle's rearbumper free of mud, dirt, snow,ice, and slush. For cleaninginstructions, see Exterior Careon page 10‑83.

. The park assist sensors arecovered by frost or ice. Frost orice can form around and behindthe sensors and may not alwaysbe seen; this can occur afterwashing the vehicle in coldweather. The message may notclear until the frost or ice hasmelted.

. A trailer was attached tothe vehicle, or an object washanging out of the liftgate duringthe last drive cycle. Once theobject is removed, URPA willreturn to normal operation.

. A tow bar is attached to thevehicle.

. The bumper is damaged.Take the vehicle to your dealerto repair the system.

. Other conditions, such asvibrations from a jackhammer orthe compression of air brakes ona very large truck, are affectingsystem performance.



Rear VisionCamera (RVC)The vehicle may have a Rear VisionCamera (RVC) system. Read thisentire section before using it.

The RVC can assist the driver whenbacking up by displaying a view ofthe area behind the vehicle.

{ WARNING

The RVC system does not displaypedestrians, bicyclists, animals,or any other object locatedoutside the camera's field of view,below the bumper, or under thevehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

Do not back the vehicleusing only the RVC screenor by using the screen duringlonger, higher speed backingmaneuvers, or where therecould be cross-traffic. Perceiveddistances may be different fromactual distances.

Failure to use proper care beforebacking may result in injury,death, or vehicle damage. Alwayscheck before backing by checkingbehind and around the vehicle.

An image appears on the radioscreen with the message CheckSurroundings for Safety when thevehicle is shifted into R (Reverse).The radio screen goes to theprevious screen after approximately10 seconds once the vehicle isshifted out of R (Reverse).

To cancel the delay, do one of thefollowing:. Press a hard key on the

navigation system.. Shift into P (Park).. Reach a vehicle speed of

8 km/h (5 mph).



Turning the Rear Vision CameraSystem On or Off

To turn the rear vision camerasystem on or off:

1. Shift into P (Park).


3. Select Display.

4. Select Rear Camera Options.

5. Select Camera. When a checkmark appears next to theCamera option, then theRVC system is on.

Symbols

The RVC system may have afeature that lets the driver viewsymbols on the radio screen whileusing the RVC. The Ultrasonic RearPark Assist (URPA) system mustnot be disabled to use the cautionsymbols. The error message RearParking Assist Symbols Unavailablemay display if URPA has beendisabled and the symbols havebeen turned on. See UltrasonicParking Assist on page 9‑46.

The symbols appear and may coveran object when viewing the radioscreen when an object is detectedby the URPA system.

To turn the symbols on or off:



3. Select Display.


5. Select Symbols. When acheck mark appears next tothe Symbols option, symbolswill appear.

Guidelines

The RVC system has a guidelineoverlay that can help the driver alignthe vehicle when backing into aparking spot.

To turn the guidelines on or off:



3. Select Display.


5. Select Guidelines. When acheck mark appears next to theGuidelines option, guidelines willappear.



Rear Vision Camera ErrorMessages

SERVICE REAR VISION CAMERASYSTEM: This message candisplay on the radio screenwhen the system is not receivinginformation it requires from othervehicle systems.

If any other problem occurs or if aproblem persists, see your dealer.

Rear Vision Camera Location

The camera is located above thelicense plate.

The area displayed by the camera islimited.

It does not display objects that areclose to either corner or under thebumper and can vary dependingon vehicle orientation or roadconditions. The distance of theimage that appears on the screenis different from the actual distance.

The following illustration showsthe field of view that the cameraprovides.

A. View displayed by the camera.

B. Corner of the rear bumper.



When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

The RVC system may not workproperly or display a clear image if:. The RVC is turned off.

See “Turning the Rear VisionCamera System On or Off”earlier in this section.

. It is dark.

. The sun or the beam ofheadlights is shining directlyinto the camera lens.

. Ice, snow, mud, or anything elsebuilds up on the camera lens.Clean the lens, rinse it withwater, and wipe it with a softcloth.

. The back of the vehicle is inan accident, the position andmounting angle of the cameracan change or the camera canbe affected. Be sure to havethe camera and its position andmounting angle checked at yourdealer.

Lane DepartureWarning (LDW)For vehicles with this feature, readthe entire section before using it.

{ WARNING

The LDW system does not steerthe vehicle and is an aid to helpthe vehicle stay in the drivinglane. The LDW system may not:

. Provide enough time to avoida lane change collision.

. Be loud enough to hear thewarning beeps.

. Work properly under badweather conditions or if thewindshield is dirty.

. Detect lane markings and willnot detect road edges.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Warn that the vehicle iscrossing a lane marking if thesystem does not detect thelane marking.

LDW will operate even if it onlydetects lane markings on oneside of the road. It will not warnif the vehicle departs the lanefrom the side where it hasnot detected a lane marker.The vehicle position must bemaintained within the lane or,vehicle damage, injury, or deathcould occur. Even with LDW,always keep your attention on theroad and maintain proper vehicleposition within the lane. Alwayskeep the windshield clean anddo not use LDW in bad weatherconditions.



When the vehicle crosses adetected lane marking, the LDWindicator will flash and three beepswill sound. LDW will not warn ifthe turn signal is on or if a sharpmaneuver is made.

How the System Works

The LDW camera sensor is on thewindshield ahead of the rearviewmirror.

To turn LDW on and off, pressthe LANE DEPART control on thesteering wheel. The control indicatorwill light when LDW is on.

When the vehicle is started, theLDW indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on briefly.

LDW operates at speeds of 56 km(35 mph) or greater. If LDW is on,the LDW indicator will appear greenif the system detects a left or rightlane marking. This indicator willchange to amber, flash, and threebeeps will sound if the vehiclecrosses a detected lane markingwithout using the turn signal.

To change the volume of thewarning chime, see “Chime Volume”under Vehicle Personalization onpage 5‑33 for more information.

When the System Does NotSeem To Work Properly

If the LDW symbol does not appear:. The lane markings on the road

may not be seen.. The camera sensor may be

blocked by dirt, snow or ice.. The windshield may be

damaged.. The weather may be limiting

visibility.

This is normal operation; the vehicledoes not need service. Clean thewindshield.



{ WARNING

If the LDW camera sensor isblocked by dirt, snow, or ice, or ifthe windshield is damaged, it maynot detect a vehicle ahead. LDWmay not help avoid a collisionunder these conditions. Do notrely on LDW when the camerais blocked by snow, ice, or dirt.Keep the windshield clean.

{ WARNING

If the headlamps are not cleanedor properly aimed, the LDWsystem may not detect lanesahead. LDW may not help avoid acollision under these conditions.Keep the headlamps clean andproperly aimed.

LDW warnings may occasionallyoccur due to tar marks, shadows,cracks in the road, or other roadimperfections. This is normal systemoperation, the vehicle does not needservice.

LDW Messages

FRONT CAMERA BLOCKED,CLEAN WINDSHIELD: Thismessage may appear becausethe front camera is blocked andcannot operate properly. It mayalso activate during heavy rainor due to road spray.

LANE DEPARTURE SYSTEMUNAVAILABLE: This messagemay appear if LDW does notactivate due to a temporarycondition.

SERVICE FRONT CAMERA: Thismessage may appear to indicatethat LDW is not working properly.If this message remains on aftercontinued driving, the system needsservice. Take the vehicle to yourdealer.

FuelUse of the recommended fuelis an important part of the propermaintenance of this vehicle. To helpkeep the engine clean and maintainoptimum vehicle performance, werecommend the use of gasolineadvertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Look for the TOP TIER label onthe fuel pump to ensure gasolinemeets enhanced detergencystandards developed by autocompanies. A list of marketersproviding TOP TIER DetergentGasoline can be found atwww.toptiergas.com.



Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).See Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) onpage 9‑56. For all other vehicles,use only the unleaded gasolinedescribed under RecommendedFuel on page 9‑54.

Recommended FuelUse regular unleaded gasolinewith a posted octane rating of 87 orhigher. If the octane rating is lessthan 87, an audible knocking noise,commonly referred to as sparkknock, might be heard when driving.If this occurs, use a gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher as soonas possible. If heavy knocking isheard when using gasoline ratedat 87 octane or higher, the engineneeds service.

Gasoline Specifications(U.S. and Canada Only)At a minimum, gasoline shouldmeet ASTM specificationD 4814 in the United Statesor CAN/CGSB‐3.5 or 3.511 inCanada. Some gasolines containan octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT). We recommendagainst the use of gasolinescontaining MMT. See Fuel Additiveson page 9‑55 for additionalinformation.



California FuelRequirementsIf the vehicle is certified to meetCalifornia Emissions Standards,it is designed to operate on fuelsthat meet California specifications.See the underhood emission controllabel. If this fuel is not available instates adopting California EmissionsStandards, the vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meetingfederal specifications, but emissioncontrol system performance mightbe affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp could turn on and thevehicle might fail a smog‐check test.See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 5‑13. If this occurs, return toyour authorized dealer for diagnosis.If it is determined that the conditionis caused by the type of fuel used,repairs might not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Fuels in ForeignCountriesNever use leaded gasoline or anyother fuel not recommended in theprevious text on fuel. Costly repairscaused by use of improper fuelwould not be covered by the vehiclewarranty.

To check the fuel availability, askan auto club, or contact a major oilcompany that does business in thecountry where you will be driving.

Fuel AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolinesin the United States are nowrequired to contain additives thathelp prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing theemission control system to workproperly. In most cases, nothingshould have to be added to thefuel. However, some gasolinescontain only the minimum amountof additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agencyregulations. To help keep fuelinjectors and intake valves cleanand avoid problems due to dirtyinjectors or valves, look for gasolinethat is advertised as TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline. Look for theTOP TIER label on the fuel pumpto ensure gasoline meets enhanceddetergency standards developedby the auto companies. A list ofmarketers providing TOP TIERDetergent Gasoline can be foundat www.toptiergas.com.



For customers who do not useTOP TIER Detergent Gasolineregularly, one bottle of GM FuelSystem Treatment PLUS, added tothe fuel tank at every engine oilchange, can help clean depositsfrom fuel injectors and intakevalves. GM Fuel System TreatmentPLUS is the only gasoline additiverecommended by General Motors.It is available at your dealer.

Gasolines containing oxygenates,such as ethers and ethanol,and reformulated gasolinesmight be available in your area.We recommend that you use thesegasolines, if they comply with thespecifications described earlier.However, E85 (85% ethanol) andother fuels containing more than15% ethanol must not be used invehicles that were not designedfor those fuels.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.

Some gasolines that arenot reformulated for lowemissions can contain anoctane-enhancing additivecalled methylcyclopentadienylmanganese tricarbonyl (MMT);ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuelcontains MMT. We recommendagainst the use of such gasolines.Fuels containing MMT can reducespark plug life and affect emissioncontrol system performance.The malfunction indicator lampmight turn on. If this occurs,return to your dealer for service.

Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)Vehicles that have a FlexFuel badgeand a yellow fuel cap can use eitherunleaded gasoline or ethanol fuelcontaining up to 85% ethanol (E85).For all other vehicles, use only theunleaded gasoline described underRecommended Fuel on page 9‑54.

We encourage the use of E85 invehicles that are designed to use it.The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable”fuel, meaning it is made fromrenewable sources such as cornand other crops.

Many service stations will not havean 85% ethanol fuel (E85) pumpavailable. The U.S. Departmentof Energy has an alternative fuelswebsite (www.afdc.energy.gov/afdc/locator/stations/) that can help youfind E85 fuel. Those stations thatdo have E85 should have a labelindicating ethanol content. Do notuse the fuel if the ethanol contentis greater than 85%.



At a minimum, E85 should meetASTM Specification D 5798 orCGSB Specification 3.512. Fillingthe tank with fuel mixtures thatdo not meet ASTM or CGSBspecifications can affect driveabilityand could cause the malfunctionindicator lamp to come on. As theoutside temperature approachesfreezing, ethanol fuel distributorsshould supply winter grade ethanol,the same as with unleadedgasoline.

The starting characteristics ofE85 fuel make it unsuitable for usewhen temperatures fall below −18°C(0°F). In the range of −18°C (0°F) to0°C (32°F), it may take more time tostart the engine.

It is best not to alternaterepeatedly between gasoline andE85. If you do switch fuels, it isrecommended that you add asmuch fuel as possible — do notadd less than 11 L (3 gal) whenrefueling. You should drive thevehicle immediately after refuelingfor at least 11 km (7 mi) to allowthe vehicle to adapt to the changein ethanol concentration.

E85 has less energy per liter(gallon) than gasoline, so you willneed to refill the fuel tank moreoften when using E85 than whenyou are using gasoline. See Fillingthe Tank on page 9‑58.

Notice: Some additives are notcompatible with E85 fuel and canharm the vehicle's fuel system.Do not add anything to E85.Damage caused by additiveswould not be covered by thevehicle warranty.

Notice: This vehicle was notdesigned for fuel that containsmethanol. Do not use fuelcontaining methanol. It cancorrode metal parts in the fuelsystem and also damage plasticand rubber parts. That damagewould not be covered under thevehicle warranty.



Filling the Tank

{ WARNING

Fuel vapor burns violently and afuel fire can cause bad injuries.To help avoid injuries to you andothers, read and follow all theinstructions on the fuel pumpisland. Turn off the engine whenrefueling. Do not smoke nearfuel or when refueling the vehicle.Do not use cellular phones.Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away fromfuel. Do not leave the fuel pumpunattended when refueling thevehicle. This is against the law insome places. Do not re-enter thevehicle while pumping fuel. Keepchildren away from the fuel pump;never let children pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is behind thefuel door on the vehicle's passengerside. To open the fuel door, push therearward center edge in and releaseand the door will open. Turn the fuelcap counterclockwise to remove.Do not release the cap too soon orit will spring back. Reinstall the capby turning it clockwise until it clicks.

If the cap is not properly installed,the malfunction indicator lamp willcome on. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 5‑13 for moreinformation.

{ WARNING

Fuel can spray out on youif you open the fuel cap tooquickly. If you spill fuel and thensomething ignites it, you couldbe badly burned. This spray canhappen if the tank is nearly full,and is more likely in hot weather.Open the fuel cap slowly andwait for any hiss noise to stop.Then unscrew the cap all the way.

Do not top off or overfill the tank.Wait a few seconds before removingthe nozzle. Clean fuel from paintedsurfaces as soon as possible.See Exterior Care on page 10‑83.



{ WARNING

If a fire starts while you arerefueling, do not remove thenozzle. Shut off the flow of fuelby shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant.Leave the area immediately.

Notice: If a new fuel cap isneeded, be sure to get the righttype of cap from your dealer.The wrong type of fuel cap mightnot fit properly, might cause themalfunction indicator lamp tolight, and could damage the fueltank and emissions system.See Malfunction Indicator Lampon page 5‑13.

Filling a Portable FuelContainer

{ WARNING

Never fill a portable fuel containerwhile it is in the vehicle. Staticelectricity discharge from thecontainer can ignite the fuelvapor. You can be badly burnedand the vehicle damaged if thisoccurs. To help avoid injury toyou and others:

. Dispense fuel only intoapproved containers.

. Do not fill a container whileit is inside a vehicle, in avehicle's trunk, pickup bed,or on any surface other thanthe ground.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Bring the fill nozzle in contactwith the inside of the fillopening before operating thenozzle. Contact should bemaintained until the fillingis complete.

. Do not smoke whilepumping fuel.

. Do not use a cellular phonewhile pumping fuel.



Towing

General TowingInformationOnly use towing equipment thathas been designed for the vehicle.Contact your dealer or traileringdealer for assistance with preparingthe vehicle for towing a trailer.

See the following trailer towinginformation in this section:. For information on driving while

towing a trailer, see “DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips.”

. For maximum vehicle and trailerweights, see “Trailer Towing.”

. For information on equipmentto tow a trailer, see “TowingEquipment.”

For information on towing a disabledvehicle, see Towing the Vehicle onpage 10‑80. For information ontowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle such as a motor home, seeRecreational Vehicle Towing onpage 10‑80.

Driving Characteristicsand Towing Tips

{ WARNING

The driver can lose control whenpulling a trailer if the correctequipment is not used or thevehicle is not driven properly.For example, if the trailer is tooheavy, the brakes may not workwell— or even at all. The driverand passengers could beseriously injured. The vehicle mayalso be damaged; the resultingrepairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Pull a trailer

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

only if all the steps in this sectionhave been followed. Ask yourdealer for advice and informationabout towing a trailer with thevehicle.

The vehicle can tow a trailer whenequipped with the proper trailertowing equipment. For traileringcapacity, see “Trailer Towing”following in this section. Traileringchanges handling, acceleration,braking, durability and fueleconomy. With the added weight,the engine, transmission, wheelassemblies and tires are forcedto work harder and under greaterloads. The trailer also adds windresistance, increasing the pullingrequirements. For safe trailering,correctly use the proper traileringequipment.



The following information hasimportant trailering tips and rulesfor your safety and that of yourpassengers. Read this sectioncarefully before pulling a trailer.

Pulling a Trailer

Here are some important points:. There are many laws, including

speed limit restrictions that applyto trailering. Check for legalrequirements with state orprovincial police.

. Do not tow a trailer at all duringthe first 1 600 km (1,000 miles)the new vehicle is driven.The engine, axle or otherparts could be damaged.

. During the first 800 km(500 miles) that a trailer istowed, do not drive over 80 km/h(50 mph) and do not make startsat full throttle. This reduces wearon the vehicle.

. The vehicle can tow inD (Drive). Use a lower gear ifthe transmission shifts too often.

. Do not use the Fuel Saver Modewhen towing.

. Obey speed limit restrictions.Do not drive faster than themaximum posted speed fortrailers, or no more than 90 km/h(55 mph), to reduce wear on thevehicle.

. For vehicles with the UltraRear Parking Assist (URPA)system, turn the system off whentowing a trailer. If the tow baris installed while not towinga trailer, change the URPAsystem to the “Tow Bar” setting.See Ultrasonic Parking Assist onpage 9‑46 for more information.

Driving with a Trailer

Towing a trailer requires experience.Get familiar with handling andbraking with the added trailerweight. The vehicle is now longerand not as responsive as thevehicle is by itself.

Check all trailer hitch partsand attachments, safety chains,electrical connectors, lamps, tiresand mirror adjustments. If the trailerhas electric brakes, start the vehicleand trailer moving and then applythe trailer brake controller by handto be sure the brakes are working.

During the trip, check regularly to besure that the load is secure, and thelamps and trailer brakes are workingproperly.



Towing with a Stability ControlSystem

When towing, the sound of thestability control system might beheard. The system is reacting to thevehicle movement caused by thetrailer, which mainly occurs duringcornering. This is normal whentowing heavier trailers.

Following Distance

Stay at least twice as far behind thevehicle ahead as you would whendriving the vehicle without a trailer.This can help to avoid situationsthat require heavy braking andsudden turns.

Passing

More passing distance is neededwhen towing a trailer. Because therig is longer, it is necessary to gofarther beyond the passed vehiclebefore returning to the lane.

Backing Up

Hold the bottom of the steeringwheel with one hand. To move thetrailer to the left, move that handto the left. To move the trailer tothe right, move your hand to theright. Always back up slowly and,if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turnswhile trailering could cause thetrailer to come in contact withthe vehicle. The vehicle couldbe damaged. Avoid making verysharp turns while trailering.

When turning with a trailer, makewider turns than normal so thetrailer will not strike soft shoulders,curbs, road signs, trees or otherobjects. Use the turn signal well inadvance and avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers.

Turn Signals When Towing aTrailer

The turn signal indicators on theinstrument panel flash wheneversignaling a turn or lane change.Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps also flash, telling otherdrivers the vehicle is turning,changing lanes or stopping.

When towing a trailer, the arrows onthe instrument panel flash for turnseven if the bulbs on the trailer areburned out. Check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are stillworking.

Driving on Grades

Reduce speed and shift to alower gear before starting downa long or steep downgrade. If thetransmission is not shifted down,the brakes might have to be usedso much that they would get hotand no longer work well.



The vehicle can tow in D (Drive).Use a lower gear if the transmissionshifts too often.

When towing at high altitude onsteep uphill grades, engine coolantwill boil at a lower temperature thanat normal altitudes. If the engine isturned off immediately after towingat high altitude on steep uphillgrades, the vehicle may showsigns similar to engine overheating.To avoid this, let the engine runwhile parked, preferably on levelground, with the transmission inP (Park) for a few minutes beforeturning the engine off. If theoverheat warning comes on, seeEngine Overheating on page 10‑21.

Parking on Hills

{ WARNING

Parking the vehicle on a hillwith the trailer attached can bedangerous. If something goeswrong, the rig could start to move.People can be injured, and boththe vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged. When possible, alwayspark the rig on a flat surface.

If parking the rig on a hill:

1. Press the brake pedal, butdo not shift into P (Park) yet.Turn the wheels into the curb iffacing downhill or into traffic iffacing uphill.

2. Have someone place chocksunder the trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel chocks are inplace, release the brake pedaluntil the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the brake pedal.Then apply the parking brakeand shift into P (Park).

5. Release the brake pedal.

Leaving After Parking on a Hill

1. Apply and hold the brake pedal.

2. Start the engine.

3. Shift into a gear.

4. Release the parking brake.

5. Let up on the brake pedal.

6. Drive slowly until the trailer isclear of the chocks.

7. Stop and have someone pick upand store the chocks.



Maintenance When TrailerTowing

The vehicle needs service moreoften when pulling a trailer. See thismanual's Maintenance Scheduleor Index for more information.Things that are especially importantin trailer operation are automatictransmission fluid, engine oil, axlelubricant, belts, cooling system andbrake system. Inspect these beforeand during the trip.

Check periodically to see that allhitch nuts and bolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When TrailerTowing

The cooling system may temporarilyoverheat during severe operatingconditions. See Engine Overheatingon page 10‑21.

Trailer TowingBefore pulling a trailer, there arethree important considerations thathave to do with weight:. The weight of the trailer. The weight of the trailer tongue. The total weight on the vehicle's

tires

Weight of the Trailer

How heavy can a trailer safely be?

Speed, altitude, road grades,outside temperature, specialequipment, and the amount oftongue weight the vehicle can carrymust be considered. See “Weightof the Trailer Tongue” later in thissection for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculatedassuming only the driver is inthe tow vehicle and it has all therequired trailering equipment.The weight of additional optionalequipment, passengers and cargo inthe tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

Use the following chart to determinehow much the vehicle can weigh,based upon the vehicle model andoptions.



Vehicle

Maximum TrailerWeight with Trailer

Brakes†

GCWR*

2.4 L L4 Engine, FWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 625 kg (5,787 lbs)

2.4 L L4 Engine, AWD 680 kg (1,500 lbs) 2 700 kg (5,952 lbs)

3.0 L V6 Engine, FWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 600 kg (7,937 lbs)

3.0 L V6 Engine, AWD 1 588 kg (3,500 lbs) 3 700 kg (8,157 lbs)

† For trailers without trailer brakes the maximum trailer weight is 454 kg(1,000 lbs). See Towing Equipment on page 9‑66 for more information.

*The Gross Combination WeightRating (GCWR) is the totalallowable weight of the completelyloaded vehicle and trailer includingany passengers, cargo, equipmentand conversions. The GCWR for thevehicle should not be exceeded.

Ask your dealer for ourtrailering information or advice.See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑6 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer Tongue

The tongue load (A) of any traileris an important weight to measurebecause it affects the total grossweight of the vehicle. The GrossVehicle Weight (GVW) includesthe curb weight of the vehicle,any cargo carried in it, and thepeople who will be riding in thevehicle. If there are a lot of options,equipment, passengers or cargo inthe vehicle, it will reduce the tongueweight the vehicle can carry, whichwill also reduce the trailer weight thevehicle can tow. If towing a trailer,the tongue load must be added tothe GVW because the vehicle willbe carrying that weight, too. SeeVehicle Load Limits on page 9‑18.



If a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch is beingused, the trailer tongue (A) shouldweigh 10 to 15 percent of the totalloaded trailer weight (B).

After loading the trailer, weighthe trailer and then the tongue,separately, to see if the weights areproper. If they are not, adjustmentsmight be made by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Trailering may be limited by thevehicle's ability to carry tongueweight. Tongue weight cannot causethe vehicle to exceed the GVWR

(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)or the RGAWR (Rear Gross AxleWeight Rating). The effect ofadditional weight may reduce thetrailering capacity more than thetotal of the additional weight.

It is important that the vehicledoes not exceed any of itsratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,Maximum Trailer Rating or TongueWeight. The only way to be sure it isnot exceeding any of these ratingsis to weigh the vehicle and trailer.

Total Weight on the Vehicle'sTires

Inflate the vehicle's tires tothe upper limit for cold tires.These numbers can be found onthe Certification label or see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑18 for moreinformation. Do not go over theGVW limit for the vehicle, or theGAWR, including the weight of thetrailer tongue. If using a weightdistributing hitch, do not go over therear axle limit before applying theweight distribution spring bars.

Towing Equipment

Hitches

Use the correct hitch equipment.See your dealer or a hitch dealerfor assistance.. The rear bumper on the vehicle

is not intended for hitches.Do not attach rental hitchesor other bumper-type hitchesto it. Use only a frame-mountedhitch that does not attach to thebumper.

. Will any holes be made in thebody of the vehicle when thetrailer hitch is installed? If thereare, seal the holes when thehitch is removed. If the holesare not sealed, dirt, water, anddeadly carbon monoxide (CO)from the exhaust can get into thevehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 9‑30.



Safety Chains

Always attach chains between thevehicle and the trailer. Cross thesafety chains under the tongueof the trailer to help prevent thetongue from contacting the road if itbecomes separated from the hitch.Leave enough slack so the rig canturn. Never allow safety chains todrag on the ground.

Trailer Brakes

Does the trailer have its ownbrakes? Be sure to read and followthe instructions for the trailer brakesso they are installed, adjusted, andmaintained properly.

Because the vehicle has antilockbrakes, do not tap into the vehicle'sbrake system. If this is done, bothbrake systems will not work well,or at all.

Trailer SwayControl (TSC)The vehicle has a Trailer SwayControl (TSC) feature as part of theStabiliTrak system. If TSC detectsthat the trailer is swaying, thevehicle's brakes are automaticallyapplied.

When TSC is applying the brakes,the TCS/StabiliTrak indicator lightflashes to notify the driver to reducespeed. If the trailer continues tosway, StabiliTrak will reduce enginetorque to help slow the vehicle.

TSC will not function if StabiliTrak isturned off. See StabiliTrak® Systemon page 9‑39 for more information.

Conversions andAdd-Ons

Add-On ElectricalEquipmentNotice: Do not add anythingelectrical to the vehicle unlessyou check with your dealer first.Some electrical equipment candamage the vehicle and thedamage would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty. Someadd-on electrical equipment cankeep other components fromworking as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain thevehicle's 12‐volt battery, even if thevehicle is not operating.

The vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to add anythingelectrical to the vehicle, seeServicing the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑33 and AddingEquipment to the Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 3‑34.



2 NOTES


Vehicle Care 10-1

Vehicle Care

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 10-2California Proposition65 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

California PerchlorateMaterials Requirements . . . . 10-3

Accessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Vehicle ChecksDoing Your OwnService Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4

Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Engine CompartmentOverview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6

Engine Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13Automatic TransmissionFluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter . . . . 10-14Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine Overheating . . . . . . . . 10-21Power Steering Fluid(2.4L L4 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Power Steering Fluid(3.0L V6 Engine) . . . . . . . . . . 10-23

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . 10-28Automatic Transmission ShiftLock Control FunctionCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29

Wiper BladeReplacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30

Headlamp AimingHeadlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . 10-31

Bulb ReplacementBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps . . . . . . 10-35

License Plate Lamp . . . . . . . . 10-38Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . 10-39

Electrical SystemFuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Engine Compartment FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Wheels and TiresTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-46Tire Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . 10-47Tire Designations . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Tire Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53Tire Pressure MonitorSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

Tire Pressure MonitorOperation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-55

Tire Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Tire Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60


10-2 Vehicle Care

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Different Size Tires andWheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-65Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . 10-75

Jump StartingJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

TowingTowing the Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 10-80Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Appearance CareExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89

General InformationFor service and parts needs, visityour dealer. You will receivegenuine GM parts and GM-trainedand supported service people.

Genuine GM parts have one ofthese marks:

California Proposition65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including thisone, contain and/or emit chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and birth defects orother reproductive harm. Engineexhaust, many parts and systems,many fluids, and some componentwear by-products contain and/oremit these chemicals.


Vehicle Care 10-3

California PerchlorateMaterials RequirementsCertain types of automotiveapplications, such as airbaginitiators, seat belt pretensioners,and lithium batteries contained inRemote Keyless Entry transmitters,may contain perchlorate materials.Special handling may be necessary.For additional information, seewww.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Accessories andModificationsAdding non‐dealer accessories ormaking modifications to the vehiclecan affect vehicle performance andsafety, including such things asairbags, braking, stability, rideand handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, andelectronic systems like antilockbrakes, traction control, and stabilitycontrol. These accessories ormodifications could even causemalfunction or damage not coveredby the vehicle warranty.

Damage to vehicle componentsresulting from modifications orthe installation or use of non‐GMcertified parts, including controlmodule or software modifications,is not covered under the terms ofthe vehicle warranty and may affectremaining warranty coverage foraffected parts.

GM Accessories are designed tocomplement and function with othersystems on the vehicle. See yourdealer to accessorize the vehicleusing genuine GM Accessoriesinstalled by a dealer technician.

Also, see Adding Equipment tothe Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑34.


10-4 Vehicle Care

Vehicle Checks

Doing Your OwnService Work

{ WARNING

You can be injured and thevehicle could be damaged if youtry to do service work on a vehiclewithout knowing enough about it.

. Be sure you have sufficientknowledge, experience,the proper replacementparts, and tools beforeattempting any vehiclemaintenance task.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Be sure to use the propernuts, bolts, and otherfasteners. Metric andEnglish fasteners can beeasily confused. If the wrongfasteners are used, partscan later break or fall off.You could be hurt.

If doing some of your own servicework, use the proper servicemanual. It tells you much moreabout how to service the vehicle

than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see ServicePublications Ordering Informationon page 13‑18.

This vehicle has an airbag system.Before attempting to do your ownservice work, see Servicing theAirbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 3‑33.

Keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the dateof any service work performed.See Maintenance Records onpage 11‑15.


Vehicle Care 10-5

HoodTo open the hood:

1. Pull the release handle locatedbelow the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel.

2. Move the secondary hoodrelease lever to the right torelease the striker. The lever isnear the middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

To close the hood:

1. Before closing the hood, be sureall the filler caps are on properly.

2. Lower the hood 30 cm (12 in)above the vehicle and releaseit so it fully latches. Check tomake sure the hood is closedand repeat the process ifnecessary.


10-6 Vehicle Care

Engine Compartment Overview

2.4 L L4 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-7

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

B. Engine Cover on page 10‑9.

C. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

D. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

E. Brake Fluid Reservoir.See Brakes on page 10‑25.

F. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑40.

G. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑76.

H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑76.

I. Battery on page 10‑27(Out of View).

J. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑17.

K. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.


10-8 Vehicle Care

3.0 L V6 Engine


Vehicle Care 10-9

A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

B. Power Steering FluidReservoir (Under EngineCover). See Power SteeringFluid (2.4L L4 Engine) onpage 10‑23 or Power SteeringFluid (3.0L V6 Engine) onpage 10‑23.

C. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See EngineOil on page 10‑10.

D. Engine Cover on page 10‑9.

E. Engine Oil Dipstick (Out ofView). See Engine Oil onpage 10‑10.

F. Brake Fluid Reservoir.See Brakes on page 10‑25.

G. Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑40.

H. Remote Positive (+) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑76.

I. Remote Negative (−) Terminal.See Jump Starting onpage 10‑76.

J. Battery on page 10‑27(Out of View).

K. Engine Coolant Surge Tankand Pressure Cap. See EngineCoolant on page 10‑17.

L. Windshield Washer FluidReservoir. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

Engine Cover

Engine Cover 3.0L V6

A. Oil Fill Cap

B. Engine Cover Bolt

C. Engine Cover


10-10 Vehicle Care

To remove:

1. Remove the oil fill cap (A).

2. Remove the engine coverbolt (B).

3. Raise the engine cover (C) torelease from the retainers.

4. Lift and remove the enginecover.

5. Reverse Steps 1 through 4 toreinstall engine cover.

Engine OilTo ensure proper engineperformance and long life, carefulattention must be paid to engineoil. Following these simple, butimportant steps will help protectyour investment:. Always use engine oil approved

to the proper specification andof the proper viscosity grade.See “Selecting the Right EngineOil” in this section.

. Check the engine oil levelregularly and maintain theproper oil level. See “CheckingEngine Oil” and “When to AddEngine Oil” in this section.

. Change the engine oil at theappropriate time. See EngineOil Life System on page 10‑13.

. Always dispose of engine oilproperly. See “What to Do withUsed Oil” in this section.

Checking Engine Oil

It is a good idea to check theengine oil level at each fuel fill.In order to get an accuratereading, the vehicle must beon level ground. The engine oildipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location ofthe engine oil dipstick.

Obtaining an accurate oil levelreading is essential:

1. If the engine has been runningrecently, turn off the engine andallow several minutes for the oilto drain back into the oil pan.Checking the oil level too soonafter engine shutoff will notprovide an accurate oil levelreading.

2. Pull out the dipstick and cleanit with a paper towel or cloth,then push it back in all the way.Remove it again, keeping thetip down, and check the level.


Vehicle Care 10-11

When to Add Engine Oil

2.4L L4 Engine

3.0L V6 Engine

If the oil is below the cross-hatchedarea at the tip of the dipstick, add1 L (1 qt) of the recommendedoil and then recheck the level.

See “Selecting the Right EngineOil” in this section for anexplanation of what kind of oil touse. For engine oil crankcasecapacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Notice: Do not add too much oil.Oil levels above or below theacceptable operating rangeshown on the dipstick are harmfulto the engine. If you find thatyou have an oil level above theoperating range, i.e., the enginehas so much oil that the oil levelgets above the cross-hatchedarea that shows the properoperating range, the engine couldbe damaged. You should drainout the excess oil or limit drivingof the vehicle and seek a serviceprofessional to remove theexcess amount of oil.

See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine oil fill cap.

Add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operatingrange. Push the dipstick all the wayback in when through.

Selecting the Right Engine Oil

Selecting the right engine oildepends on both the proper oilspecification and viscosity grade.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.


10-12 Vehicle Care

Specification

Use and ask for licensed engineoils with the dexos1™ approvedcertification mark. Engine oilsmeeting the requirements for thevehicle should have the dexos1approved certification mark.This certification mark indicatesthat the oil has been approvedto the dexos1 specification.

Notice: Failure to use therecommended engine oil orequivalent can result in enginedamage not covered by thevehicle warranty. Check withyour dealer or service provideron whether the oil is approvedto the dexos1 specification.

Viscosity Grade

SAE 5W‐30 is the best viscositygrade for the vehicle. Do not useother viscosity grade oils such asSAE 10W‐30, 10W‐40, or 20W‐50.

If in an area of extreme cold, wherethe temperature falls below −20°F(−29°C), an SAE 0W‐30 oil shouldbe used. An oil of this viscositygrade will provide easier coldstarting for the engine at extremelylow temperatures. When selectingan oil of the appropriate viscositygrade, always select an oil thatmeets the dexos1 specification orequivalent. See “Specification” formore information.

Engine Oil Additives/EngineOil Flushes

Do not add anything to the oil.The recommended oils with thedexos specification and displayingthe dexos certification mark are allthat is needed for good performanceand engine protection.

Engine oil system flushes are notrecommended and could causeengine damage not covered bythe vehicle warranty.

What to Do with Used Oil

Used engine oil contains certainelements that can be unhealthy foryour skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay onyour skin for very long. Clean yourskin and nails with soap and water,or a good hand cleaner. Wash orproperly dispose of clothing or ragscontaining used engine oil. See themanufacturer's warnings about theuse and disposal of oil products.


Vehicle Care 10-13

Used oil can be a threat to theenvironment. If you change yourown oil, be sure to drain all theoil from the filter before disposal.Never dispose of oil by puttingit in the trash or pouring it on theground, into sewers, or into streamsor bodies of water. Recycle it bytaking it to a place that collectsused oil.

Engine Oil Life System

When to Change Engine Oil

This vehicle has a computer systemthat indicates when to change theengine oil and filter. This is basedon a combination of factors whichinclude engine revolutions, enginetemperature, and miles driven.Based on driving conditions, themileage at which an oil change isindicated can vary considerably.For the oil life system to workproperly, the system must be resetevery time the oil is changed.

When the system has calculatedthat oil life has been diminished,it indicates that an oil change isnecessary. A CHANGE ENGINEOIL SOON message comes on.See Engine Oil Messages onpage 5‑28. Change the oil as soonas possible within the next 1 000 km(600 mi). It is possible that, if drivingunder the best conditions, the oil lifesystem might indicate that an oilchange is not necessary for up to ayear. The engine oil and filter mustbe changed at least once a yearand, at this time, the system mustbe reset. Your dealer has trainedservice people who will perform thiswork and reset the system. It is alsoimportant to check the oil regularlyover the course of an oil draininterval and keep it at the properlevel.

If the system is ever resetaccidentally, the oil must bechanged at 5 000 km (3,000 mi)since the last oil change.Remember to reset the oil lifesystem whenever the oil is changed.

How to Reset the Engine OilLife System

Reset the system whenever theengine oil is changed so that thesystem can calculate the nextengine oil change. To reset thesystem:

1. Turn the ignition to ON/RUN,with the engine off.

2. Press the DIC MENUbutton to display the VehicleInformation menu.

3. Press either the up or downarrows to view REMAININGOIL LIFE.

4. Press the SET/CLR button until100% is displayed.

5. Turn the key to LOCK/OFF.

Or:


2. Fully press and release theaccelerator pedal three timeswithin five seconds.


10-14 Vehicle Care

The system is reset when theCHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage goes off.

If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL SOONmessage comes back on when thevehicle is started, the engine oil lifesystem has not been reset. Repeatthe procedure.

Automatic TransmissionFluid

How to Check AutomaticTransmission Fluid

It is not necessary to checkthe transmission fluid level.A transmission fluid leak is theonly reason for fluid loss. If a leakoccurs, take the vehicle to yourdealer and have it repaired assoon as possible.

There is a special procedurefor checking and changing thetransmission fluid. Becausethis procedure is difficult, thisshould be done at your dealer.Contact your dealer for additionalinformation or the procedure canbe found in the service manual.To purchase a service manual,see Service Publications OrderingInformation on page 13‑18.

Change the fluid and filter at theintervals listed in MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3, andbe sure to use the fluid listedin Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Engine Air Cleaner/FilterSee Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of theengine air cleaner/filter.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

Inspect or replace the air cleaner/filter at the scheduled maintenanceintervals. See MaintenanceSchedule on page 11‑3 for moreinformation. If driving in dusty/dirtyconditions, inspect the filter at eachengine oil change.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/Filter

To inspect the air cleaner/filter,remove the filter from the vehicleand lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If thefilter remains covered with dirt, anew filter is required. Never usecompressed air to clean the filter.


Vehicle Care 10-15

To inspect or replace the engine aircleaner/filter:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5.

2. Locate the air filter housing onthe passenger side of the enginecompartment. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

3. Remove the four air cleanerhousing cover screws.

4. Pull straight up on the cover, andwhile holding the cover, removethe air cleaner filter.

5. Inspect or replace the air cleanerfilter.

How to Reinstall Engine AirCleaner/Filter

1. Install the air cleaner filterinto the air cleaner housing.The outer air cleaner filter sealmust be fitted properly in theair cleaner housing.

2. Align the air cleaner housingcover tabs to the air cleanerhousing.

3. Install the air cleaner housingcover using the four screws.

{ WARNING

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause youor others to be burned. The aircleaner not only cleans the air;it helps to stop flames if theengine backfires. Use cautionwhen working on the engineand do not drive with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter isoff, dirt can easily get into theengine, which could damage it.Always have the air cleaner/filterin place when you are driving.


10-16 Vehicle Care

Cooling System

2.4 L L4 Engine

A. Engine Cooling Fan(Out of View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

3.0 L V6 Engine

A. Engine Cooling Fans(Out of View)

B. Engine Coolant Surge Tank andPressure Cap

{ WARNING

An electric engine cooling fanunder the hood can start upeven when the engine is notrunning and can cause injury.Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhoodelectric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolantsurge tank is boiling, do not doanything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked ona level surface.


Vehicle Care 10-17

The coolant level should beat the COLD FILL line. If it isnot, the vehicle may have a leakat the radiator hoses, heater hoses,radiator, water pump, or somewhereelse in the cooling system.

{ WARNING

Heater and radiator hoses, andother engine parts, can be veryhot. Do not touch them. If you do,you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if thereis a leak. If you run the engine, itcould lose all coolant. That couldcause an engine fire, and youcould be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak,with the engine on, check tosee if the electric engine coolingfan is running. If the engine isoverheating, the fan should berunning. If it is not, the vehicleneeds service. Turn off the engine.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® can cause prematureengine, heater core, or radiatorcorrosion. In addition, the enginecoolant could require changingsooner, at 50 000 km (30,000mi)or 24months, whichever occursfirst. Any repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always use DEX-COOL(silicate-free) coolant in thevehicle.

Engine CoolantThe cooling system in the vehicleis filled with DEX-COOL® enginecoolant. This coolant is designed toremain in the vehicle for 5 years or240 000 km (150,000mi), whicheveroccurs first.

The following explains the coolingsystem and how to check and addcoolant when it is low. If there is aproblem with engine overheating,see Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21.


10-18 Vehicle Care

What to Use

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant. If using this mixture,nothing else needs to be added.This mixture:. Gives freezing protection down

to −37°C (−34°F), outsidetemperature.

. Gives boiling protection upto 129°C (265°F), enginetemperature.

. Protects against rust andcorrosion.

. Will not damage aluminum parts.

. Helps keep the proper enginetemperature.

Notice: If an improper coolantmixture is used, the engine couldoverheat and be badly damaged.The repair cost would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Too much water in the mixturecan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and otherparts.

Never dispose of engine coolantby putting it in the trash, pouringit on the ground, or into sewers,streams, or bodies of water.Have the coolant changed by anauthorized service center, familiarwith legal requirements regardingused coolant disposal. This will helpprotect the environment and yourhealth.


Vehicle Care 10-19

Checking Coolant

The vehicle must be on a levelsurface when checking the coolantlevel.

Check to see if coolant is visiblein the coolant surge tank. If thecoolant inside the coolant surgetank is boiling, do not do anythingelse until it cools down. If coolant isvisible but the coolant level is not ator above the COLD FILL line, adda 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant at thecoolant surge tank, but be sure thecooling system is cool before thisis done. See Cooling System onpage 10‑16 for more information.

The coolant surge tank is locatedin the engine compartment onthe driver side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for more informationon location.

How to Add Coolant to theCoolant Surge Tank

Notice: This vehicle has aspecific coolant fill procedure.Failure to follow this procedurecould cause the engine tooverheat and be severelydamaged.

If you have not found a problemyet, check to see if coolant isvisible in the coolant surge tank.If coolant is visible but the coolantlevel is not at the COLD FILL line,add a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOLcoolant at the coolant surge tank,but be sure the cooling system,including the coolant surge tankpressure cap, is cool before youdo it. See Engine Overheating onpage 10‑21 for more information.

{ WARNING

Steam and scalding liquids from ahot cooling system can blow outand burn you badly. They areunder pressure, and if you turnthe coolant surge tank pressurecap— even a little— they cancome out at high speed. Neverturn the cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap, is hot.Wait for the cooling system andcoolant surge tank pressure capto cool if you ever have to turnthe pressure cap.


10-20 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Adding only plain water or someother liquid to the cooling systemcan be dangerous. Plain waterand other liquids, can boil beforethe proper coolant mixture will.The coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture.With plain water or the wrongmixture, the engine could get toohot but you would not get theoverheat warning. The enginecould catch fire and you orothers could be burned. Use a50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and DEX-COOL coolant.

{ WARNING

You can be burned if you spillcoolant on hot engine parts.Coolant contains ethylene glycoland it will burn if the engine partsare hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

Notice: In cold weather, watercan freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core and otherparts. Use the recommendedcoolant and the proper coolantmixture.

1. Remove the coolant surge tankpressure cap when the coolingsystem, including the coolantsurge tank pressure cap andupper radiator hose, is nolonger hot.

Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise aboutone-quarter of a turn. If youhear a hiss, wait for that to stop.This will allow any pressurestill left to be vented out thedischarge hose.

2. Keep turning the pressure capslowly, and remove it.


Vehicle Care 10-21

3. Fill the coolant surge tank withthe proper DEX-COOL coolantmixture, to the COLD FILL line.

4. With the coolant surge tankpressure cap off, start theengine and let it run until theupper radiator hose can be feltgetting hot. Watch out for theengine cooling fan.

By this time, the coolant levelinside the coolant surge tankmay be lower. If the level islower, add more of the properDEX-COOL coolant mixtureto the coolant surge tank untilthe level reaches the COLDFILL line.

5. Replace the pressure cap.Be sure the pressure cap ishand-tight.

Check the level in the coolant surgetank when the cooling system hascooled down. If the coolant is notat the proper level, repeat Steps 1through 3 and reinstall the pressurecap. If the coolant still is not at theproper level when the system coolsdown again, see your dealer.

Engine OverheatingThe vehicle has an indicator towarn of engine overheating.There is an engine coolanttemperature warning light onthe vehicle's instrument panel.See Engine Coolant TemperatureGauge on page 5‑10.

The decision may be made notto lift the hood when this warningappears, but instead get servicehelp right away. See RoadsideAssistance Program (U.S. andCanada) on page 13‑8 or RoadsideAssistance Program (Mexico) onpage 13‑10.


10-22 Vehicle Care

If the decision to lift the hood ismade, make sure the vehicle isparked on a level surface.

Then check to see if the enginecooling fan(s) are running. If theengine is overheating, the fan(s)should be running. If they are not,do not continue to run the engineand have the vehicle serviced.

Notice: Engine damage fromrunning the engine withoutcoolant is not covered by thewarranty.

If Steam is Coming from theEngine Compartment

{ WARNING

Steam from an overheated enginecan burn you badly, even if youjust open the hood. Stay awayfrom the engine if you see or hearsteam coming from it. Just turn itoff and get everyone away fromthe vehicle until it cools down.Wait until there is no sign ofsteam or coolant before youopen the hood.

If you keep driving when theengine is overheated, the liquidsin it can catch fire. You or otherscould be badly burned. Stop theengine if it overheats, and get outof the vehicle until the engineis cool.

If No Steam is Coming fromthe Engine Compartment

If an engine overheat warning isdisplayed but no steam can be seenor heard, the problem may not betoo serious. Sometimes the enginecan get a little too hot when thevehicle:. Climbs a long hill on a hot day.. Stops after high-speed driving.. Idles for long periods in traffic.. Tows a trailer.

If the overheat warning is displayedwith no sign of steam:

1. Turn the air conditioning off.

2. Turn the heater on to the highesttemperature and to the highestfan speed. Open the windows asnecessary.


Vehicle Care 10-23

3. In heavy traffic, let the engineidle in N (Neutral) while stopped.If it is safe to do so, pull offthe road, shift to P (Park)or N (Neutral) and let theengine idle.

If the temperature overheat gaugeis no longer in the overheat zoneor an overheat warning no longerdisplays, the vehicle can be driven.Continue to drive the vehicle slowlyfor about 10 minutes. Keep a safevehicle distance from the vehicle infront. If the warning does not comeback on, continue to drive normally.

If the warning continues, pullover, stop, and park the vehicleright away.

If there is no sign of steam, idlethe engine for three minutes whileparked. If the warning is stilldisplayed, turn off the engineuntil it cools down.

Power Steering Fluid(2.4L L4 Engine)The vehicle has electric powersteering and does not use powersteering fluid.

Power Steering Fluid(3.0L V6 Engine)

The power steering fluid reservoiris located toward the rear of theengine compartment on thepassenger side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for reservoir location.

When to Check Power SteeringFluid

The power steering fluid does notneed to be checked unless thereis a leak in the system or you hearan unusual noise. Have the systeminspected and repaired if there is afluid loss.

How to Check Power SteeringFluid

Notice: Extremely small amountsof contamination can causesteering system damage andcause it to not work properly.Do not allow contaminants tocontact the fluid side of thereservoir cap/dipstick or fromentering the reservoir.

To check the power steering fluid:

1. Turn the engine off and let itcool down.

2. Remove the engine cover. Referto Engine Cover on page 10‑9.

3. Wipe the cap and the top of thereservoir clean.


10-24 Vehicle Care

4. Unscrew the cap and wipe thedipstick with a clean rag.

5. Replace the cap and completelytighten it.

6. Remove the cap again and lookat the fluid level on the dipstick.

The fluid level should be betweenMAX and MIN line at roomtemperature. If the fluid is onor below MIN line, add fluid.

What to Use

To determine what kind of fluid touse, refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12.Always use the proper fluid.

Notice: Use of the incorrect fluidmay damage the vehicle and thedamages may not be covered bythe vehicle's warranty. Alwaysuse the correct fluid listed inRecommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Washer Fluid

What to Use

Read the manufacturer'sinstructions before refillingthe windshield washer fluid.If operating the vehicle in anarea where the temperaturemay fall below freezing, usea fluid that has sufficient protectionagainst freezing.

Adding Washer Fluid

Open the cap with the washersymbol on it and add washer fluiduntil full. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 10‑6 for reservoirlocation.

Notice. When using concentratedwasher fluid, follow themanufacturer's instructionsfor adding water.

. Do not mix water withready-to-use washer fluid.Water can cause the solutionto freeze and damage thewasher fluid tank and otherparts of the washer system.Also, water does not cleanas well as washer fluid.

. Fill the washer fluid tankonly three-quarters fullwhen it is very cold.This allows for fluidexpansion if freezing occurs,which could damage thetank if it is completely full.

. Do not use engine coolant(antifreeze) in the windshieldwasher. It can damage thewindshield washer systemand paint.


Vehicle Care 10-25

BrakesThis vehicle has disc brakes.Disc brake pads have built-in wearindicators that make a high-pitchedwarning sound when the brake padsare worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or beheard all the time the vehicle ismoving, except when applyingthe brake pedal firmly.

{ WARNING

The brake wear warning soundmeans that soon the brakes willnot work well. That could lead toa crash. When the brake wearwarning sound is heard, have thevehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive withworn-out brake pads could resultin costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climatescan cause a brake squeal whenthe brakes are first applied orlightly applied. This does not meansomething is wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts arenecessary to help prevent brakepulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear andevenly tighten wheel nuts inthe proper sequence to torquespecifications in Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2.

Brake linings should always bereplaced as complete axle sets.

Brake Pedal Travel

See your dealer if the brake pedaldoes not return to normal height,or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be asign that brake service might berequired.

Brake Adjustment

Every time the brakes are applied,with or without the vehicle moving,the brakes adjust for wear.

Replacing Brake System Parts

The braking system on a vehicle iscomplex. Its many parts have to beof top quality and work well togetherif the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. The vehicle was designedand tested with top-quality brakeparts. When parts of the brakingsystem are replaced, be sure to getnew, approved replacement parts.If this is not done, the brakes mightnot work properly. For example,installing disc brake pads that arewrong for the vehicle, can changethe balance between the frontand rear brakes — for the worse.The braking performance expectedcan change in many other ways ifthe wrong replacement brake partsare installed.


10-26 Vehicle Care

Brake Fluid

The brake master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT 3 brake fluidas indicated on the reservoir cap.See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 10‑6 for the location of thereservoir.

There are only two reasons whythe brake fluid level in the reservoirmight go down:. The brake fluid level goes down

because of normal brake liningwear. When new linings areinstalled, the fluid level goesback up.

. A fluid leak in the brakehydraulic system can also causea low fluid level. Have the brakehydraulic system fixed, since aleak means that sooner or laterthe brakes will not work well.

Do not top off the brake fluid.Adding fluid does not correct aleak. If fluid is added when thelinings are worn, there will be toomuch fluid when new brake liningsare installed. Add or remove brakefluid, as necessary, only when workis done on the brake hydraulicsystem.

{ WARNING

If too much brake fluid is added,it can spill on the engine andburn, if the engine is hot enough.You or others could be burned,and the vehicle could bedamaged. Add brake fluid onlywhen work is done on the brakehydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a lowlevel, the brake warning light comeson. See Brake System WarningLight on page 5‑16.

What to Add

Use only new DOT 3 brakefluid from a sealed container.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12.

Always clean the brake fluidreservoir cap and the areaaround the cap before removing it.This helps keep dirt from enteringthe reservoir.

{ WARNING

With the wrong kind of fluid inthe brake hydraulic system,the brakes might not work well.This could cause a crash. Alwaysuse the proper brake fluid.


Vehicle Care 10-27

Notice. Using the wrong fluidcan badly damage brakehydraulic system parts.For example, just a fewdrops of mineral-based oil,such as engine oil, in thebrake hydraulic system candamage brake hydraulicsystem parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced.Do not let someone put inthe wrong kind of fluid.

. If brake fluid is spilledon the vehicle's paintedsurfaces, the paint finishcan be damaged. Be carefulnot to spill brake fluid onthe vehicle. If you do, washit off immediately.

BatteryRefer to the replacement numberon the original battery label whena new battery is needed.

{ WARNING

Battery posts, terminals, andrelated accessories contain leadand lead compounds, chemicalsknown to the State of California tocause cancer and reproductiveharm. Wash hands after handling.

Vehicle Storage

{ WARNING

Batteries have acid that can burnyou and gas that can explode.You can be badly hurt if you arenot careful. See Jump Starting onpage 10‑76 for tips on workingaround a battery withoutgetting hurt.

Infrequent Usage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery to keep the battery fromrunning down.

Extended Storage: Remove theblack, negative (−) cable from thebattery or use a battery tricklecharger.


10-28 Vehicle Care

All-Wheel Drive

Transfer Case

When to Check and ChangeLubricant

Refer to the Maintenance Scheduleto determine how often to check thelubricant and when to change it.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

How to Check Lubricant

To get an accurate reading, thevehicle should be on a levelsurface.

If the level is below the bottom ofthe fill plug hole, located on thetransfer case, the vehicle will needsome lubricant added. Add enoughlubricant to raise the level to thebottom of the fill plug hole. A fluidloss could indicate a problem; checkand have it repaired, if needed.

What to Use

Refer to Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 11‑12 todetermine what kind of lubricantto use.

Starter Switch Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check, besure there is enough roomaround the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parkingbrake and the regular brake.See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

Do not use the acceleratorpedal, and be ready to turnoff the engine immediatelyif it starts.

3. Try to start the engine in eachgear. The vehicle should startonly in P (Park) or N (Neutral).If the vehicle starts in any otherposition, contact your dealer forservice.


Vehicle Care 10-29

Automatic TransmissionShift Lock ControlFunction Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing thisinspection, the vehicle couldmove suddenly. If the vehiclemoves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before starting this check,be sure there is enough roomaround the vehicle. It shouldbe parked on a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parkingbrake. See Parking Brake onpage 9‑36.

Be ready to apply the regularbrake immediately if the vehiclebegins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn theignition on, but do not start theengine. Without applying theregular brake, try to move theshift lever out of P (Park) withnormal effort. If the shift levermoves out of P (Park), contactyour dealer for service.

Ignition TransmissionLock CheckWhile parked, and with the parkingbrake set, try to turn the ignitionto LOCK/OFF in each shift leverposition.. The ignition should turn to

LOCK/OFF only when theshift lever is in P (Park).

. The ignition key should comeout only in LOCK/OFF.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Park Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check

{ WARNING

When you are doing this check,the vehicle could begin to move.You or others could be injuredand property could be damaged.Make sure there is room in frontof the vehicle in case it begins toroll. Be ready to apply the regularbrake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

Park on a fairly steep hill, with thevehicle facing downhill. Keepingyour foot on the regular brake, setthe parking brake.. To check the parking brake's

holding ability: With the enginerunning and the transmission inN (Neutral), slowly remove footpressure from the regular brakepedal. Do this until the vehicle isheld by the parking brake only.


10-30 Vehicle Care

. To check the P (Park)mechanism's holding ability:With the engine running, shiftto P (Park). Then release theparking brake followed by theregular brake.

Contact your dealer if service isrequired.

Wiper Blade ReplacementWindshield wiper blades should beinspected for wear and cracking.See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3 for more information.

Replacement blades come indifferent types and are removedin different ways. For proper typeand length, see MaintenanceReplacement Parts on page 11‑14.

Notice: Allowing the wiper bladearm to touch the windshieldwhen no wiper blade is installedcould damage the windshield.Any damage that occurs wouldnot be covered by your warranty.Do not allow the wiper blade armto touch the windshield.

Front Wiper BladeReplacement

To replace the front wiper blades:

1. Lift the wiper arm from thewindshield until no furthermovement is possible.

2. Press the square button on thetop side, at the end of the wiperarm, and pull the wiper blade outof the end of the wiper arm.

3. Install the wiper blade connectorby sliding into the end of thewiper arm until the square buttonon the wiper blade clicks intoplace with the wiper arm.

4. Place the wiper arm with thewiper blade in place back onthe windshield.

Rear Wiper Blade Replacement

The rear wiper blade and wiperarm have a cover for protection.The cover must be removed beforethe wiper blade can be replaced.

To remove the cover:

1. Slide a plastic tool under thecover and push upward tounsnap.

2. Slide the cover towards thewiper blade tip to unhook itfrom the blade assembly.

3. Remove the cover.

4. After wiper blade replacement,ensure that cover hook slidesinto the slot in the bladeassembly.

5. Snap the cover down to secure.


Vehicle Care 10-31

To remove the wiper blade:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from thewindshield.

A. Wiper Arm

B. Release Lever

C. Blade Assembly

2. Push the release lever (B) todisengage the hook and pushthe wiper arm (A) out of theblade assembly (C).

3. Push the new blade assemblysecurely on the wiper arm untilthe release lever clicks intoplace.

4. Replace the wiper cover.

Headlamp AimingThe headlamp aiming system hasbeen preset at the factory.

If the vehicle is damaged in anaccident, the aim of the headlampsmay be affected and adjustmentmay be necessary.

It is recommended that a dealeradjust the headlamps. To re-aimthe headlamps yourself, use thefollowing procedure.

The vehicle should be properlyprepared as follows. The vehicle:. Should be placed so the

headlamps are 7.6 m (25 ft)from a light colored wall.

. Must have all four tires on alevel surface which is level allthe way to the wall.

. Should be placed so it isperpendicular to the wallor other flat surface.

. Should not have any snow, ice,or mud on it.

. Should be fully assembled andall other work stopped whileheadlamp aiming is beingperformed.

. Should be normally loaded witha full tank of fuel and one personor 75 kg (160 lbs) sitting in thedriver's seat.

. Tires should be properly inflated.

Headlamp aiming is done with thevehicle's low-beam headlamps.The high-beam headlamps will becorrectly aimed if the low-beamheadlamps are aimed properly.


10-32 Vehicle Care

To adjust the vertical aim, do thefollowing:

1. Open the hood. See Hood onpage 10‑5 for more information.

2. Locate the aim dot on the lens ofthe low‐beam headlamp.

3. Measure the distance from theground to the aim dot on thelow‐beam headlamp. Recordthe distance.

4. At the wall, measure fromthe ground upward (A) tothe recorded distance fromStep 3 and mark it.

5. Draw or tape a horizontal line (B)on the wall the width of thevehicle at the height of themark in Step 4.

Notice: Do not cover a headlampto improve beam cut-off whenaiming. Covering a headlamp maycause excessive heat build-upwhich may cause damage tothe headlamp.

6. Turn on the low-beamheadlamps and place a pieceof cardboard or equivalent infront of the headlamp not beingadjusted. This allows only thebeam of light from the headlampbeing adjusted to be seen on theflat surface.


Vehicle Care 10-33

7. Locate the vertical headlampaiming screws, which are underthe hood near each headlampassembly.

8. Turn the vertical aiming screwuntil the headlamp beamis aimed to the horizontaltape line. Turn it clockwise orcounterclockwise to raise orlower the angle of the beam.

9. Make sure that the light from theheadlamp is positioned at thebottom edge of the horizontaltape line. The lamp on theleft (A) shows the correctheadlamp aim. The lampon the right (B) shows theincorrect headlamp aim.

10. Repeat Steps 7 through 9 forthe opposite headlamp.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacementbulbs, see Replacement Bulbs onpage 10‑39.

For any bulb changing procedurenot listed in this section, contactyour dealer.


10-34 Vehicle Care

Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps

A. Low-Beam Headlamp

B. High-Beam Headlamp

C. Sidemarker Lamp

D. Park/Turn Signal Lamp

To replace one of these bulbs:

1. Turn the tire to reach the accessport cap located in the front ofwheel well cover.

A. Screw

B. Access Port Cap

2. Remove the screw (A) andturn the access port cap (B)counterclockwise to remove.

3. If replacing a headlamp bulb,remove the dust cover capfrom the back of the headlamphousing by turning the capcounterclockwise.

4. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise to removeit from the lamp assembly.

5. Remove the bulb from thesocket or disconnect the bulbassembly from the harnessconnector.

6. Install the new bulb.

7. Reinstall the bulb socketto the lamp assembly, turningclockwise.

8. Replace the dust cover cap onheadlamps.

9. Reinstall the wheel well coveraccess port cap and secure byinstalling the screw.


Vehicle Care 10-35

Fog LampsTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Locate the fog lamp assemblyunder the front facia.

2. Disconnect the bulb socket fromthe electrical connector, turn,and pull out the bulb assembly.

3. Remove the old bulb from thebulb socket and push the newbulb straight into the bulb socketuntil it connects.

4. Push the bulb socket into thefog lamp assembly and turnclockwise to lock it into place.

5. Reconnect the bulb socket to theelectrical connector.

Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Back-Up Lamps

A. Stop/Tail/Turn Signal/Sidemarker Lamp

B. Auxiliary Taillamp

C. Back-up Lamp

Stop/Tail/TurnSignal/Sidemarker Lamp

To replace one of these lamps:

1. Open the liftgate. See Liftgate(Manual) on page 2‑9 or Liftgate(Power) on page 2‑10.

2. Remove the two screw coversfrom the taillamp assembly.

3. Remove the two screwssecuring the taillamp assembly.

4. Pull the taillamp assembly out ofthe vehicle body.


10-36 Vehicle Care

5. Disconnect the lamp wiringharness.

6. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwise and pull it out.

7. Pull the bulb straight out of thesocket.


9. Push the bulb socket in and turnit clockwise.

10. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 toreinstall the lamp assembly.

11. Verify that the taillampassembly tab, located atthe bottom of the taillampassembly, is aligned to thefacia bracket before securingwith screws.

Auxiliary Taillamp



2. Remove the interior trim accesspanel.

A. Attachment Nuts

B. Retaining Hook

3. Remove the five attachmentnuts (A) securing the taillampassembly to the liftgate.

4. Disengage the retaining hook (B)and pull the taillamp assemblyout of the vehicle liftgate.

5. Disconnect the lamp wiringharness.


Vehicle Care 10-37





10. Reverse Steps 2 through 5 toreinstall lamp assembly.

Back–Up Lamp

Removal of the lamp assembly isnot required to replace the back-uplamp bulb.



2. Remove the interior trim accesspanel.





7. Reinstall the interior trim accesspanel.


10-38 Vehicle Care

License Plate LampTo replace one of these bulbs:

1. Open the liftgate partway. SeeLiftgate (Manual) on page 2‑9 orLiftgate (Power) on page 2‑10.

Passenger Side Shown,Driver Side Similar

2. Push the left end of the lampassembly toward the right.

3. Pull the lamp assembly down toremove it from the liftgate.

A. Bulb Socket

B. Bulb

C. Lamp Assembly

4. Turn the bulb socket (A)counterclockwise to remove itfrom the lamp assembly (C).

5. Pull the bulb (B) straight out ofthe bulb socket.

6. Push the replacement bulbstraight into the bulb socket andturn the bulb socket clockwise toinstall into lamp assembly.

7. Turn the lamp assembly into theliftgate engaging the clip sidefirst.

8. Push on the lamp side oppositethe clip until the lamp assemblysnaps into place.


Vehicle Care 10-39

Replacement Bulbs

Exterior LampBulb

Number

Auxiliary Taillamp 161

Back-Up Lamp 921LL

Fog Lamp H11

HeadlampHigh Beam

9005LL

HeadlampLow Beam

H11

License Plate Lamp 168LL(W5WLL)

Parking Lamp/Turn Signal Front

7444NA

Sidemarker Front 194

Taillamp/TurnSignal Lamp/StopLamp/Sidemarker

3057K

For replacement bulbs not listedhere, contact your dealer.

Electrical System

FusesThe wiring circuits in the vehicleare protected from short circuitsby fuses. This greatly reducesthe chance of damage caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored bandinside the fuse. If the band is brokenor melted, replace the fuse. Be sureto replace a bad fuse with a newone of the identical size and rating.

Replace a bad fuse with a new oneof the identical size and rating.

If there is a problem on the roadand a fuse needs to be replaced,the same amperage fuse can beborrowed. Choose some feature ofthe vehicle that is not needed to useand replace it as soon as possible.

There are two fuse blocks inthe vehicle: one in the enginecompartment and one in theinstrument panel.

There is a fuse puller located inthe engine compartment fuse block.See Engine Compartment FuseBlock on page 10‑40. It can be usedto easily remove fuses from the fuseblock.


10-40 Vehicle Care

Engine CompartmentFuse Block

To remove the fuse block cover,squeeze the clips on the coverand lift it straight up. See EngineCompartment Overview onpage 10‑6.

Notice: Spilling liquid on anyelectrical component on thevehicle may damage it. Alwayskeep the covers on any electricalcomponent.

Engine Compartment Fuse Block

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

J-CaseFuses

Usage

1 Cool Fan 1

2 Cool Fan 2

3 Brake Booster


Vehicle Care 10-41

J-CaseFuses

Usage

4PowerWindows – Right

5Memory SeatModule

6 Power Seat – Left

7Instrument PanelFuse Block 1

8 Rear Defogger

9 Starter

10 AIR Pump Motor

11 Instrument PanelFuse Block 2

12 Sunroof

J-CaseFuses

Usage

13Antilock BrakeSystem Pump

14Instrument PanelFuse Block 3

15PowerWindows – Left

16Antilock BrakeSystem Module

Mini Fuses Usage

17TransmissionControl ModuleBattery

18 Trailer Parking Light

19 AIR Pump Solenoid

Mini Fuses Usage

20 Engine ControlModule Battery

21 Canister Vent

22Trailer Left Side(If Equipped)

23 Lift Gate Module

24 Power Lumbar

25Trailer Right Side(If Equipped)

26Rear AccessoryPower Outlet

27 Memory MirrorModule

28Regulated VoltageControl BatterySensor


10-42 Vehicle Care

Mini Fuses Usage

29 Front Wiper

30 Rear Wiper

31Air ConditioningCompressor

32 Rear Latch

33 Heated Mirrors

34 Horn

35Right High‐BeamHeadlamp

36Left High‐BeamHeadlamp

37 Ignition Even Coil

38 Ignition Odd Coil

39 Windshield Washer

Mini Fuses Usage

40 Front Fog Lamps

41Post CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

42Engine ControlModule

43Pre–CatalyticConverter OxygenSensor

44TransmissionControl Module

45 Mirror

46Chassis ControlModule Ignition

47 Spare

Mini Fuses Usage

48 Rear Drive Module

49Lift Gate ModuleLogic

50Instrument PanelFuse Block Ignition

51 Heated Seat – Front

52Chassis ControlModule

53Engine ControlModule

54 Rear Vision Camera

Midi Fuse Usage

55Electric PowerSteering


Vehicle Care 10-43

MicroRelays

Usage

56 AIR Pump Solenoid

57 Brake Booster

58 Cooling Fan Low

59HeadlampHigh Beam

60 Cooling Fan Control

61Wiper On/OffControl

62Air ConditioningCompressor

MicroRelays

Usage

63 Rear Defogger

64 Wiper Speed

65 Fog Lamp

66 Engine Control

67 Starter

68 Run/Crank

Mini Relays Usage

69 Cooling Fan High

70 AIR Pump Motor

Instrument Panel FuseBlock

The instrument panel fuse blockis located on the passenger sidepanel of the center console.


10-44 Vehicle Care

To access the fuses, open the fusepanel door from the passenger sideby pulling it out.

To reinstall the door, insert thetabs on the top of the door into theconsole first, then push the doorback into its original location.

The vehicle may not be equippedwith all of the fuses, relays, andfeatures shown.

Instrument Panel Fuse Block

Mini Fuses Usage

1 Steering WheelDimming

2 Spare

3 Spare

4Body ControlModule 1

5 Infotainment


7Noise ControlModule

8 Body ControlModule 4

9 Radio

10Special EquipmentOrder Battery

11Ultrasonic RearParking AssistModule


Vehicle Care 10-45

Mini Fuses Usage

12Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningBattery

13Auxiliary PowerFront

14Heater, Ventilationand Air ConditioningIgnition

15 Display


17 AuxiliaryPower Rear

18Instrument PanelCluster Ignition

19Personal DeviceInterface Module


21Special EquipmentOrder RetainedAccessory Power

Mini Fuses Usage

22Sensing andDiagnostic ModuleIgnition

23 Spare

24 Spare

25Transmission GearShift PositionIndicator

26 Spare

27 Spare

28 Spare

30 Body ControlModule 3

31 Amplifier

32Discrete LogicIgnition Switch

33CommunicationsIntegration Module


Mini Fuses Usage

35Sensing andDiagnostic ModuleBattery

36Data LinkConnection

37Instrument PanelCluster Battery

38Passenger SensingSystem Module

39 Spare

J‐CaseFuses

Usage

29 Front Blower Motor


Relays Usage

41Logistic Relay(If Equipped)

42Retained AccessoryPower Relay


10-46 Vehicle Care

Wheels and Tires

TiresEvery new GM vehicle hashigh-quality tires made bya leading tire manufacturer.See the warranty manualfor information regardingthe tire warranty and whereto get service. For additionalinformation refer to the tiremanufacturer.

{ WARNING

. Poorly maintained andimproperly used tires aredangerous.

. Overloading the tires cancause overheating as aresult of too much flexing.There could be a blowout anda serious crash. See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑18.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Underinflated tires pose thesame danger as overloadedtires. The resulting crashcould cause serious injury.Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommendedpressure. Tire pressureshould be checked whenthe tires are cold.

. Overinflated tires are morelikely to be cut, punctured,or broken by a suddenimpact — such as whenhitting a pothole. Keep tires atthe recommended pressure.

. Worn or old tires can causea crash. If the tread is badlyworn, replace them.

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

. Replace any tires that havebeen damaged by impactswith potholes, curbs, etc.

. Improperly repaired tirescan cause a crash. Only thedealer or an authorized tireservice center should repair,replace, dismount, and mountthe tires.

. Do not spin the tires inexcess of 55 km/h (35 mph)on slippery surfaces suchas snow, mud, ice, etc.Excessive spinning maycause the tires to explode.


Vehicle Care 10-47

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about atire is molded into its sidewall.The examples show a typicalpassenger vehicle tire and acompact spare tire sidewall.

Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire Example

(A) Tire Size: The tire sizeis a combination of lettersand numbers used to define aparticular tire's width, height,

aspect ratio, construction type,and service description. See the“Tire Size” illustration later in thissection for more detail.

(B) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

(C) DOT (Departmentof Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation(DOT) code indicates thatthe tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Departmentof Transportation MotorVehicle Safety Standards.

(D) Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN): The lettersand numbers following the DOT(Department of Transportation)code are the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and date the tirewas manufactured. The TIN ismolded onto both sides of thetire, although only one side mayhave the date of manufacture.

(E) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(F) Uniform Tire QualityGrading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are requiredto grade tires based on threeperformance factors: treadwear,traction, and temperatureresistance. For more informationsee Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑63.


10-48 Vehicle Care

(G) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

Compact Spare Tire Example

(A) Tire Ply Material: The typeof cord and number of plies inthe sidewall and under the tread.

(B) Temporary Use Only:The compact spare tire ortemporary use tire has a treadlife of approximately 5 000 km(3,000 mi) and should not bedriven at speeds over 105 km/h(65 mph). The compact sparetire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost airand gone flat. If the vehiclehas a compact spare tire,see Compact Spare Tire onpage 10‑75 and If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑67.

(C) Tire Identification Number(TIN): The letters and numbersfollowing the DOT (Departmentof Transportation) code are theTire Identification Number (TIN).

The TIN shows themanufacturer and plantcode, tire size, and datethe tire was manufactured.The TIN is molded onto bothsides of the tire, although onlyone side may have the dateof manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold InflationLoad Limit: Maximum loadthat can be carried and themaximum pressure neededto support that load.

(E) Tire Inflation: Thetemporary use tire or compactspare tire should be inflatedto 420 kPa (60 psi). For moreinformation on tire pressure andinflation see Tire Pressure onpage 10‑53.


Vehicle Care 10-49

(F) Tire Size: A combination ofletters and numbers define atire's width, height, aspect ratio,construction type, and servicedescription. The letter T as thefirst character in the tire sizemeans the tire is for temporaryuse only.

(G) TPC Spec (TirePerformance CriteriaSpecification): Originalequipment tires designed toGM's specific tire performancecriteria have a TPC specificationcode molded onto the sidewall.GM's TPC specifications meetor exceed all federal safetyguidelines.

Tire Designations

Tire Size

The following is an exampleof a typical passenger vehicletire size.

(A) Passenger (P‐Metric) Tire:The United States version ofa metric tire sizing system.The letter P as the firstcharacter in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicletire engineered to standardsset by the U.S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three‐digitnumber indicates the tire sectionwidth in millimeters fromsidewall to sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two‐digitnumber that indicates the tireheight‐to‐width measurements.For example, if the tire sizeaspect ratio is 60, as shown initem C of the illustration, it wouldmean that the tire's sidewall is60 percent as high as it is wide.

(D) Construction Code: Aletter code is used to indicatethe type of ply construction inthe tire. The letter R meansradial ply construction; theletter D means diagonal orbias ply construction; and theletter B means belted‐bias plyconstruction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter ofthe wheel in inches.


10-50 Vehicle Care

(F) Service Description: Thesecharacters represent the loadindex and speed rating of thetire. The load index representsthe load carrying capacity a tireis certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed atire is certified to carry a load.

Tire Terminology andDefinitionsAir Pressure: The amountof air inside the tire pressingoutward on each square inchof the tire. Air pressure isexpressed in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch).

Accessory Weight: Thecombined weight of optionalaccessories. Some examplesof optional accessories areautomatic transmission, powersteering, power brakes, powerwindows, power seats, and airconditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationshipof a tire's height to its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer ofcords that is located betweenthe plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel orother reinforcing materials.

Bead: The tire bead containssteel wires wrapped by steelcords that hold the tire ontothe rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the plies are laidat alternate angles less than90 degrees to the centerlineof the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: Theamount of air pressure in a tire,measured in kPa (kilopascal)or psi (pounds per square inch)before a tire has built up heatfrom driving. See Tire Pressureon page 10‑53.

Curb Weight: The weight of amotor vehicle with standard andoptional equipment includingthe maximum capacity of fuel,oil, and coolant, but withoutpassengers and cargo.

DOT Markings: A codemolded into the sidewall ofa tire signifying that the tireis in compliance with the U.S.Department of Transportation(DOT) Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire IdentificationNumber (TIN), an alphanumericdesignator which can alsoidentify the tire manufacturer,production plant, brand, anddate of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle WeightRating. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑18.


Vehicle Care 10-51

GAWR FRT: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the front axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑18.

GAWR RR: Gross AxleWeight Rating for the rear axle.See Vehicle Load Limits onpage 9‑18.

Intended Outboard Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tire,that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metricunit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT‐Metric) Tire: Atire used on light duty trucks andsome multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assignednumber ranging from 1 to 279that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure:The maximum air pressure towhich a cold tire can be inflated.The maximum air pressure ismolded onto the sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating:The load rating for a tire at themaximum permissible inflationpressure for that tire.

Maximum Loaded VehicleWeight: The sum of curbweight, accessory weight,vehicle capacity weight, andproduction options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: Thenumber of occupants a vehicleis designed to seat multipliedby 68 kg (150 lbs). See VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑18.

Occupant Distribution:Designated seating positions.

Outward Facing Sidewall:The side of an asymmetrical tirethat has a particular side thatfaces outward when mountedon a vehicle. The side of thetire that contains a whitewall,bears white lettering, or bearsmanufacturer, brand, and/ormodel name molding that ishigher or deeper than thesame moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire:A tire used on passenger carsand some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended InflationPressure: Vehiclemanufacturer's recommendedtire inflation pressure asshown on the tire placard.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑53 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑18.


10-52 Vehicle Care

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatictire in which the ply cords thatextend to the beads are laid at90 degrees to the centerline ofthe tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tireand upon which the tire beadsare seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tirebetween the tread and the bead.

Speed Rating: Analphanumeric code assigned toa tire indicating the maximumspeed at which a tire canoperate.

Traction: The friction betweenthe tire and the road surface.The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tirethat comes into contact withthe road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrowbands, sometimes called wearbars, that show across thetread of a tire when only 1.6 mm(1/16 in) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑60.

UTQGS (Uniform TireQuality Grading Standards):A tire information systemthat provides consumerswith ratings for a tire's traction,temperature, and treadwear.Ratings are determinedby tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of the tire.See Uniform Tire QualityGrading on page 10‑63.

Vehicle Capacity Weight:The number of designatedseating positions multiplied by68 kg (150 lbs) plus the ratedcargo load. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑18.

Vehicle Maximum Load on theTire: Load on an individual tiredue to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, andcargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A labelpermanently attached to avehicle showing the vehiclecapacity weight and theoriginal equipment tire sizeand recommended inflationpressure. See “Tire and LoadingInformation Label” under VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑18.


Vehicle Care 10-53

Tire PressureTires need the correct amountof air pressure to operateeffectively.

Notice: Neither tireunderinflation noroverinflation is good.Underinflated tires, or tiresthat do not have enough air,can result in:. Tire overloading andoverheating which couldlead to a blowout.

. Premature orirregular wear.

. Poor handling.

. Reduced fuel economy.

Overinflated tires, or tiresthat have too much air, canresult in:. Unusual wear.. Poor handling.. Rough ride.. Needless damage fromroad hazards.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label on thevehicle indicates the originalequipment tires and the correctcold tire inflation pressures.The recommended pressureis the minimum air pressureneeded to support the vehicle'smaximum load carrying capacity.

For additional informationregarding how much weightthe vehicle can carry, and anexample of the Tire and LoadingInformation label, see VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑18.How the vehicle is loadedaffects vehicle handling andride comfort. Never load thevehicle with more weight thanit was designed to carry.

When to Check

Check the tires once a monthor more. Do not forget thecompact spare tire, if the vehiclehas one. The cold compactspare should be at 420 kPa(60 psi). For additionalinformation regarding thecompact spare tire, seeCompact Spare Tire onpage 10‑75.


10-54 Vehicle Care

How to Check

Use a good quality pocket-typegauge to check tire pressure.Proper tire inflation cannot bedetermined by looking at the tire.Check the tire inflation pressurewhen the tires are cold, meaningthe vehicle has not been drivenfor at least three hours or nomore than 1.6 km (1 mi).

Remove the valve cap from thetire valve stem. Press the tiregauge firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement.If the cold tire inflation pressurematches the recommendedpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label, nofurther adjustment is necessary.If the inflation pressure is low,add air until the recommendedpressure is reached. If theinflation pressure is high, presson the metal stem in the centerof the tire valve to release air.

Re‐check the tire pressure withthe tire gauge.

Return the valve caps on thevalve stems to prevent leaksand keep out dirt and moisture.

Tire Pressure MonitorSystemThe Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS) uses radio and sensortechnology to check tire pressurelevels. The TPMS sensors monitorthe air pressure in your tires andtransmit tire pressure readings toa receiver located in the vehicle.

Each tire, including the spare(if provided), should be checkedmonthly when cold and inflated tothe inflation pressure recommendedby the vehicle manufacturer onthe vehicle placard or tire inflationpressure label. (If your vehicle hastires of a different size than the size

indicated on the vehicle placard ortire inflation pressure label, youshould determine the proper tireinflation pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, yourvehicle has been equipped with atire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) that illuminates a lowtire pressure telltale when one ormore of your tires is significantlyunder‐inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tirepressure telltale illuminates, youshould stop and check your tires assoon as possible, and inflate themto the proper pressure. Driving ona significantly under‐inflated tirecauses the tire to overheat and canlead to tire failure. Under‐inflationalso reduces fuel efficiency andtire tread life, and may affect thevehicle's handling and stoppingability.


Vehicle Care 10-55

Please note that the TPMSis not a substitute for proper tiremaintenance, and it is the driver'sresponsibility to maintain correcttire pressure, even if under‐inflationhas not reached the level to triggerillumination of the TPMS low tirepressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also beenequipped with a TPMS malfunctionindicator to indicate when thesystem is not operating properly.The TPMS malfunction indicator iscombined with the low tire pressuretelltale. When the system detects amalfunction, the telltale will flash forapproximately one minute and thenremain continuously illuminated.This sequence will continue uponsubsequent vehicle start‐ups aslong as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicatoris illuminated, the system may notbe able to detect or signal lowtire pressure as intended. TPMSmalfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installationof replacement or alternate tires orwheels on the vehicle that preventthe TPMS from functioning properly.Always check the TPMS malfunctiontelltale after replacing one or moretires or wheels on your vehicle toensure that the replacement oralternate tires and wheels allowthe TPMS to continue to functionproperly.

See Tire Pressure MonitorOperation on page 10‑55 foradditional information.

Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rulesand with Industry CanadaStandards

See Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) Rules andwith Industry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Tire Pressure MonitorOperationThis vehicle may have a TirePressure Monitor System (TPMS).The TPMS is designed to warn thedriver when a low tire pressurecondition exists. TPMS sensors aremounted onto each tire and wheelassembly, excluding the spare tireand wheel assembly. The TPMSsensors monitor the air pressurein the tires and transmits the tirepressure readings to a receiverlocated in the vehicle.

When a low tire pressure conditionis detected, the TPMS illuminatesthe low tire pressure warning lightlocated on the instrument cluster.


10-56 Vehicle Care

If the warning light comes on,stop as soon as possible andinflate the tires to the recommendedpressure shown on the tire loadinginformation label. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑18.

A message to check the pressure ina specific tire displays in the DriverInformation Center (DIC). The lowtire pressure warning light and theDIC warning message come on ateach ignition cycle until the tiresare inflated to the correct inflationpressure. Using the DIC, tirepressure levels can be viewed.For additional information anddetails about the DIC operationand displays see Driver InformationCenter (DIC) on page 5‑23.

The low tire pressure warninglight may come on in cool weatherwhen the vehicle is first started, andthen turn off as the vehicle is driven.This could be an early indicator thatthe air pressure is getting low andneeds to be inflated to the properpressure.

A Tire and Loading Informationlabel shows the size of the originalequipment tires and the correctinflation pressure for the tires whenthey are cold. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑18, for an exampleof the Tire and Loading Informationlabel and its location. Also see TirePressure on page 10‑53.

The TPMS can warn abouta low tire pressure conditionbut it does not replace normaltire maintenance. See TireInspection on page 10‑59,Tire Rotation on page 10‑59and Tires on page 10‑46.

Notice: Tire sealant materials arenot all the same. A non-approvedtire sealant could damage theTPMS sensors. TPMS sensordamage caused by usingan incorrect tire sealant isnot covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always use onlythe GM-approved tire sealantavailable through your dealeror included in the vehicle.

TPMS Malfunction Light andMessage

The TPMS will not function properlyif one or more of the TPMS sensorsare missing or inoperable. Whenthe system detects a malfunction,the low tire pressure warning lightflashes for about one minute andthen stays on for the remainder ofthe ignition cycle. A DIC warningmessage also displays. The lowtire pressure warning light and DICwarning message come on at eachignition cycle until the problem iscorrected. Some of the conditionsthat can cause these to comeon are:. One of the road tires has been

replaced with the spare tire.The spare tire does not have aTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and DIC message shouldgo off after the road tire isreplaced and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See "TPMS SensorMatching Process" later in thissection.


Vehicle Care 10-57

. The TPMS sensor matchingprocess was not done ornot completed successfullyafter rotating the tires.The malfunction light andthe DIC message should gooff after successfully completingthe sensor matching process.See "TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess" later in this section

. One or more TPMS sensorsare missing or damaged.The DIC message and theTPMS malfunction light shouldgo off when the TPMS sensorsare installed and the sensormatching process is performedsuccessfully. See your dealerfor service.

. Replacement tires or wheels donot match the original equipmenttires or wheels. Tires and wheelsother than those recommendedcould prevent the TPMS fromfunctioning properly. See BuyingNew Tires on page 10‑61.

. Operating electronic devices orbeing near facilities using radiowave frequencies similar to theTPMS could cause the TPMSsensors to malfunction.

If the TPMS is not functioningproperly, it cannot detect or signal alow tire condition. See your dealerfor service if the TPMS malfunctionlight and DIC message comes onand stays on.

TPMS Sensor MatchingProcess

Each TPMS sensor has a uniqueidentification code. The identificationcode needs to be matched to a newtire/wheel position after rotating thetires or replacing one or more of theTPMS sensors. The TPMS sensormatching process should also beperformed after replacing a sparetire with a road tire containing theTPMS sensor. The malfunctionlight and the DIC message shouldgo off at the next ignition cycle.The sensors are matched to thetire/wheel positions, using a TPMSrelearn tool, in the following order:driver side front tire, passenger sidefront tire, passenger side rear tire,and driver side rear. See yourdealer for service or to purchasea relearn tool.


10-58 Vehicle Care

There are two minutes to matchthe first tire/wheel position, andfive minutes overall to match allfour tire/wheel positions. If it takeslonger, the matching process stopsand must be restarted.

The TPMS sensor matchingprocess is:

1. Set the parking brake.


3. Use the MENU button toselect the Vehicle InformationMenu in the Driver InformationCenter (DIC). Use the arrowkeys to scroll to the TirePressure screen.

4. Press the SET/CLR button tobegin the sensor matchingprocess.

A message requestingacceptance of the processshould display.

5. Press the SET/CLR button againto confirm the selection.

The horn sounds twice tosignal the receiver is in relearnmode and the TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message displays onthe DIC screen.

6. Start with the driver sidefront tire.

7. Place the relearn tool againstthe tire sidewall, near the valvestem. Then press the buttonto activate the TPMS sensor.A horn chirp confirms that thesensor identification code hasbeen matched to this tire andwheel position.

8. Proceed to the passengerside front tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

9. Proceed to the passengerside rear tire, and repeat theprocedure in Step 7.

10. Proceed to the driver side reartire, and repeat the procedurein Step 7. The horn sounds twotimes to indicate the sensoridentification code has beenmatched to the driver side reartire, and the TPMS sensormatching process is no longeractive. The TIRE LEARNINGACTIVE message on the DICdisplay screen goes off.

11. Turn the ignition to LOCK/OFF.

12. Set all four tires to therecommended air pressurelevel as indicated on the Tireand Loading Information label.


Vehicle Care 10-59

Tire InspectionWe recommend that the tires,including the spare tire, if thevehicle has one, be inspectedfor signs of wear or damage atleast once a month.

Replace the tire if:. The indicators at three or

more places around the tirecan be seen.

. There is cord or fabricshowing through the tire'srubber.

. The tread or sidewall iscracked, cut, or snaggeddeep enough to show cordor fabric.

. The tire has a bump, bulge,or split.

. The tire has a puncture, cut,or other damage that cannotbe repaired well because ofthe size or location of thedamage.

Tire RotationTires should be rotatedevery 12 000 km (7,500 mi).See Maintenance Schedule onpage 11‑3.

Tires are rotated to achievea uniform wear for all tires.The first rotation is the mostimportant.

Any time unusual wear isnoticed, rotate the tires assoon as possible and checkthe wheel alignment. Also checkfor damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for NewTires on page 10‑60 and WheelReplacement on page 10‑65.

Use this rotation pattern whenrotating the tires.

Do not include the compactspare tire in the tire rotation.

Adjust the front and rear tiresto the recommended inflationpressure on the Tire andLoading Information label afterthe tires have been rotated.


10-60 Vehicle Care

See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑53 and VehicleLoad Limits on page 9‑18.

Reset the Tire Pressure MonitorSystem. See Tire PressureMonitor Operation onpage 10‑55.

Check that all wheel nuts areproperly tightened. See “WheelNut Torque” under Capacitiesand Specifications onpage 12‑2.

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. When

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

changing a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, a cloth ora paper towel can be used;however, use a scraper or wirebrush later to remove all rustor dirt.

Lightly coat the center of thewheel hub with wheel bearinggrease after a wheel change ortire rotation to prevent corrosionor rust build-up. Do not getgrease on the flat wheelmounting surface or on thewheel nuts or bolts.

When It Is Time for NewTiresFactors such as maintenance,temperatures, driving speeds,vehicle loading, and road conditionsaffect the wear rate of the tires.

Treadwear indicators are one wayto tell when it is time for new tires.Treadwear indicators appear whenthe tires have only 1.6 mm (1/16 in)or less of tread remaining. See TireInspection on page 10‑59 and TireRotation on page 10‑59 for moreinformation.


Vehicle Care 10-61

The rubber in tires ages over time.This also applies for the spare tire,if the vehicle has one, even if it isnever used. Multiple conditionsincluding temperatures, loadingconditions, and inflation pressuremaintenance affect how fast agingtakes place. Tires will typically needto be replaced due to wear beforethey may need to be replaceddue to age. Consult the tiremanufacturer for more informationon when tires should be replaced.

Vehicle Storage

Tires age when stored normallymounted on a parked vehicle.Park a vehicle that will be storedfor at least a month in a cool, dry,clean area away from direct sunlightto slow aging. This area should befree of grease, gasoline, or othersubstances that can deterioraterubber.

Parking for an extended periodcan cause flat spots on the tiresthat may result in vibrations whiledriving. When storing a vehicle forat least a month, remove the tiresor raise the vehicle to reduce theweight from the tires.

Buying New TiresGM has developed andmatched specific tires forthe vehicle. The originalequipment tires installed weredesigned to meet GeneralMotors Tire PerformanceCriteria Specification(TPC Spec) system rating.When replacement tiresare needed, GM stronglyrecommends buying tires withthe same TPC Spec rating.

GM's exclusive TPC Specsystem considers over adozen critical specifications thatimpact the overall performanceof the vehicle, including brakesystem performance, ride andhandling, traction control,and tire pressure monitoringperformance. GM's TPC Specnumber is molded onto the tire'ssidewall near the tire size. If thetires have an all‐season treaddesign, the TPC Spec numberwill be followed by MS for mudand snow. See Tire SidewallLabeling on page 10‑47 foradditional information.


10-62 Vehicle Care

GM recommends replacingall the tires at the same time.Uniform tread depth on alltires will help to maintainthe performance of thevehicle. Braking and handlingperformance may be adverselyaffected if all the tires are notreplaced at the same time. SeeTire Inspection on page 10‑59and Tire Rotation on page 10‑59for information on proper tirerotation.

{ WARNING

Tires could explode duringimproper service. Attemptingto mount or dismount a tirecould cause injury or death.Only your dealer or authorizedtire service center shouldmount or dismount the tires.

{ WARNING

Mixing tires of different sizes,brands, or types may causeloss of control of the vehicle,resulting in a crash or othervehicle damage. Use thecorrect size, brand, and typeof tires on all wheels.

{ WARNING

Using bias-ply tires on thevehicle may cause the wheelrim flanges to develop cracksafter many miles of driving.A tire and/or wheel could failsuddenly and cause a crash.Use only radial-ply tires withthe wheels on the vehicle.

If the vehicle tires must bereplaced with a tire that doesnot have a TPC Spec number,make sure they are the samesize, load range, speed rating,and construction (radial) as theoriginal tires.

Vehicles that have a tirepressure monitoring systemcould give an inaccuratelow‐pressure warning if non‐TPCSpec rated tires are installed.See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 10‑54.

The Tire and LoadingInformation label indicatesthe original equipment tires onthe vehicle. See Vehicle LoadLimits on page 9‑18 for the labellocation and more informationabout the Tire and LoadingInformation label.


Vehicle Care 10-63

Different Size Tires andWheelsIf wheels or tires are installed thatare a different size than the originalequipment wheels and tires, vehicleperformance, including its braking,ride and handling characteristics,stability, and resistance to rollovermay be affected. If the vehicle haselectronic systems such as antilockbrakes, rollover airbags, tractioncontrol, and electronic stabilitycontrol, the performance of thesesystems can also be affected.

{ WARNING

If different sized wheels are used,there may not be an acceptablelevel of performance and safetyif tires not recommended forthose wheels are selected.This increases the chanceof a crash and serious injury.Only use GM specific wheeland tire systems developedfor the vehicle, and have themproperly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires onpage 10‑61 and Accessoriesand Modifications on page 10‑3for additional information.

Uniform Tire QualityGradingQuality grades can be foundwhere applicable on the tiresidewall between tread shoulderand maximum section width.For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AATemperature A

The following information relatesto the system developed by theUnited States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA), which grades tiresby treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance.This applies only to vehiclessold in the United States.


10-64 Vehicle Care

The grades are molded on thesidewalls of most passengercar tires. The Uniform TireQuality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deeptread, winter-type snow tires,space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominalrim diameters of 10 to 12 inches(25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available onGeneral Motors passengercars and light trucks may varywith respect to these grades,they must also conform tofederal safety requirements andadditional General Motors TirePerformance Criteria (TPC)standards.

All Passenger Car Tires MustConform to Federal SafetyRequirements In AdditionTo These Grades.

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is acomparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tirewhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedgovernment test course.For example, a tire graded150 would wear one and ahalf (1½) times as well onthe government course asa tire graded 100. The relativeperformance of tires dependsupon the actual conditions oftheir use, however, and maydepart significantly from thenorm due to variations indriving habits, service practicesand differences in roadcharacteristics and climate.

Traction – AA, A, B, C

The traction grades, fromhighest to lowest, are AA, A, B,and C. Those grades representthe tire's ability to stop onwet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditionson specified governmenttest surfaces of asphalt andconcrete. A tire marked C mayhave poor traction performance.Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is basedon straight-ahead brakingtraction tests, and does notinclude acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak tractioncharacteristics.


Vehicle Care 10-65

Temperature – A, B, C

The temperature gradesare A (the highest), B, and C,representing the tire's resistanceto the generation of heat andits ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specifiedindoor laboratory test wheel.Sustained high temperaturecan cause the material ofthe tire to degenerate andreduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to suddentire failure. The grade Ccorresponds to a level ofperformance which allpassenger car tires must meetunder the Federal Motor SafetyStandard No. 109. Grades Band A represent higher levels ofperformance on the laboratorytest wheel than the minimumrequired by law. Warning: The

temperature grade for this tireis established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessiveloading, either separately or incombination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and TireBalanceThe tires and wheels werealigned and balanced at thefactory to provide the longest tirelife and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment andtire balancing will not be necessaryon a regular basis. However, checkthe alignment if there is unusual tirewear or if the vehicle is pulling toone side or the other. If the vehiclevibrates when driving on a smoothroad, the tires and wheels mightneed to be rebalanced. See yourdealer for proper diagnosis.

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent,cracked, or badly rusted orcorroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, andwheel nuts should be replaced.If the wheel leaks air, replace it.Some aluminum wheels can berepaired. See your dealer if anyof these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind ofwheel that is needed.

Each new wheel should havethe same load-carrying capacity,diameter, width, offset, and bemounted the same way as theone it replaces.


10-66 Vehicle Care

Replace wheels, wheel bolts,wheel nuts, or Tire Pressure MonitorSystem (TPMS) sensors with newGM original equipment parts.

{ WARNING

Using the wrong replacementwheels, wheel bolts, or wheelnuts can be dangerous. It couldaffect the braking and handlingof the vehicle. Tires can lose air,and cause loss of control, causinga crash. Always use the correctwheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel canalso cause problems with bearinglife, brake cooling, speedometeror odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height,vehicle ground clearance, andtire or tire chain clearance tothe body and chassis.

See If a Tire Goes Flat onpage 10‑67 for more information.

Used Replacement Wheels

{ WARNING

Replacing a wheel with a usedone is dangerous. How it hasbeen used or how far it has beendriven may be unknown. It couldfail suddenly and cause a crash.When replacing wheels, use anew GM original equipmentwheel.

Tire Chains

{ WARNING

Do not use tire chains. There isnot enough clearance. Tire chainsused on a vehicle without theproper amount of clearance cancause damage to the brakes,suspension or other vehicle parts.The area damaged by the tire

(Continued)

WARNING (Continued)

chains could cause you to losecontrol of the vehicle and you orothers may be injured in a crash.

A Type S low-profile cablecan be used only if the cablemanufacturer recommendsit for use on the vehicle,the tire size combination, androad conditions. Follow themanufacturer's instructions.To help avoid damage to thevehicle, drive slowly, readjust orremove the cable if it is contactingthe vehicle and do not spin thevehicle's tires. Install the cableson the front tires only. Cablesshould not be installed on thespare tire or on the optional19-inch tire.


Vehicle Care 10-67

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blow outwhile driving, especially if the tiresare maintained properly. If air goesout of a tire, it is much more likely toleak out slowly. But if there ever is ablowout, here are a few tips aboutwhat to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tirecreates a drag that pulls the vehicletoward that side. Take your footoff the accelerator pedal and gripthe steering wheel firmly. Steer tomaintain lane position, and thengently brake to a stop, well off theroad, if possible.

A rear blowout, particularly on acurve, acts much like a skid andmay require the same correctionas used in a skid. Stop pressingthe accelerator pedal and steerto straighten the vehicle. It maybe very bumpy and noisy. Gentlybrake to a stop, well off the road,if possible.

{ WARNING

Driving on a flat tire will causepermanent damage to the tire.Re-inflating a tire after it hasbeen driven on while severelyunderinflated or flat may causea blowout and a serious crash.Never attempt to re-inflate a tirethat has been driven on whileseverely underinflated or flat.Have your dealer or an authorizedtire service center repair orreplace the flat tire as soonas possible.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, avoid further tireand wheel damage by driving slowlyto a level place, well off the road,if possible. Turn on the hazardwarning flashers. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 6‑3.


10-68 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Changing a tire can bedangerous. The vehicle canslip off the jack and roll overor fall causing injury or death.Find a level place to change thetire. To help prevent the vehiclefrom moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.

2. Put an automatictransmission in P (Park)or a manual transmissionin 1 (First) or R (Reverse).

3. Turn off the engine and donot restart while the vehicleis raised.

4. Do not allow passengers toremain in the vehicle.

5. Place wheel blocks onboth sides of the tire at theopposite corner of the tirebeing changed.

When the vehicle has a flat tire (B),use the following example as aguide to assist in the placement ofthe wheel blocks (A).

A. Wheel Block

B. Flat Tire

The following information explainshow to repair or change a tire.

Tire Changing

Removing the Spare Tireand Tools

To access the spare tire and tools:


2. Lift the load floor up.

Coin/Pierce Jack with One-PieceWrench

A. Extension

B. Wheel Wrench

C. Jack


Vehicle Care 10-69

Hex-Head Jack with Three-PieceWrench

A. Wheel Wrench

B. Jack

3. If you have a coin/piercejack and one-piece wrench,remove the extension (A),wheel wrench (B) and jack (C).

If you have a hex-head jack andthree-piece wrench, remove thewheel wrench (A) and jack (B).

Place the tools next to the tirebeing changed.

4. Turn the retainer nutcounterclockwise andremove the spare tire.

5. Place the spare tire next to thetire being changed.

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire

1. Do a safety check beforeproceeding. See If a Tire GoesFlat on page 10‑67 for moreinformation.

2. For vehicles with a wheel coveror center cap, pull the cover orcenter cap away from the wheelto remove it. Store the wheelcover in the cargo area until youhave the flat tire repaired orreplaced.

3. Turn the wheel wrenchcounterclockwise to loosenall the wheel nuts, but do notremove them yet.


10-70 Vehicle Care

Notice: Make sure that the jacklift head is in the correct positionor you may damage your vehicle.The repairs would not be coveredby your warranty.

4. Position the jack lift head at thejack location nearest the flat tire.The location is indicated by amark on the bottom edge ofthe front and rear door plasticmolding. The jack must not beused in any other position.

5. Place the jack notch under theframe rail seam.

{ WARNING

Getting under a vehicle when itis jacked up is dangerous. If thevehicle slips off the jack, youcould be badly injured or killed.Never get under a vehicle whenit is supported only by a jack.

{ WARNING

Raising the vehicle with thejack improperly positioned candamage the vehicle and evenmake the vehicle fall. To helpavoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jacklift head into the proper locationbefore raising the vehicle.

{ WARNING

Lifting a vehicle and gettingunder it to do maintenance orrepairs is dangerous without theappropriate safety equipment andtraining. If a jack is provided withthe vehicle, it is designed only forchanging a flat tire. If it is used foranything else, you or others couldbe badly injured or killed if thevehicle slips off the jack. If a jackis provided with the vehicle, onlyuse it for changing a flat tire.

6. Place the jack under the vehicle.


Vehicle Care 10-71

7. If you have a coin/pierce jack,attach the jack handle extensionto the jack by sliding the hookthrough the end of the jack andinsert the other end of the jackhandle into the wrench.

If you have a hex-head jack,attach the jack lift-assist toolby placing the hex of the jacklift-assist tool over the hexhead of the jack.

Hex Head Jack and Wrench

Coin/Pierce Jack and Wrench

8. Raise the vehicle by turning thejack handle clockwise. Raisethe vehicle far enough off theground so there is enough roomfor the road tire to clear theground.

9. Remove all of the wheel nuts.

10. Remove the flat tire.


10-72 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on theparts to which it is fastened, canmake wheel nuts become looseafter time. The wheel could comeoff and cause an accident. Whenchanging a wheel, remove anyrust or dirt from places where thewheel attaches to the vehicle.In an emergency, a cloth ora paper towel can be used;however, use a scraper or wirebrush later to remove all rustor dirt.

11. Remove any rust or dirt fromthe wheel bolts, mountingsurfaces, and spare wheel.

12. Place the compact spare tireon the wheel-mounting surface.

{ WARNING

Never use oil or grease on boltsor nuts because the nuts mightcome loose. The vehicle's wheelcould fall off, causing a crash.

13. Reinstall the wheel nuts.Tighten each nut by handuntil the wheel is held againstthe hub.

14. Lower the vehicle byturning the jack handlecounterclockwise.


Vehicle Care 10-73

{ WARNING

Wheel nuts that are improperly orincorrectly tightened can causethe wheels to become loose orcome off. The wheel nuts shouldbe tightened with a torque wrenchto the proper torque specificationafter replacing. Follow the torquespecification supplied by theaftermarket manufacturer whenusing accessory locking wheelnuts. See Capacities andSpecifications on page 12‑2 fororiginal equipment wheel nuttorque specifications.

Notice: Improperly tightenedwheel nuts can lead to brakepulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs,evenly tighten the wheel nutsin the proper sequence and tothe proper torque specification.See Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the wheel nuttorque specification.

15. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlyin a crisscross sequence,as shown.

16. Lower the jack all the way andremove the jack from under thevehicle.

17. Tighten the wheel nuts firmlywith the wheel wrench.

When reinstalling the wheel coveror center cap on the full-size tire,tighten all five plastic caps handsnug with the aid of the wheelwrench and tighten them withthe wheel wrench an additionalone‐quarter of a turn.

Notice: Wheel covers will not fiton the vehicle's compact spare.If you try to put a wheel cover onthe compact spare, the cover orthe spare could be damaged.


10-74 Vehicle Care

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{ WARNING

Storing a jack, a tire, or otherequipment in the passengercompartment of the vehicle couldcause injury. In a sudden stop orcollision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all thesein the proper place.

To store the flat tire:

1. Remove the cable package.The cable is stored in a plasticbag under the compactspare tire.

2. Remove the small center cap bytapping the back of the cap withthe extension of the shaft, if thevehicle has aluminum wheels.

3. Put the flat tire in the rearstorage area with the valvestem pointing toward therear of the vehicle.

A. Cable

B. Liftgate Hinges

C. Center of the Wheel

D. Door Striker

4. Pull the cable (A) through thedoor striker (D) then the centerof the wheel (C).


Vehicle Care 10-75

5. Hook the cable onto the outsideportion of the liftgate hinges (B).

6. Hook the other end of the cableonto the outside portion of theliftgate hinge on the other sideof the vehicle.

7. Pull on the cable to make sure itis secure.

8. Make sure the metal tube iscentered at the striker. Pushthe tube toward the front of thevehicle.

9. Close the liftgate and make sureit is latched properly.

The compact spare is for temporaryuse only. Replace the compactspare tire with a full-size tire assoon as you can.

Compact Spare Tire

{ WARNING

Driving with more than onecompact spare tire at a timecould result in loss of brakingand handling. This could leadto a crash and you or otherscould be injured. Use only onecompact spare tire at a time.

If this vehicle has a compact sparetire, it was fully inflated when thevehicle was new; however, it canlose air after a time. Check theinflation pressure regularly. It shouldbe 420 kPa (60 psi).

Stop as soon as possible andcheck that the spare tire iscorrectly inflated after installing thespare on the vehicle. The compactspare is designed to perform well atspeeds up to 105 km/h (65 mph) fordistances up to 5 000 km (3,000 mi),


10-76 Vehicle Care

so a trip can be completed and thefull-size tire repaired or replacedwhen possible. However, thecompact spare tire will last longerand be in good shape if it isreplaced as soon as possible.

Notice: When the compactspare is installed, do not takethe vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails.The compact spare can getcaught on the rails which candamage the tire, wheel, andother parts of the vehicle.

Do not use the compact spare onother vehicles.

Do not mix the compact spare tireor wheel with other wheels or tires.They will not fit. Keep the spare tireand its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fitthe compact spare. Using themcan damage the vehicle and candamage the chains too. Do notuse tire chains on the compactspare.

Jump StartingFor more information about thevehicle battery, see Battery onpage 10‑27.

Jump starting can be used onvehicles with run‐down batteries byusing jumper cables and anothervehicle.

{ WARNING

Batteries can hurt you. They canbe dangerous because:

. They contain acid that canburn you.

. They contain gas that canexplode or ignite.

. They contain enoughelectricity to burn you.

If you do not follow these stepsexactly, some or all of thesethings can hurt you.

{ WARNING

Using an open flame near abattery can cause battery gas toexplode. People have been hurtdoing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if youneed more light.

Be sure the battery has enoughwater. You do not need to addwater to the battery installed inyour new vehicle. But if a batteryhas filler caps, be sure the rightamount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of thatfirst. If you do not, explosive gascould be present.

Battery fluid contains acid thatcan burn you. Do not get it onyou. If you accidentally get it inyour eyes or on your skin, flushthe place with water and getmedical help immediately.


Vehicle Care 10-77

Be sure to use the following stepsto do it safely. Ignoring these stepscould result in costly damage to thevehicle that would not be coveredby the warranty.

Trying to start the vehicle bypushing or pulling it will not work,and it could damage the vehicle.

Notice: If any accessories are lefton or plugged in during the jumpstarting procedure, they couldbe damaged. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Whenever possible,turn off or unplug all accessorieson either vehicle when jumpstarting the vehicle.

Notice: If the jumper cables areconnected or removed in thewrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage thevehicle. The repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Always connect and remove thejumper cables in the correctorder, making sure that thecables do not touch each otheror other metal.

1. The vehicle used to jump startmust have 12-volt battery with anegative ground.

Notice: Only use a vehiclethat has a 12-volt system witha negative ground for jumpstarting. If the other vehicledoes not have a 12-volt systemwith a negative ground, bothvehicles can be damaged.

2. The vehicles should be closeenough for the jumper cables toreach, but the vehicles shouldnot be touching. Touching couldcause grounding and possibleelectrical system damage.

Put both vehicles in P (Park)and set the parking brake firmly.

3. Unplug accessories pluggedinto the cigarette lighter or theaccessory power outlet. Turn offthe radio and all lamps that arenot needed. Turn off the ignitionon both vehicles.

4. Locate the positive (+) andnegative (−) terminals on bothvehicles. Some vehicles haveremote jump starting terminals.


10-78 Vehicle Care

{ WARNING

An electric fan can start up evenwhen the engine is not runningand can injure you. Keep hands,clothing and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

5. The remote positive (+)terminal (A) is located on theunderhood fuse block, on thedriver side. Lift the red cap touncover the terminal.

The remote negative (−)terminal (B) is a stud behind themetal tab stamped with GND (−)near the driver side strut tower.

6. The jumper cables should bein good working condition withno loose or missing insulation.The vehicles could be damagedif they are not.

7. Connect the red positive (+)cable to the positive (+) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

8. Do not let the other endtouch metal. Connect it tothe positive (+) terminal of thegood battery. Use a remotepositive (+) terminal if thevehicle has one.

9. Connect the black negative (−)cable to the negative (−) terminalof the good battery. Use aremote negative (−) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

Do not let the other end touchanything until the next step.The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the deadbattery. It goes to a heavy,unpainted metal engine part orto a remote negative (−) terminalon the vehicle with the deadbattery.

10. Connect the other end of thenegative (−) cable away fromthe dead battery, but not nearengine parts that move.

11. Start the vehicle with the goodbattery and run the engine.


Vehicle Care 10-79

12. Press the unlock symbolon the remote keyless entrytransmitter to disarm thesecurity system, if equipped.

13. Try to start the vehicle that hadthe dead battery. If it will notstart after a few tries, it needsservice.

Notice: If the jumper cablesare connected or removed inthe wrong order, electricalshorting may occur and damagethe vehicle. The repairs wouldnot be covered by the vehiclewarranty. Always connect andremove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure thatthe cables do not touch eachother or other metal.

Jumper Cable Removal

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal EnginePart or Remote Negative (−)Terminal

B. Good Battery or RemotePositive (+) and RemoteNegative (−) Terminals

C. Dead Battery or RemotePositive (+) Terminal

To disconnect the jumper cablesfrom both vehicles,

1. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle that had the deadbattery.

2. Disconnect the blacknegative (−) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the vehicle with thegood battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+)cable from the other vehicle.

5. Return the underhood fuse blockcover to its original position,if applicable.


10-80 Vehicle Care

Towing

Towing the VehicleNotice: To avoid damage,the disabled vehicle shouldbe towed with all four wheelsoff the ground. Care must betaken with vehicles that havelow ground clearance and/orspecial equipment. Alwaysflatbed on a car carrier.

Consult your dealer or aprofessional towing service if thedisabled vehicle must be towed.See Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

To tow the vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes,such as behind a motor home, see“Recreational Vehicle Towing” in thissection.

Recreational VehicleTowingRecreational vehicle towing meanstowing the vehicle behind anothervehicle – such as behind a motorhome. The two most common typesof recreational vehicle towing areknown as dinghy towing and dollytowing. Dinghy towing is towing thevehicle with all four wheels on theground. Dolly towing is towing thevehicle with two wheels on theground and two wheels up on adevice known as a dolly.

Here are some important things toconsider before recreational vehicletowing:. What is the towing capacity

of the towing vehicle?Be sure to read the towvehicle manufacturer'srecommendations.

. What is the distance that will betravelled? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and howlong they can tow.

. Is the proper towing equipmentgoing to be used? See yourdealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice andequipment recommendations.

. Is the vehicle ready to betowed? Just as preparing thevehicle for a long trip, makesure the vehicle is preparedto be towed.

Dinghy Towing

Front-wheel‐drive andall-wheel-drive vehicles maybe dinghy towed from the front.These vehicles can also be towedby placing them on a platformtrailer with all four wheels off of theground. For other towing options,see “Dolly Towing” following in thissection.

For vehicles being dinghy towed,the vehicle should be run at thebeginning of each day and at eachRV fuel stop for about five minutes.This will ensure proper lubricationof transmission components.


Vehicle Care 10-81

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith all four wheels on the ground:

1. Position the vehicle that willbe towed and secure it to thetowing vehicle.

2. Turn the ignition key to ON/RUN.

3. Shift the transmission toN (Neutral).

4. Turn the ignition key toACC/ACCESSORY.

5. Turn all accessories off.

6. To prevent the battery fromdraining while the vehicle isbeing towed, remove fuse 32,the Discrete Logic IgnitionSwitch fuse, from the instrumentpanel fuse block and store it in asafe location. See InstrumentPanel Fuse Block onpage 10‑43.

Notice: If the vehicle istowed without performingeach of the steps listed under“Dinghy Towing,” the automatictransmission could be damaged.Be sure to follow all steps of thedinghy towing procedure prior toand after towing the vehicle.

Notice: If 105 km/h (65mph)is exceeded while towing thevehicle, it could be damaged.Never exceed 105 km/h (65mph)while towing the vehicle.

Once the destination has beenreached:


2. Shift the transmission toP (Park).

3. Turn the ignition key toLOCK/OFF.

4. Install fuse 32, the DiscreteLogic Ignition Switch fuse.See Instrument Panel FuseBlock on page 10‑43.


10-82 Vehicle Care

5. Start the engine and let it idle formore than three minutes beforedriving the vehicle.

Notice: Too much or toolittle fluid can damage thetransmission. Be sure thatthe transmission fluid is at theproper level before towing withall four wheels on the ground.

Notice: Do not tow a vehiclewith the front drive wheels onthe ground if one of the front tiresis a compact spare tire. Towingwith two different tire sizes onthe front of the vehicle cancause severe damage to thetransmission.

Dolly Towing(All-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

All-wheel‐drive vehicles should notbe towed with two wheels on theground. To properly tow thesevehicles, they should be placed ona platform trailer with all four wheelsoff of the ground or dinghy towedfrom the front.

Dolly Towing(Front-Wheel‐Drive Vehicles)

To tow the vehicle from the frontwith the rear wheels on the ground,do the following:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park).


4. Secure the vehicle to the dolly.

5. Follow the dolly manufacturer'sinstructions for preparing thevehicle and dolly for towing.

6. Release the parking brake.

Towing the Vehicle Fromthe Rear


Vehicle Care 10-83

Notice: Towing the vehicle fromthe rear could damage it. Also,repairs would not be covered bythe vehicle warranty. Never havethe vehicle towed from the rear.

Appearance Care

Exterior Care

Washing the Vehicle

To preserve the vehicle's finish,wash it often and out of directsunlight.

Notice: Do not use petroleumbased, acidic, or abrasivecleaning agents as they candamage the vehicle's paint,metal, or plastic parts. If damageoccurs, it would not be coveredby the vehicle's warranty.Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from yourdealer. Follow all manufacturerdirections regarding correctproduct usage, necessary safetyprecautions, and appropriatedisposal of any vehicle careproduct.

Notice: Avoid using highpressure washes closer than30 cm (12 in) to the surface of thevehicle. Use of power washersexceeding 8,274 kPa (1,200 psi)can result in damage or removalof paint and decals.

Rinse the vehicle well, beforewashing and after, to remove allcleaning agents completely. If theyare allowed to dry on the surface,they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, cleanchamois or an all-cotton towel toavoid surface scratches and waterspotting.


10-84 Vehicle Care

Finish Care

Application of aftermarket clearcoatsealant/wax materials is notrecommended. If painted surfacesare damaged, see your dealer tohave the damage assessed andrepaired. Foreign materials such ascalcium chloride and other salts,ice melting agents, road oil and tar,tree sap, bird droppings, chemicalsfrom industrial chimneys, etc., candamage the vehicle's finish if theyremain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible.If necessary, use non-abrasivecleaners that are marked safefor painted surfaces to removeforeign matter.

Occasional hand waxing or mildpolishing should be done to removeresidue from the paint finish.See your dealer for approvedcleaning products.

Notice: Machine compoundingor aggressive polishing on abasecoat/clearcoat paint finishmay damage it. Use onlynon-abrasive waxes and polishesthat are made for a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish on thevehicle.

To keep the paint finish lookingnew, keep the vehicle garagedor covered whenever possible.

Protecting Exterior Bright MetalParts

Regularly clean bright metal partswith water or chrome polish onchrome or stainless steel trim,if necessary.

For aluminum, never use autoor chrome polish, steam, orcaustic soap to clean. A coatingof wax, rubbed to a high polish,is recommended for all brightmetal parts.

Cleaning ExteriorLamps/Lenses and Emblems

Use only lukewarm or cold water, asoft cloth, and a car washing soapto clean exterior lamps and lenses.Follow instructions under "Washingthe Vehicle" later in this section.

Windshield and Wiper Blades

Clean the outside of the windshieldwith glass cleaner.

Clean rubber blades using a lint-freecloth or paper towel soaked withwindshield washer fluid or a milddetergent. Wash the windshieldthoroughly when cleaning theblades. Bugs, road grime, sap,and a buildup of vehicle wash/waxtreatments may cause wiperstreaking.

Replace the wiper blades if theyare worn or damaged. Damagecan be caused by extreme dustyconditions, sand, salt, heat, sun,snow, and ice.


Vehicle Care 10-85

Weatherstrips

Apply silicone grease onweatherstrips to make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak. See RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 11‑12

Tires

Use a stiff brush with tire cleaner toclean the tires.

Notice: Using petroleum-basedtire dressing products on thevehicle may damage the paintfinish and/or tires. When applyinga tire dressing, always wipe offany overspray from all paintedsurfaces on the vehicle.

Wheels and Trim—Aluminumor Chrome

Use a soft, clean cloth with mildsoap and water to clean the wheels.After rinsing thoroughly with cleanwater, dry with a soft, clean towel.A wax may then be applied.

Keep the wheels clean using asoft, clean cloth with mild soapand water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with asoft, clean towel. A wax may thenbe applied.

Notice: Chrome wheels and otherchrome trim may be damagedif the vehicle is not washedafter driving on roads that havebeen sprayed with magnesium,calcium, or sodium chloride.These chlorides are used onroads for conditions such asice and dust. Always wash thechrome with soap and waterafter exposure.

Notice: To avoid surfacedamage, do not use strong soaps,chemicals, abrasive polishes,cleaners, brushes, or cleanersthat contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels. Use onlyapproved cleaners. Also, neverdrive a vehicle with aluminum orchrome-plated wheels throughan automatic car wash that usessilicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. Damage could occurand the repairs would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Steering, Suspension, andChassis Components

Visually inspect front and rearsuspension and steering systemfor damaged, loose, or missing partsor signs of wear. Inspect powersteering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks,chafing, etc. Visually check constantvelocity joints, rubber boots, andaxle seals for leaks.


10-86 Vehicle Care

Body Component Lubrication

Lubricate all key lock cylinders,hood hinges, liftgate hinges, andthe steel fuel door hinge unless thecomponents are plastic. Applyingsilicone grease on weatherstripswith a clean cloth will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stickor squeak.

Underbody Maintenance

Use plain water to flush dirt anddebris from the vehicle's underbody.Your dealer or an underbody carwashing system can do this. If notremoved, rust and corrosion candevelop.

Sheet Metal Damage

If the vehicle is damaged andrequires sheet metal repair orreplacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosionmaterial to parts repaired orreplaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacementparts will provide the corrosionprotection while maintaining thevehicle warranty.

Finish Damage

Quickly repair minor chips andscratches with touch-up materialsavailable from your dealer to avoidcorrosion. Larger areas of finishdamage can be corrected in yourdealer's body and paint shop.

Chemical Paint Spotting

Airborne pollutants can fall uponand attack painted vehicle surfacescausing blotchy, ring-shapeddiscolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paintsurface.

Interior CareTo prevent dirt particle abrasions,regularly clean the vehicle's interior.Immediately remove any soils.Note that newspapers or darkgarments that can transfer colorto home furnishings can alsopermanently transfer color tothe vehicle's interior.

Use a soft bristle brush to removedust from knobs and crevices onthe instrument cluster. Using a mildsoap solution, immediately removehand lotions, sunscreen, and insectrepellant from all interior surfaces orpermanent damage may result.


Vehicle Care 10-87

Your dealer may have productsfor cleaning the interior. Usecleaners specifically designedfor the surfaces being cleanedto prevent permanent damage.To prevent overspray, apply allcleaners directly to the cleaningcloth. Cleaners should be removedquickly. Never allow cleaners toremain on the surface beingcleaned for extended periodsof time.

Cleaners may contain solvents thatcan become concentrated in theinterior. Before using cleaners,read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. Whilecleaning the interior, maintainadequate ventilation by openingthe doors and windows.

To prevent damage, do not cleanthe interior using the followingcleaners or techniques:. Never use a razor or any other

sharp object to remove a soilfrom any interior surface.

. Never use a brush with stiffbristles.

. Never rub any surfaceaggressively or with excessivepressure.

. Do not use laundry detergentsor dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. For liquid cleaners,use approximately 20 dropsper 3.78L (1 gal) of water.A concentrated soap solutionwill leave a residue that createsstreaks and attracts dirt. Do notuse solutions that contain strongor caustic soap.

. Do not heavily saturate theupholstery when cleaning.

. Do not use solvents or cleanerscontaining solvents.

Interior Glass

To clean, use a terry cloth fabricdampened with water. Wipe dropletsleft behind with a clean dry cloth.Commercial glass cleaners may beused, if necessary, after cleaningthe interior glass with plain water.

Notice: To prevent scratching,never use abrasive cleanerson automotive glass. Abrasivecleaners or aggressive cleaningmay damage the rear windowdefogger.


10-88 Vehicle Care

Fabric/Carpet

Start by vacuuming the surfaceusing a soft brush attachment. If arotating brush attachment is beingused during vacuuming, only use iton the floor carpet. Before cleaning,gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of thefollowing techniques:. Gently blot liquids with a paper

towel. Continue blotting until nomore soil can be removed.

. For solid soils, remove as muchas possible prior to vacuuming.

To clean:

1. Saturate a clean lint-freecolorfast cloth with water orclub soda. Microfiber cloth isrecommended to prevent linttransfer to the fabric or carpet.

2. Remove excess moisture bygently wringing until water doesnot drip from the cleaning cloth.

3. Start on the outside edge of thesoil and gently rub toward thecenter. Rotate the cleaning clothto a clean area frequently toprevent forcing the soil in tothe fabric.

4. Continue gently rubbing thesoiled area until there is nolonger any color transfer fromthe soil to the cleaning cloth.

5. If the soil is not completelyremoved, use a mild soapsolution followed only by clubsoda or plain water.

If the soil is not completelyremoved, it may be necessaryto use a commercial upholsterycleaner or spot lifter. Test a smallhidden area for colorfastnessbefore using a commercialupholstery cleaner or spot lifter.If ring formation occurs, cleanthe entire fabric or carpet.

Following the cleaning process, apaper towel can be used to blotexcess moisture.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, andOther Plastic Surfaces

Use a soft microfiber clothdampened with water to removedust and loose dirt. For a morethorough cleaning, use a softmicrofiber cloth dampened witha mild soap solution.

Notice: Soaking or saturatingleather, especially perforatedleather, as well as other interiorsurfaces, may cause permanentdamage. Wipe excess moisturefrom these surfaces aftercleaning and allow them todry naturally. Never use heat,steam, spot lifters or spotremovers. Do not use cleanersthat contain silicone orwax-based products. Cleanerscontaining these solventscan permanently change theappearance and feel of leatheror soft trim and are notrecommended.


Vehicle Care 10-89

Do not use cleaners that increasegloss, especially on the instrumentpanel. Reflected glare can decreasevisibility through the windshieldunder certain conditions.

Notice: Use of air freshenersmay cause permanent damageto plastics and painted surfaces.If an air freshener comes incontact with any plastic orpainted surface in the vehicle,blot immediately and clean with asoft cloth dampened with a mildsoap solution. Damage causedby air fresheners would not becovered by the vehicle warranty.

Floor Mats

{ WARNING

If a floor mat is the wrong sizeor is not properly installed,it can interfere with the pedals.Interference with the pedals cancause unintended accelerationand/or increased stoppingdistance which can cause a crashand injury. Make sure the floormat does not interfere with thepedals.

Use the following guidelines forproper floor mat usage.. The original equipment floor

mats were designed for yourvehicle. If the floor mats needreplacing, it is recommendedthat GM certified floor mats bepurchased. Non-GM floor matsmay not fit properly and mayinterfere with the accelerator orbrake pedal. Always check thatthe floor mats do not interferewith the pedals.

. Use the floor mat with thecorrect side up. Do not turnit over.

. Do not place anything on top ofthe driver side floor mat.

. Use only a single floor mat onthe driver side.

. Do not place one floor mat ontop of another.


10-90 Vehicle Care

Removing and Replacing theFloor Mat

The driver side floor mat is held inplace by two retainers.

1. Pull up on the rear of the floormat to unlock each retainer andremove.

2. Reinstall by lining up the floormat retainer openings over thecarpet retainers and snap intoposition.

3. Make sure the floor mat isproperly secured and verify thatit does not interfere with thepedals.


Service and Maintenance 11-1

Service andMaintenance

General InformationGeneral Information . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Maintenance ScheduleMaintenance Schedule . . . . . . . 11-3

Special Application ServicesSpecial ApplicationServices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-8

Additional Maintenanceand CareAdditional Maintenanceand Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-9

Recommended Fluids,Lubricants, and PartsRecommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

Maintenance ReplacementParts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14

Maintenance RecordsMaintenance Records . . . . . . 11-15

General InformationYour vehicle is an importantinvestment. This section describesthe required maintenance for thevehicle. Follow this schedule tohelp protect against major repairexpenses resulting from neglector inadequate maintenance. It mayalso help to maintain the valueof the vehicle if it is sold. It is theresponsibility of the owner to haveall required maintenance performed.

Your dealer has trainedtechnicians who can performrequired maintenance usinggenuine replacement parts.They have up‐to‐date tools andequipment for fast and accuratediagnostics. Many dealers haveextended evening and Saturdayhours, courtesy transportation,and online scheduling to assistwith service needs.

Your dealer recognizes theimportance of providingcompetitively priced maintenanceand repair services. With trainedtechnicians, the dealer is the placefor routine maintenance such asoil changes and tire rotations andadditional maintenance items liketires, brakes, batteries, and wiperblades.

Notice: Damage caused byimproper maintenance can leadto costly repairs and may not becovered by the vehicle warranty.Maintenance intervals, checks,inspections, recommended fluids,and lubricants are important tokeep the vehicle in good workingcondition.

The Tire Rotation and RequiredServices are the responsibility of thevehicle owner. It is recommendedto have your dealer perform theseservices every 12 000 km/7,500 mi.


11-2 Service and Maintenance

Proper vehicle maintenance helpsto keep the vehicle in good workingcondition, improves fuel economy,and reduces vehicle emissions.

Because of the way peopleuse vehicles, maintenanceneeds vary. There may needto be more frequent checksand services. The AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normalare for vehicles that:. Carry passengers and cargo

within recommended limits onthe Tire and Loading Informationlabel. See Vehicle Load Limitson page 9‑18.

. Are driven on reasonable roadsurfaces within legal drivinglimits.

. Use the recommended fuel.See Recommended Fuel onpage 9‑54.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Normal chart.

The Additional RequiredServices ‐ Severe are forvehicles that are:. Mainly driven in hilly or

mountainous terrain.. Frequently towing a trailer.. Used for high speed or

competitive driving.. Used for taxi, police, or delivery

service.

Refer to the information in theMaintenance Schedule AdditionalRequired Services ‐ Severe chart.

{ WARNING

Performing maintenancework can be dangerous and cancause serious injury. Performmaintenance work only if therequired information, proper tools,and equipment are available.If they are not, see your dealerto have a trained technician dothe work. See Doing Your OwnService Work on page 10‑4.



MaintenanceScheduleOwner Checks and Services

At Each Fuel Stop. Check the engine oil level.

See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

Once a Month. Check the tire inflation

pressures. See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑53.

. Inspect the tires for wear.See Tire Inspection onpage 10‑59.

. Check the windshield washerfluid level. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.

Engine Oil Change

When the CHANGE ENGINE OILSOON message displays, have theengine oil and filter changed withinthe next 1 000 km/600 mi. If drivenunder the best conditions, theengine oil life system might notindicate the need for vehicle servicefor more than a year. The engine oiland filter must be changed at leastonce a year and the oil life systemmust be reset. Your trained dealertechnician can perform this work.If the engine oil life system is resetaccidentally, service the vehiclewithin 5 000 km/3,000 mi sincethe last service. Reset the oil lifesystem when the oil is changed.See Engine Oil Life System onpage 10‑13.

Tire Rotation andRequired Services Every12 000 km/7,500 mi

Rotate the tires, if recommendedfor the vehicle, and perform thefollowing services. See TireRotation on page 10‑59.. Check engine oil level and

oil life percentage. If needed,change engine oil and filter, andreset oil life system. See EngineOil on page 10‑10 and EngineOil Life System on page 10‑13.

. Check engine coolant level.See Engine Coolant onpage 10‑17.

. Check windshield washer fluidlevel. See Washer Fluid onpage 10‑24.



. Visually inspect windshieldwiper blades for wear, cracking,or contamination. See ExteriorCare on page 10‑83. Replaceworn or damaged wiper blades.See Wiper Blade Replacementon page 10‑30.

. Check tire inflation pressures.See Tire Pressure onpage 10‑53.

. Inspect tire wear. See TireInspection on page 10‑59.

. Visually check for fluid leaks.

. Inspect engine air cleaner filter.See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter onpage 10‑14.

. Inspect brake system.

. Visually inspect steering,suspension, and chassiscomponents for damaged,loose, or missing parts or signsof wear. See Exterior Care onpage 10‑83.

. Check restraint systemcomponents. See SafetySystem Check on page 3‑19.

. Visually inspect fuel system fordamage or leaks.

. Visually inspect exhaust systemand nearby heat shields forloose or damaged parts.

. Lubricate body components.See Exterior Care onpage 10‑83.

. Check starter switch. See StarterSwitch Check on page 10‑28.

. Check automatic transmissionshift lock control function.See Automatic TransmissionShift Lock Control FunctionCheck on page 10‑29.

. Check ignition transmission lock.See Ignition Transmission LockCheck on page 10‑29.

. Check parking brake andautomatic transmission parkmechanism. See Park Brake andP (Park) Mechanism Check onpage 10‑29.

. Check accelerator pedal fordamage, high effort, or binding.Replace if needed.

. Visually inspect gas strut forsigns of wear, cracks, or otherdamage. Check the hold openability of the strut. See yourdealer if service is required.

. Inspect sunroof track and seal,if equipped. See Sunroof onpage 2‑21.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Normal

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first. More frequentreplacement may be needed ifthe vehicle is driven in areas withheavy traffic, areas with poor airquality, or areas with high dustlevels. Replacement may also beneeded if there is a reduction in airflow, excessive window fogging,or odors.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Do not directly power washthe transfer case output seals.High pressure water can overcomethe seals and contaminate thetransfer case fluid. Contaminatedfluid will decrease the life of thetransfer case and should bereplaced.

e) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

f) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.





Footnotes — MaintenanceSchedule Additional RequiredServices — Severe

a) Or every two years, whichevercomes first.

b) Check all fuel and vapor linesand hoses for proper hook‐up,routing, and condition. Check thatthe purge valve, if the vehicle hasone, works properly. Replace asneeded.

c) Or every four years, whichevercomes first.

d) Do not directly power wash thetransfer case output seals. Highpressure water can overcome theseals and contaminate the transfercase fluid. Contaminated fluid willdecrease the life of the transfercase and should be replaced.

e) Or every five years, whichevercomes first. See Cooling System onpage 10‑16.

f) Or every 10 years, whichevercomes first. Inspect for fraying,excessive cracking, or damage;replace, if needed.

Special ApplicationServices. Severe Commercial Use

Vehicles Only: Lubricatechassis components every5 000 km/3,000 mi.

. Have underbody flushing serviceperformed once a year.



AdditionalMaintenance and CareYour vehicle is an importantinvestment and caring for itproperly may help to avoidfuture costly repairs. To maintainvehicle performance, additionalmaintenance services may berequired. It is recommendedthat your dealer perform theseservices — their trained dealertechnicians know your vehiclebest. Your dealer can also performa thorough assessment with amulti‐point inspection to recommendwhen your vehicle may needattention. The following list isintended to explain the servicesand conditions to look for that mayindicate services are required.

Battery

The battery supplies power tostart the engine and operate anyadditional electrical accessories.. To avoid break‐down or failure

to start the vehicle, maintain abattery with full cranking power.

. Trained dealer technicians havethe diagnostic equipment to testthe battery and ensure that theconnections and cables arecorrosion‐free.

Belts. Belts may need replacing if

they squeak or show signs ofcracking or splitting.

. Trained dealer technicianscan inspect the belts andrecommend replacementwhen necessary.

Brakes

Brakes stop the vehicle and arecrucial to safe driving.. Signs of brake wear may include

chirping, grinding, or squealingnoises, or difficulty stopping.

. Trained dealer technicians haveaccess to tools and equipmentto inspect the brakes andrecommend quality partsengineered for the vehicle.



Fluids

Proper fluid levels and approvedfluids protect the vehicle’ssystems and components.See Recommended Fluids andLubricants on page 11‑12 forGM approved fluids.. Engine oil and windshield

washer fluid levels should bechecked at every fuel fill.

. Instrument cluster lights maycome on to indicate that fluidsmay be low and need to befilled.

Hoses

Hoses transport fluids and shouldbe regularly inspected to ensurethat there are no cracks or leaks.With a multi‐point inspection, yourdealer can inspect the hoses andadvise if replacement is needed.

Lamps

Properly working headlamps,taillamps, and brake lamps areimportant to see and be seen onthe road.. Signs that the headlamps need

attention include dimming, failureto light, cracking, or damage.The brake lamps need to bechecked periodically to ensurethat they light when braking.

. With a multi‐point inspection,your dealer can check the lampsand note any concerns.

Shocks and Struts

Shocks and struts help aid in controlfor a smoother ride.. Signs of wear may include

steering wheel vibration,bounce/sway while braking,longer stopping distance,or uneven tire wear.

. As part of the multi‐pointinspection, trained dealertechnicians can visually inspectthe shocks and struts forsigns of leaking, blown seals,or damage, and can advisewhen service is needed.



Tires

Tires need to be properly inflated,rotated, and balanced. Maintainingthe tires can save money, fuel, andcan reduce the risk of tire failure.. Signs that the tires need to be

replaced include three or morevisible treadwear indicators; cordor fabric showing through therubber; cracks or cuts in thetread or sidewall; or a bulgeor split in the tire.

. Trained dealer technicians caninspect and recommend theright tires. Your dealer can alsoprovide tire/wheel balancingservices to ensure smoothvehicle operation at all speeds.Your dealer sells and servicesname brand tires.

Vehicle Care

To help keep the vehicle lookinglike new, vehicle care productsare available from your dealer.For information on how to cleanand protect the vehicle’s interiorand exterior, see Interior Care onpage 10‑86 and Exterior Care onpage 10‑83.

Wheel Alignment

Wheel alignment is critical forensuring that the tires deliveroptimal wear and performance.. Signs that the alignment may

need to be adjusted includepulling, improper vehiclehandling, or unusual tire wear.

. Your dealer has the requiredequipment to ensure properwheel alignment.

Windshield

For safety, appearance, and thebest viewing, keep the windshieldclean and clear.. Signs of damage include

scratches, cracks, and chips.. Trained dealer technicians

can inspect the windshield andrecommend proper replacementif needed.

Wiper Blades

Wiper blades need to be cleanedand kept in good condition toprovide a clear view.. Signs of wear include streaking,

skipping across the windshield,and worn or split rubber.

. Trained dealer technicians cancheck the wiper blades andreplace them when needed.



Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and Parts

Recommended Fluids and Lubricants

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine OilUse only engine oil licensed to the dexos1 specfication, or equivalent,of the proper SAE viscosity grade. ACDelco dexos1 Synthetic Blend isrecommended. See Engine Oil on page 10‑10.

Engine Coolant50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and use only DEX-COOL Coolant.See Engine Coolant on page 10‑17.

Hydraulic Brake SystemDOT 3 Hydraulic Brake Fluid (GM Part No. 88862806,in Canada 88862807).

Windshield Washer Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Hydraulic Power Steering System(V6 engines only)

DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission DEXRON®-VI Automatic Transmission Fluid.

Transfer Case (All-Wheel Drive) Transfer Case Fluid (GM Part No. 88861950, in Canada 88861951).



Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Key Lock Cylinders Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Hood Latch Assembly, SecondaryLatch, Pivots, Spring Anchor, and

Release Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol (GM Part No. 12346293, in Canada 992723)or lubricant meeting requirements of NLGI #2, Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood and Door HingesMulti-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube (GM Part No. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

Power Liftgate Actuator Ball Joint Multi-Purpose Lubricant (GM Part No. 89021668, in Canada 89021674).

Weatherstrip ConditioningWeatherstrip Lubricant (GM Part No. 3634770, in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease (GM Part No. 12345579, in Canada 992887).



Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your dealer.

Part GM Part Number ACDelco Part Number

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter 25899727 A3138C

Engine Oil Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 12605566 PF457G

3.0L V6 Engine 89017525 PF63

Passenger Compartment Air Filter Element 20901295 CF177

Spark Plugs

2.4L L4 Engine 12620540 41-108

3.0L V6 Engine 12622561 41-109

Wiper Blades

Driver Side – 60 cm (23.6 in) 20794123 —

Passenger Side – 42.5 cm (16.7 in) 20794124 —

Rear – 32.5 cm (12.8 in) 25788783 —



Maintenance RecordsAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and thetype of services performed in the boxes provided. Retain all maintenance receipts.

DateOdometerReading

Serviced By Services Performed



DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading




DateOdometerReading



Technical Data 12-1

Technical Data

Vehicle IdentificationVehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Service Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1

Vehicle DataCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Engine Drive Belt Routing . . . 12-4

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

This legal identifier is in the frontcorner of the instrument panel, onthe left side of the vehicle. It can beseen through the windshield fromoutside. The VIN also appears onthe Vehicle Certification and ServiceParts labels and certificates of titleand registration.

Engine Identification

The eighth character in the VINis the engine code. This codeidentifies the vehicle's engine,specifications, and replacementparts. See “Engine Specifications”under Capacities and Specificationson page 12‑2 for the vehicle'sengine code.

Service PartsIdentification LabelThis label, on the inside of the glovebox, has the following information:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Model designation.. Paint information.. Production options and special

equipment.

Do not remove this label from thevehicle.


12-2 Technical Data

Vehicle Data

Capacities and Specifications

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134aFor the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant label located under the

hood. See your dealer for more information.

Engine Cooling System

2.4L L4 Engine 7.8 L 8.2 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 10.2 L 10.8 qt

Engine Oil with Filter

2.4L L4 Engine 4.7 L 5.0 qt

3.0L V6 Engine 5.7 L 6.0 qt

Fuel Tank

2.4L L4 Engine 71.1 L 18.8 gal

3.0L V6 Engine 79.1 L 20.9 gal


Technical Data 12-3

ApplicationCapacities

Metric English

Transmission Fluid (Drain and Refill)

2.4L L4 6–Speed Automatic* 8.5 L 9.0 qt

3.0L V6 6–Speed Automatic* 9.0 L 9.5 qt

Wheel Nut Torque 190Y 140 lb ft

*See Automatic Transmission Fluid on page 10‑14 for information on checking fluid level.

All capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. Recheck fluid level after filling.

Engine Specifications

Engine VIN Code Transmission Spark Plug Gap

2.4L L4 K Automatic 0.9 mm (0.035 in)

3.0L V6 5 Automatic 1.1 mm (0.043 in)


12-4 Technical Data

Engine Drive Belt Routing

2.4L L4 Engine

3.0L V6 Engine


Customer Information 13-1

CustomerInformation

Customer InformationCustomer SatisfactionProcedure(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-1

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico) . . . . . . . . 13-3

Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-5

Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) Users(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-6

Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . 13-7GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico) . . . . . . . . . 13-10

Scheduling ServiceAppointments(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-14

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada) . . . . . . . . 13-16

Service PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-18

Reporting Safety DefectsReporting Safety Defects tothe United StatesGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Reporting Safety Defects tothe CanadianGovernment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral Motors . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20

Vehicle Data Recording andPrivacyVehicle Data Recording andPrivacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-21

Event Data Recorders . . . . . . 13-21OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22Navigation System . . . . . . . . . 13-22Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22

Radio FrequencyStatement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

Customer Information

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (U.S. andCanada)Your satisfaction and goodwill areimportant to your dealer and toGMC. Normally, any concernswith the sales transaction or theoperation of the vehicle will beresolved by your dealer's sales orservice departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentionsof all concerned, misunderstandingscan occur. If your concern has notbeen resolved to your satisfaction,the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concernwith a member of dealershipmanagement. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at thatlevel. If the matter has already beenreviewed with the sales, service,or parts manager, contact the ownerof your dealership or the generalmanager.


13-2 Customer Information

STEP TWO: If after contacting amember of dealership management,it appears your concern cannot beresolved by your dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., call1-800-462-8782. In Canada,call General Motors of CanadaCustomer Care Centre at1-800-263-3777 (English) or1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call thetoll-free number in order to giveyour inquiry prompt attention.Have the following informationavailable to give the CustomerAssistance representative:. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). This is availablefrom the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top leftof the instrument panel andvisible through the windshield.

. Dealership name and location.

. Vehicle delivery date andpresent mileage.

When contacting GMC, rememberthat your concern will likely beresolved at a dealer's facility.That is why we suggest followingStep One first.

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners:Both General Motors andyour dealer are committed tomaking sure you are completelysatisfied with the new vehicle.However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, you can file with the BetterBusiness Bureau (BBB) Auto Line®

Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is anout-of-court program administeredby the Council of Better BusinessBureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs orthe interpretation of the New VehicleLimited Warranty. Although you maybe required to resort to this informaldispute resolution program prior tofilling out a court action, use of theprogram is free of charge and your

case will generally be heard within40 days. If you do not agree withthe decision given in your case,you may reject it and proceed withany other venue for relief availableto you.

You may contact the BBB AutoLine Program using the toll-freetelephone number or write themat the following address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better BusinessBureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100www.dr.bbb.org/goauto

This program is available inall 50 states and the District ofColumbia. Eligibility is limited byvehicle age, mileage, and otherfactors. General Motors reservesthe right to change eligibilitylimitations and/or discontinueits participation in this program.



STEP THREE — CanadianOwners: In the event that youdo not feel your concerns havebeen addressed after following theprocedure outlined in Steps Oneand Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be awareof its participation in a no-chargeMediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limitedhas committed to binding arbitrationof owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle serviceclaims. The program provides forthe review of the facts involvedby an impartial third party arbiter,and may include an informal hearingbefore the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entiredispute settlement process, fromthe time you file your complaintto the final decision, should becompleted in approximately 70 days.

We believe our impartial programoffers advantages over courts inmost jurisdictions because it isinformal, quick, and free of charge.

For further information concerningeligibility in the Canadian MotorVehicle Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP),call toll-free 1-800-207-0685, or callthe General Motors Customer CareCentre, 1-800-263-3777 (English),1-800-263-7854 (French),or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Care CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

The inquiry should be accompaniedby the Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN).

Customer SatisfactionProcedure (Mexico)

Did you get the Warranty ExtensionPlan? This plan is recommended byGeneral Motors to supplement thewarranty included with the newvehicle purchase.

See your dealer for details.



Customer AssistanceProcedure

Owner satisfaction and goodwill arevery important to your dealer andGeneral Motors.

Normally, any problem with thetransaction, sale, or usage ofthe vehicle must be handled byyour dealer sales or servicedepartments. However, werecognize that despite the goodintentions of all parties involved,sometimes a misunderstandingmay occur.

If you have a problem that has notbeen satisfactorily handled throughthe normal means, we suggest thefollowing steps:

STEP ONE

Explain your case to your dealerservice agent, service manager,dealer sales agent, or salesmanager, depending on your case.

Make sure that they have allnecessary information. They areinterested in your continualsatisfaction.

STEP TWO

If you are not satisfied, pleasecontact the general manager or yourdealership owner to ask for theirhelp. If they are not able to resolveyour case, ask them to contact theright people at General Motors forsupport, if needed.

STEP THREE

If your case is not resolvedin a reasonable amount of timeby your dealer, please call theGeneral Motors CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) andprovide the following information:. Name. Address

. Phone number

. Model year

. Brand

. Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN)

. Mileage

. Delivery date

. Description of the problem

. Dealership name

. Dealership address

See Customer Assistance Offices(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑5or Customer Assistance Offices(Mexico) on page 13‑6 for moreinformation.



Customer AssistanceOffices (U.S. and Canada)GMC encourages customers to callthe toll-free number for assistance.However, if a customer wishes towrite or e-mail GMC, the lettershould be addressed to:

United States

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.GMC.com

1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782)1-800-462-8583 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-888-881-3302

From Puerto Rico:

1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)

From U.S. Virgin Islands:

1-800-496-9994

Canada

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre, Mail Code:CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmc.ca

1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For TextTelephone Devices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance:1-800-268-6800

All Overseas Locations

Please contact the localGeneral Motors Business Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico andU.S. Virgin Islands)

General Motors de Mexico,S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterAv. Ejercito Nacional #843Col. GranadaC.P. 11520, Mexico, D.F.

01-800-466-0801Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0801



Customer AssistanceOffices (Mexico)To contact the Customer AssistanceCenter (CAC), use the phonenumbers listed in this section.Customer assistance is availableMonday through Friday, 08:00 to20:00 hours, and Saturdays from08:00 to 15:00 hours.

All e-mail inquiries to the CustomerAssistance Center (CAC) should besent to: [email protected].

Mexico

From Mexico City

5329-0812

From Other Mexico Locations

01-800-466-0812

United States and Canada

1-866-466-8191

Costa Rica

00-800-052-1005

Guatemala

1-800-999-5252

Panama

00-800-052-0001

Dominican Republic

1-888-751-5301

El Salvador

800-6273

Honduras

800-0122-6101

Customer Assistance forText Telephone (TTY)Users (U.S. and Canada)To assist customers who aredeaf, hard of hearing, or speechimpaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), GMC has TTYequipment available at its CustomerAssistance Center. Any TTY usercan communicate with GMC bydialing: 1-800-462-8583. TTY usersin Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.



Online Owner Center

GMC Owner Center (U.S.)www.gmcownercenter.com

Information and servicescustomized for your specificvehicle — all in one convenientplace.. Digital owner manual, warranty

information, and more.. Storage for online service and

maintenance records.. GMC dealer locator for service

nationwide.. Exclusive privileges and offers.. Recall notices for your specific

vehicle.. OnStar and GM Cardmember

Services Earnings summaries.

Other Helpful Links

GMC — www.gmc.com

GMC Merchandise —www.gmccollection.com

Help Center — www.gmc.com/helpcenter. FAQ (Frequently Asked

Questions). Contact Us

My GM Canada www.gm.ca

My GM Canada is apassword-protected section ofwww.gm.ca where you can saveinformation on GM vehicles, getpersonalized offers, and use handytools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuabletools and services you will haveaccess to:. My Showroom: Find and save

information on vehicles andcurrent offers in your area.

. My Dealers: Save details suchas address and phone numberfor each of your preferred GMdealers.

. My Driveway: Access quicklinks to parts and serviceestimates, check trade-invalues, or schedule a serviceappointment by adding thevehicles you own to yourdriveway profile.

. My Preferences: Manage yourprofile and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up, visit the My GM.casection within www.gm.ca.



GM MobilityReimbursement Program(U.S. and Canada)

This program is available toqualified applicants for costreimbursement of eligibleaftermarket adaptive equipmentrequired for the vehicle, such ashand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift for the vehicle.

For more information on the limitedoffer, visit www.gmmobility.com orcall the GM Mobility AssistanceCenter at 1-800-323-9935.Text Telephone (TTY) users,call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canadaalso has a Mobility Program.Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call1-800-263-3830.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (U.S. andCanada)For U.S.‐purchased vehicles, call1‐888‐881‐3302; (Text Telephone(TTY): 1‐888‐889‐2438).

For Canadian‐purchased vehicles,call 1-800-268-6800.

Service is available 24 hours a day,365 days a year.

Calling for Assistance

When calling Roadside Assistance,have the following informationready:. Your name, home address,

and home telephone number. Telephone number of your

location. Location of the vehicle. Model, year, color, and license

plate number of the vehicle. Odometer reading, Vehicle

Identification Number (VIN),and delivery date of the vehicle

. Description of the problem



Coverage

Services are provided up to5 years/160 000 km (100,000 miles),whichever comes first.

In the U.S., anyone driving thevehicle is covered. In Canada, aperson driving the vehicle withoutpermission from the owner is notcovered.

Roadside Assistance is not a part ofthe New Vehicle Limited Warranty.GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right tomake any changes or discontinuethe Roadside Assistance programat any time without notification.

GMC and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the rightto limit services or payment to anowner or driver if they decide theclaims are made too often, or thesame type of claim is made manytimes.

Services Provided. Emergency Fuel Delivery:

Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock‐Out Service: Serviceto unlock the vehicle if you arelocked out. A remote unlockmay be available if you haveOnStar®. For security reasons,the driver must presentidentification before thisservice is given.

. Emergency Tow From a PublicRoad or Highway: Tow to thenearest GMC dealer for warrantyservice, or if the vehicle was ina crash and cannot be driven.Assistance is also given whenthe vehicle is stuck in the sand,mud, or snow.

. Flat Tire Change: Service tochange a flat tire with the sparetire. The spare tire, if equipped,must be in good condition andproperly inflated. It is the owner'sresponsibility for the repair orreplacement of the tire if it isnot covered by the warranty.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. Trip Routing Service: Detailedmaps of North America whenrequested either with themost direct route or the mostscenic route. Additional travelinformation is also available.Allow three weeks for delivery.

. Trip Interruption Benefits andAssistance: If your trip isinterrupted due to a warrantyfailure, incidental expensesmay be reimbursed duringthe 5 years/(160 000 km)100,000 miles Powertrainwarranty period. Itemsconsidered are hotel,meals, and rental car.



Services Not Included inRoadside Assistance. Impound towing caused by

violation of any laws.. Legal fines.. Mounting, dismounting,

or changing of snow tires,chains, or other traction devices.

. Towing or services for vehiclesdriven on a non-public road orhighway.

Services Specific toCanadian‐Purchased Vehicles. Fuel Delivery: Reimbursement

is approximately $5 Canadian.Diesel fuel delivery may berestricted. Propane and otherfuels are not provided throughthis service.

. Lock-Out Service: Vehicleregistration is required.

. Trip Routing Service: Limit ofsix requests per year.

. Trip Interruption Benefitsand Assistance: Must beover 250 kilometres fromwhere your trip was startedto qualify. General Motorsof Canada Limited requirespre-authorization, originaldetailed receipts, and acopy of the repair orders.Once authorization hasbeen received, the RoadsideAssistance advisor will helpto make arrangements andexplain how to receive payment.

. Alternative Service: Ifassistance cannot be providedright away, the RoadsideAssistance advisor maygive permission to get localemergency road service.You will receive payment, up to$100, after sending the originalreceipt to Roadside Assistance.Mechanical failures may becovered, however any cost forparts and labor for repairs notcovered by the warranty arethe owner responsibility.

Roadside AssistanceProgram (Mexico)As a new owner, your vehicleis automatically enrolled in theRoadside Assistance program.The services are available at nocost under the terms and conditionsof the program. The RoadsideAssistance program is not partof, or included, in the coverageprovided by the new vehiclelimited warranty.

Roadside Assistance providesassistance to the driver andpassengers while driving thevehicle within your city of residenceor on any passable road inMexico, the United States, andCanada. Services are subjectto the limitations described inthe following pages. Programcoverage varies by country.

Roadside Assistance is available24 hours a day, 365 days ofthe year.



This program expires two yearsfrom the date of the invoice forthe vehicle, regardless of vehiclemileage and changes in vehicleownership.

For more information about therenewal of this program at theend of its term, contact the GMCCustomer Assistance Center at01-800-466-0801.

Services Provided. Flat Tire Change: If unable to

change a flat tire, RoadsideAssistance will provide towingservice to the nearest authorizedGMC dealership. It is theowner's responsibility for therepair or replacement of the tire.This service is limited to thetransfer of the vehicle to therepair facility.

. Emergency Fuel Delivery:Delivery of enough fuel for thevehicle to get to the nearestservice station.

. Lock-Out Service: Service tounlock the vehicle if you arelocked out.

. Battery Jump Start: Service tojump start a dead battery.

. *Emergency Messages:Transmission of urgent phonemessages.

. *Emergency Calls: Call foremergency services.

. *Dealership LocationAssistance: Informationregarding addresses andtelephone numbers forGMC dealers.

. Emergency Towing: Tow tothe nearest dealer for warrantyservice if the vehicle cannot bedriven.

If the vehicle is involvedin an accident during thecommission of a crime,administrative violation,or breach of traffic regulations,Roadside Assistance will notprovide service. When the

vehicle is not accessible to betowed, all maneuvers required toaccess it will be at the owner'sexpense.

If the vehicle is in another cityoutside of your residence,Roadside Assistance is limitedto moving the vehicle to thenearest dealer. If you would likethe vehicle moved to a differentdealer, you will be asked tocover the difference in cost atthe time of the move.

If the vehicle cannot be receivedby the nearest GMC dealerdue to scheduling conflicts, thevehicle will be taken to a safeplace where it will remain for upto 48 hours until it can be takento the dealer. If the storage costsexceed the amount authorized,the owner is responsible to paythe difference at the time ofservice. Contact RoadsideAssistance for more informationon authorized amounts.



. *Trip Interruption: This serviceis provided if you are preventedfrom further usage of yourvehicle while traveling andit is not possible for the nearestGMC dealership to repairthe vehicle the same day,requiring the vehicle to stayat the dealership for a night ormore. If this happens, in additionto the previously listed servicesand prior to confirmation by thedealership, you are entitled tochoose one of the followingalternatives, within the limits ofexisting Roadside Assistanceprogram guidelines. If the costsexceed the amount authorizedfor these services, you must paythe difference at the time ofservice.

Roadside Assistancewill coordinate hotelaccommodations for allvehicle travelers for up totwo nights.

A rental car will be provided forup to two days and the vehiclemust be returned to its originaldestination, excluding vehicleswith a carrying capacity greaterthan 3.5 tons.

Complimentary Transportation: Ifyou prefer to continue yourtrip to the intended destinationor return to your place ofresidence, and the trip requiresmore than eight hours driving onthe road, transportation for thedriver and passengers by firstclass bus or coach commercialairline will be provided to alocation chosen by RoadsideAssistance, depending onavailability at the chosendestination. Restrictions applybased on vehicle specifications.

If you are on the road, taxiservice to the nearest busstation or airport will beprovided.

. *ComplimentaryTransportation for VehiclePick Up: Transportation to pickup your vehicle after repairsare complete. Once the dealerhas reported that the vehiclehas been repaired, RoadsideAssistance will provide bus orcommercial airline one-wayservice (subject to availability)for the person designated byyou to collect your vehicle atthe dealership's location if youor the designated person are notin the same town or city as thedealership.

*These services are not providedfor U.S. or Canada residents.All services provided in the U.S.and Canada are at the owner'sexpense and will be reimbursedby Roadside Assistance.



Services Not Included in RoadsideAssistance

Roadside Assistance does notcover or reimburse services for thefollowing:. Events caused by fraud or bad

faith by the driver.. Vehicle immobilization

situations due to a major forceor unforeseen circumstances,such as natural phenomenaof an extraordinary nature,earthquakes, volcanic eruptions,and other cyclonic storms.

. Vehicle immobilizationsituations arising from caraccidents caused by the driverof the vehicle or third parties.This means any occurrencethat causes physical injury tothe occupants and/or the vehiclecaused by external forces.

. Acts of terrorism, riot or uproar,armed forces or police actionswhich prevent timely delivery ofassistance services.

. Food service, beverages,telephone calls, or other extracosts. Accommodation costsapply only to Mexico per theterms and conditions of theRoadside Assistance program.

. Any damage to the vehiclewithout intent, derived fromthe services provided.

. Cost of towing a trailer whenchoosing a GMC dealer that isnearest to the temporary storagefacility for the disabled vehicle.

. Cost of all maneuvers requiredto access the vehicle when itis not available to be towed.

. Cost of fuel provided.

Routine vehicle repair costsare not covered by the RoadsideAssistance program. For moreinformation, see your new vehiclewarranty.

Contacting Roadside Assistance

Roadside Assistance servicesare of no cost to you and available24 hours a day, 365 days a year.Costs are only incurred in situationsthat exceed the limits of theprogram, some of which arelisted previously in this section.

To contact Roadside Assistance byphone, use the following numbers:

Mexico

01-800-466-0801

United States

1-866-466-8902

Canada

1-800-268-6800

E-mail

[email protected]

GMC reserves the right to makeany changes or discontinue theRoadside Assistance program atany time without notification.



Scheduling ServiceAppointments(U.S. and Canada)When the vehicle requires warrantyservice, contact your dealerand request an appointment.By scheduling a serviceappointment and advisingthe service consultant ofyour transportation needs,your dealer can help minimizeyour inconvenience.

If the vehicle cannot be scheduledinto the service departmentimmediately, keep driving it untilit can be scheduled for service,unless, of course, the problem issafety related. If it is, please callyour dealership, let them know this,and ask for instructions.

If your dealer requests you to bringthe vehicle for service, you areurged to do so as early in the workday as possible to allow for sameday-repair.

Courtesy TransportationProgram (U.S. andCanada)To enhance your ownershipexperience, we and our participatingdealers are proud to offer CourtesyTransportation, a customer supportprogram for vehicles with theBumper-to-Bumper (Base WarrantyCoverage period in Canada),extended powertrain, and/orhybrid‐specific warranties inboth the U.S. and Canada.

Several Courtesy Transportationoptions are available to assist inreducing inconvenience whenwarranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not apart of the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. A separate bookletentitled “Warranty and OwnerAssistance Information” furnishedwith each new vehicle providesdetailed warranty coverageinformation.

Transportation Options

Warranty service can generallybe completed while you wait.However, if you are unableto wait, GM helps to minimizeinconvenience by providing severaltransportation options. Dependingon the circumstances, your dealercan offer one of the following:

Shuttle Service

Shuttle service is the preferredmeans of offering CourtesyTransportation. Dealers may provideshuttle service to get you to yourdestination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includesone‐way or round‐trip shuttle servicewithin reasonable time and distanceparameters of your dealer's area.



Public Transportation or FuelReimbursement

If the vehicle requires overnightwarranty repairs, and publictransportation is used insteadof your dealer's shuttle service,the expense must be supportedby original receipts and can onlybe up to the maximum amountallowed by GM for shuttle service.In addition, for U.S. customers,should you arrange transportationthrough a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonablefuel expenses may be available.Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by originalreceipts. See your dealer forinformation regarding the allowanceamounts for reimbursement of fuelor other transportation costs.

Courtesy Rental Vehicle

Your dealer may arrange toprovide you with a courtesyrental vehicle or reimburse youfor a rental vehicle that youobtain if the vehicle is kept for anovernight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited andmust be supported by originalreceipts. This requires that yousign and complete a rentalagreement and meet state/provincial, local, and rentalvehicle provider requirements.Requirements vary and mayinclude minimum age requirements,insurance coverage, credit card,etc. You are responsible for fuelusage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usagefees, excessive mileage, or rentalusage beyond the completion of therepair.

It may not be possible to provide alike vehicle as a courtesy rental.

Additional ProgramInformation

All program options, such asshuttle service, may not be availableat every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific informationabout availability. All CourtesyTransportation arrangements willbe administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves theright to unilaterally modify,change, or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time andto resolve all questions of claimeligibility pursuant to the terms andconditions described herein at itssole discretion.



Collision Damage Repair(U.S. and Canada)If the vehicle is involved in acollision and it is damaged,have the damage repaired by aqualified technician using the properequipment and quality replacementparts. Poorly performed collisionrepairs diminish the vehicle resalevalue, and safety performance canbe compromised in subsequentcollisions.

Collision Parts

Genuine GM Collision parts arenew parts made with the samematerials and construction methodsas the parts with which the vehiclewas originally built. Genuine GMCollision parts are the best choice toensure that the vehicle's designedappearance, durability, and safetyare preserved. The use of GenuineGM parts can help maintain the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Recycled original equipmentparts may also be used for repair.These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total lossesin prior crashes. In most cases,the parts being recycled are fromundamaged sections of the vehicle.A recycled original equipment GMpart may be an acceptable choiceto maintain the vehicle's originallydesigned appearance and safetyperformance; however, the historyof these parts is not known. Suchparts are not covered by the GMNew Vehicle Limited Warranty, andany related failures are not coveredby that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts arealso available. These are made bycompanies other than GM and maynot have been tested for the vehicle.

As a result, these parts may fitpoorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems, and may notperform properly in subsequentcollisions. Aftermarket parts are notcovered by the GM New VehicleLimited Warranty, and any vehiclefailure related to such parts is notcovered by that warranty.

Repair Facility

GM also recommends that youchoose a collision repair facility thatmeets your needs before you everneed collision repairs. Your dealermay have a collision repair centerwith GM-trained technicians andstate‐of‐the‐art equipment, or beable to recommend a collisionrepair center that has GM-trainedtechnicians and comparableequipment.



Insuring the Vehicle

Protect your investment in theGM vehicle with comprehensiveand collision insurance coverage.There are significant differencesin the quality of coverage affordedby various insurance policy terms.Many insurance policies providereduced protection to the GMvehicle by limiting compensationfor damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts.Some insurance companieswill not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance,we recommend that you ensurethat the vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collisionparts. If such insurance coverageis not available from your currentinsurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If the vehicle is leased, the leasingcompany may require you to haveinsurance that ensures repairs withGenuine GM Original EquipmentManufacturer (OEM) parts orGenuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read the lease carefully, asyou may be charged at the end ofthe lease for poor quality repairs.

If a Crash Occurs

If there has been an injury, callemergency services for help. Do notleave the scene of a crash until allmatters have been taken care of.Move the vehicle only if its positionputs you in danger, or you areinstructed to move it by a policeofficer.

Give only the necessary informationto police and other parties involvedin the crash.

For emergency towing seeRoadside Assistance Program(U.S. and Canada) on page 13‑8or Roadside Assistance Program(Mexico) on page 13‑10.

Gather the following information:. Driver name, address, and

telephone number.. Driver license number.. Owner name, address, and

telephone number.. Vehicle license plate number.. Vehicle make, model, and

model year.. Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN).. Insurance company and policy

number.. General description of the

damage to the other vehicle.

Choose a reputable repair facilitythat uses quality replacement parts.See “Collision Parts” earlier in thissection.

If the airbag has inflated, see WhatWill You See after an AirbagInflates? on page 3‑27.



Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair Process

In the event that the vehicle requiresdamage repairs, GM recommendsthat you take an active role in itsrepair. If you have a pre-determinedrepair facility of choice, take thevehicle there, or have it towedthere. Specify to the facility thatany required replacement collisionparts be original equipment parts,either new Genuine GM partsor recycled original GM parts.Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by the GM vehiclewarranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair,but you must live with the repair.Depending on your policy limits,your insurance company mayinitially value the repair using

aftermarket parts. Discuss this withthe repair professional, and insiston Genuine GM parts. Remember,if the vehicle is leased, you maybe obligated to have the vehiclerepaired with Genuine GM parts,even if your insurance coveragedoes not pay the full cost.

If another party's insurancecompany is paying for the repairs,you are not obligated to accepta repair valuation based on thatinsurance company's collisionpolicy repair limits, as you haveno contractual limits with thatcompany. In such cases, you canhave control of the repair and partschoices as long as the cost stayswithin reasonable limits.

Service PublicationsOrdering Information

Service Manuals

Service Manuals have the diagnosisand repair information on theengines, transmission, axle,suspension, brakes, electrical,steering, body, etc.

Service Bulletins

Service Bulletins give additionaltechnical service informationneeded to knowledgeably serviceGeneral Motors cars and trucks.Each bulletin contains instructionsto assist in the diagnosis andservice of the vehicle.



Owner Information

Owner publications are writtenspecifically for owners and intendedto provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle.The Owner Manual includes theMaintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio,Owner Manual, and WarrantyBooklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$35.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Without Portfolio: OwnerManual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE:$25.00 (U.S.) plus handling andshipping fees.

Current and Past Models

Technical Service Bulletins andManuals are available for currentand past model GM vehicles.

ORDER TOLL FREE:1-800-551-4123 Monday - Friday8:00 AM - 6:00 PM Eastern Time

For Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visitHelm, Inc. at: www.helminc.com.

Or write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to changewithout notice and without incurringobligation. Allow ample time fordelivery.

All listed prices are quoted inU.S. funds. Make checks payablein U.S. funds.

Reporting SafetyDefects

Reporting Safety Defectsto the United StatesGovernmentIf you believe that your vehiclehas a defect which could causea crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediatelyinform the National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration(NHTSA) in addition to notifyingGeneral Motors.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds thata safety defect exists in a groupof vehicles, it may order a recalland remedy campaign.



However, NHTSA cannotbecome involved in individualproblems between you, yourdealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you maycall the Vehicle Safety Hotlinetoll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; orwrite to:

Administrator, NHTSA1200 New Jersey Avenue, S.E.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain otherinformation about motorvehicle safety fromhttp://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defectsto the CanadianGovernmentIf you live in Canada, and youbelieve that the vehicle has asafety defect, notify TransportCanada immediately, and notifyGeneral Motors of Canada Limited.Call Transport Canada at1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch80 rue NoelGatineau, QC J8Z 0A1

Reporting Safety Defectsto General MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA(or Transport Canada) in a situationlike this, please notify GeneralMotors.

Call 1-800-GMC-8782(1-800-462-8782), or write:

GMC Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, call 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854(French), or write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Care Centre,Mail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7



Vehicle DataRecording andPrivacyThis GM vehicle has a number ofsophisticated computers that recordinformation about the vehicle’sperformance and how it is driven.For example, the vehicle usescomputer modules to monitor andcontrol engine and transmissionperformance, to monitor theconditions for airbag deploymentand deploy airbags in a crash, and,if so equipped, to provide antilockbraking to help the driver control thevehicle. These modules may storedata to help your dealer technicianservice the vehicle. Some modulesmay also store data about how youoperate the vehicle, such as rate offuel consumption or average speed.These modules may also retain theowner’s personal preferences, suchas radio pre-sets, seat positions,and temperature settings.

Event Data RecordersThis vehicle has an Event DataRecorder (EDR). The main purposeof an EDR is to record, in certaincrash or near crash-like situations,such as an airbag deployment orhitting a road obstacle, data thatwill assist in understanding howa vehicle's systems performed.The EDR is designed to record datarelated to vehicle dynamics andsafety systems for a short period oftime, typically 30 seconds or less.The EDR in this vehicle is designedto record such data as:. How various systems in the

vehicle were operating.. Whether or not the driver and

passenger safety belts werebuckled/fastened.

. How far, if at all, the driver waspressing the accelerator and/orbrake pedal.

. How fast the vehicle wastraveling.

This data can help provide a betterunderstanding of the circumstancesin which crashes and injuries occur.

Important: EDR data is recordedby the vehicle only if a non-trivialcrash situation occurs; no data isrecorded by the EDR under normaldriving conditions and no personaldata (e.g., name, gender, age,and crash location) is recorded.However, other parties, such aslaw enforcement, could combinethe EDR data with the type ofpersonally identifying dataroutinely acquired during acrash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR,special equipment is required, andaccess to the vehicle or the EDR isneeded. In addition to the vehiclemanufacturer, other parties, suchas law enforcement, that have thespecial equipment, can read theinformation if they have access tothe vehicle or the EDR.



GM will not access this data orshare it with others except: withthe consent of the vehicle owneror, if the vehicle is leased, with theconsent of the lessee; in responseto an official request by police orsimilar government office; as part ofGM's defense of litigation throughthe discovery process; or, asrequired by law. Data that GMcollects or receives may also beused for GM research needs ormay be made available to others forresearch purposes, where a need isshown and the data is not tied to aspecific vehicle or vehicle owner.

OnStar®

If the vehicle is equipped withan active OnStar system, thatsystem may also record data incrash or near crash‐like situations.The OnStar Terms and Conditionsprovides information on datacollection and use and is availableat www.onstar.com (U.S.) orwww.onstar.ca (Canada), orby pressing theQ button andspeaking to an advisor. See OnStarOverview on page 14‑1 for moreinformation.

Navigation SystemIf the vehicle has a navigationsystem, use of the system mayresult in the storage of destinations,addresses, telephone numbers,and other trip information.Refer to the navigation manualfor information on stored dataand for deletion instructions.

Radio FrequencyIdentification (RFID)RFID technology is used in somevehicles for functions such as tirepressure monitoring and ignitionsystem security, as well as inconnection with conveniencessuch as key fobs for remote doorlocking/unlocking and starting,and in-vehicle transmittersfor garage door openers.



RFID technology in GM vehiclesdoes not use or record personalinformation or link with any otherGM system containing personalinformation.

Radio FrequencyStatementThis vehicle has systems thatoperate on a radio frequency thatcomply with Part 15 of the FederalCommunications Commission (FCC)rules and with Industry CanadaStandards RSS‐GEN/210/220/310.

Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. The device may not causeharmful interference.

2. The device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may causeundesired operation of thedevice.

Changes or modifications to any ofthese systems by other than anauthorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.



2 NOTES


OnStar 14-1

OnStar

OnStar OverviewOnStar Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

OnStar ServicesEmergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Additional InformationOnStar AdditionalInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

OnStar Overview

If equipped, this vehicle has acomprehensive, in-vehicle systemthat can connect to a live Advisorfor Emergency, Security, Navigation,Connection, and DiagnosticServices.

The OnStar system status light isnext to the OnStar buttons. If thestatus light is:. Solid Green: System is ready.. Flashing Green: On a call.. Red: Indicates a problem.

PushQ or call 1‐888‐4‐ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) to speak to anAdvisor.

Push X to:

. Make a call, end a call,or answer an incoming call.

. Give OnStar Hands-Free Callingvoice commands.

. Give OnStar Turn-by-TurnNavigation voice commands.Requires the available Directionsand Connections service plan.


14-2 OnStar

PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor to:. Verify account information or

update contact information.. Get driving directions. Requires

the available Directions andConnections service plan.

. Receive On-DemandDiagnostics for a check on thevehicle’s key operating systems.

. Receive Roadside Assistance.

Push] to get a priority connectionto an Emergency Advisor available24/7 to:. Get help for an emergency.. Be a Good Samaritan or

respond to an AMBER Alert.. Get crisis assistance and

evacuation routes.

OnStar Services

EmergencyWith Automatic Crash Response,the built-in system can automaticallyconnect to help in a crash even ifyou cannot ask for it.

Push] to connect to anEmergency Advisor. GPStechnology is used to identify thevehicle location and can providecritical information to emergencypersonnel. The Advisor is alsotrained to offer critical assistancein emergency situations.

SecurityOnStar provides services like StolenVehicle Assistance, Remote IgnitionBlock, and Roadside Assistance,if the vehicle is equipped withthese services. OnStar can unlockthe vehicle doors remotely, if itis equipped with automatic doorlocks, and can help police locatethe vehicle if it is stolen.

NavigationOnStar navigation requires theDirections and Connectionsservice plan.

PushQ to receive directions orhave them sent to the vehiclenavigation screen. Destinationscan also be forwarded to thevehicle from Google Maps™or MapQuest.com. The OnStarmapping database is continuouslyupdated. Visit www.onstar.comfor coverage maps.

Turn‐by‐Turn Navigation

1. PushQ to connect to a liveAdvisor.

2. Request directions.

3. Directions are downloaded to thevehicle.

4. Follow the voice-guidedcommands.


OnStar 14-3

Using Voice CommandsDuring a Planned Route

Cancel Route

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.Say “Cancel route.” Systemresponds: “Would you like tocancel route directions to yourdestination?”

2. Say “Yes.” System responds:“OK, route canceled.”

3. Say “Goodbye.” Exits voicecommands.

Route Preview

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready,” then a tone.

2. Say “Route Preview.” Systemresponds with the next threemaneuvers.


Repeat


2. Say “Repeat.” System respondswith the last direction given, thenresponds with “OnStar ready,”then a tone.


Get My Destination


2. Say “Get my destination.”System responds with miles tothe destination, then respondswith “OnStar ready,” then a tone.


Other Navigation ServicesAvailable from OnStar

OnStar eNav: Allows subscribersto send destinations from GoogleMaps™ and MapQuest.com totheir Turn-by-Turn Navigation orscreen-based navigation system.When ready, the directions will bedownloaded to the vehicle.

Destination Download:PushQ, then request the Advisorto download directions to thenavigation system in the vehicle.After the call ends, push the “Go”button on the navigation screento begin driving directions.

Destinations can also bedownloaded on the go.For information about eNav,Destination Download,and coverage maps visitwww.onstar.com.


14-4 OnStar

ConnectionsOnStar Hands-Free Calling allowscalls to be made and receivedfrom the vehicle. The vehicle canalso be controlled from a cell phonethrough the OnStar mobile app.See www.onstar.com forcoverage maps.

Hands-Free Calling

1. Push X. System responds:“OnStar ready.”

2. Say “Dial.” System responds:“Please say the name or numberto call.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing, including a “1” andthe area code. Systemresponds: “OK calling.”

Retrieve My Number


2. Say “My Number.” Systemresponds: “Your OnStarHands-Free Calling number is.”

End a Call

Push X. System responds:“Call ended.”

Store a Name Tag for SpeedDialing


2. Say “Store.” System responds:“Please say the number youwould like to store.”

3. Say the entire number withoutpausing. System responds:“Please say the name tag.”

4. Pick a name tag. “Systemresponds: ”About to store <nametag>. Does that sound OK?”

5. Say “Yes” or “No” to try again.System responds: “OK, storing<name tag>.”

Place a Call Using a StoredNumber


2. Say “Call <name tag>.” Systemresponds: “OK, calling<name tag>.”

Verify Minutes and Expiration

Push X and say “minutes” then“verify” to check how many minutesremain and their expiration date.


OnStar 14-5

OnStar Mobile App

With an iPhone® orAndroid™-based mobile device,an OnStar mobile app can bedownloaded. The vehicle canbe remote started, if equipped,or the doors can be unlockedfrom anywhere there is cell phoneservice. It can also check the fuellevel, tire pressure, and oil life.It can connect to an OnStar Advisoranytime. For OnStar mobile appcompatibility or further information,see www.onstar.com.

DiagnosticsOnStar Vehicle Diagnostics willperform a vehicle check everymonth. It will check the engine,transmission, antilock brakes,and major vehicle systems.It also checks the tire pressures,if the vehicle is equipped with theTire Pressure Monitoring System.If a diagnostics check is neededbetween e-mails, pushQ, andan Advisor can run a check.

OnStar AdditionalInformationTransferring Service

PushQ to request account transfereligibility information. The Advisorcan assist in canceling or removingaccount information. If OnStarreceives information that vehicleownership has changed, OnStarmay send a voice message to thevehicle, requesting updated accountinformation.

Reactivation for SubsequentOwners

PushQ and follow the promptsto speak to an Advisor as soon aspossible after acquiring the vehicle.The Advisor will update vehiclerecords and will explain the OnStarservice offers and options available.

How OnStar Service Works

Automatic Crash Response,Emergency Services, Crisis Assist,Stolen Vehicle Assistance, VehicleDiagnostics, Remote Door Unlock,Roadside Assistance, Turn-by-TurnNavigation, and Hands-Free Callingare available on most vehicles.Not all OnStar services areavailable everywhere or on allvehicles. For more information,a full description of OnStarservices, system limitations,and OnStar terms and conditions,see www.onstar.com (U.S.)or www.onstar.ca (Canada);contact OnStar at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1‐888‐466‐7827) or TTY1‐877‐248‐2080; or pushQ tospeak with an Advisor. OnStarservices require a vehicle electricalsystem, wireless service, and GPSsatellite technologies to be availableand operating for features tofunction properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.


14-6 OnStar

OnStar service cannot work unlessyour vehicle is in a place whereOnStar has an agreement witha wireless service provider forservice in that area, and thewireless service provider hascoverage, network capacity,reception, and technologycompatible with OnStar’sservice. Service involving locationinformation about the vehiclecannot work unless GPS signalsare available, unobstructed,and compatible with the OnStarhardware. OnStar service may notwork if the OnStar equipment is notproperly installed or it has not beenproperly maintained. If equipmentor software is added, connected,or modified, OnStar service maynot work. Other problems beyondOnStar’s control may preventservice such as hills, tall buildings,tunnels, weather, electrical systemdesign and architecture of thevehicle, damage to the vehicle in acrash, or wireless phone networkcongestion or jamming.

See Radio FrequencyStatement on page 13‑23 forinformation regarding Part 15of the Federal CommunicationsCommission (FCC) rules andIndustry Canada StandardsRSS-GEN/210/220/310.

Services for People withDisabilities

Advisors provide services to helpsubscribers with physical disabilitiesand medical conditions.

PushQ for help with:

. Locating a gas station with anattendant to pump gas.

. Finding a hotel, restaurant, etc.,that meets accessibility needs.

. Providing directions to theclosest hospital or pharmacy inurgent situations.

TTY Users

OnStar has the ability tocommunicate to the deaf,hard‐of‐hearing, or speech‐impairedcustomers while in the vehicle.The available dealer‐installed TTYsystem can provide in-vehicleaccess to all of the OnStar services,except Virtual Advisor and OnStarTurn‐by‐Turn Navigation.

Onstar.com

The website provides access toaccount information, manages theOnStar subscription, and allowsviewing of videos of each service.Get subscription plan pricingand sign up for OnStar VehicleDiagnostics. Click on the “MyAccount” tab on the home page.


OnStar 14-7

OnStar Personal IdentificationNumber (PIN)

A PIN is needed to access some ofthe OnStar services, like RemoteDoor Unlock and Stolen VehicleAssistance. You will be promptedto change the PIN the first timewhen speaking with an Advisor.To change the OnStar PIN, callOnStar and provide the Advisorwith the current number.

Warranty

OnStar equipment may bewarranted as part of the new-vehiclelimited warranty. The manufacturerof the vehicle furnishes detailedwarranty information.

Languages

The vehicle can be programmedto respond in French or Spanish.PushQ and ask an Advisor.Advisors can speak French orSpanish.

Potential Issues

Some OnStar services are disabledafter five days. OnStar cannotperform Remote Door Unlock orStolen Vehicle Assistance after thevehicle has been off continuouslyfor five days. After five days, OnStarcan contact Roadside Assistanceand a locksmith to help gain accessto the vehicle.

Global PositioningSystem (GPS). Obstruction of the GPS can

occur in a large city with tallbuildings; in parking garages;around airports; in tunnels,underpasses, or parkinggarages; or in an area withvery dense trees. If GPS signalsare not available, the OnStarsystem should still operate tocall OnStar. However, OnStarcould have difficulty identifyingthe exact location.

. In emergency situations, OnStarcan use the last stored GPSlocation to send to emergencyresponders.

. A temporary loss of GPS cancause loss of the ability to senda Turn-by-Turn Navigation route.The Advisor may give a verbalroute or may ask for a call backafter the vehicle is driven into anopen area.


14-8 OnStar

Cellular and GPS Antennas

Avoid placing items over or near theantenna to prevent blocking cellularand GPS signal reception. Cellularreception is required for OnStar tosend remote signals to the vehicle.

Unable to Connect to OnStarMessage

If there is limited cellular coverageor the cellular network has reachedmaximum capacity, this messagemay come on. PushQ to try thecall again or try again after driving afew miles into another cellular area.

Vehicle and Power Issues

OnStar services require a vehicleelectrical system, wireless service,and GPS satellite technologies to beavailable and operating for featuresto function properly. These systemsmay not operate if the battery isdischarged or disconnected.

Add-on Electrical Equipment

The OnStar system is integratedinto the electrical architecture of thevehicle. Do not add any electricalequipment. See Add-On ElectricalEquipment on page 9‑67. Addedelectrical equipment may interferewith the operation of the OnStarsystem and cause it to not operate.

Privacy

The complete OnStar PrivacyStatement may be found atwww.onstar.com. Privacy-sensitiveusers of wireless communicationsare cautioned that the privacy ofany information sent via wirelesscellular communications cannotbe assured. Third parties mayunlawfully intercept or accesstransmissions and privatecommunications without consent.


INDEX i-1

AAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3

Accessory Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28Add-On ElectricalEquipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Additional Information,OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

AdjustmentsLumbar, Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine . . . . . 10-14Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Air Filter, PassengerCompartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Air Vents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5AirbagAdding Equipment to theVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-34

Airbag SystemCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-35How Does an AirbagRestrain? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Passenger SensingSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28

What Makes an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26

Airbag System (cont.)What Will You See after anAirbag Inflates? . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27

When Should an AirbagInflate? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24

Where Are the Airbags? . . . . . .3-23AirbagsPassenger Status Indicator . . .5-12Readiness Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Servicing Airbag-EquippedVehicles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-33

System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21Alarm SystemAnti-theft . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

All-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . 10-28, 9-35AM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8AntennaMulti-band . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13

Anti-theftAlarm System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Alarm System Messages . . . . .5-31

Antilock BrakeSystem (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-35Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Appearance CareExterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86

Assistance Program,Roadside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

Audio Players . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-14MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16

Audio SystemRadio Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Rear Seat (RSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-33Theft-Deterrent Feature . . . . . . . . 7-2

AutomaticClimate Control System . . . . . . . . 8-3Headlamp System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . 9-32Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-33Shift Lock ControlFunction Check . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Auxiliary Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17


i-2 INDEX

BBattery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76Load Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Voltage and ChargingMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Blade Replacement, Wiper . . . 10-30Blind Spot Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17Bluetooth . . . . . . . . . . 7-35, 7-37, 7-41Brake System Warning Light . . . 5-16Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25Antilock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-35Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-37Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Braking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Break-In, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . . 9-23Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Fog Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-35, 6-4Headlamp Aiming . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Headlamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33

Bulb Replacement (cont.)Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

License Plate Lamps . . . . . . . 10-38Taillamps, Turn Signal,Sidemarker, Stoplamps,and Backup Lamps . . . . . . . . 10-35

Buying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61

CCalibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5CaliforniaFuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . .9-55Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2Camera, Rear Vision . . . . . . . . . . 9-48Canadian Vehicle Owners . . . . . . . . iiiCapacities andSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Carbon MonoxideEngine Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10Winter Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

CargoCover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Cautions, Danger, andWarnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-14Center Console Storage . . . . . . . . 4-1Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Charging System Light . . . . . . . . 5-13CheckEngine Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13IgnitionTransmission Lock . . . . . . . . 10-29

Child RestraintsInfants and YoungChildren . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-38

Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . .3-46

Older Children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Securing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51, 3-54Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-41

CleaningExterior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-83Interior Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-86


INDEX i-3

Climate Control Systems . . . . . . . 8-1Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3Heating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Cluster, Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Collision Damage Repair . . . . . 13-16Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Connections, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . 14-4Control of a Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Convex Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-16CoolantEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Engine TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Engine Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Courtesy TransportationProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

CoverCargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9

Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-41Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . 13-6Offices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-5, 13-6Text Telephone (TTY)Users . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13-6

Customer InformationService PublicationsOrdering Information . . . . . . 13-18

Customer SatisfactionProcedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1, 13-3

DDamage Repair, Collision . . . . . 13-16Danger, Warnings, andCautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

Data Recorders, Event . . . . . . . 13-21Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Defensive Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Devices, Auxiliary . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17Diagnostics, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-5

Distracted Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2Dome Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4DoorAjar Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7

Drive Belt Routing, Engine . . . . . 12-4Drive SystemsAll-Wheel Drive . . . . . . . 10-28, 9-35

Driver InformationCenter (DIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

DrivingCharacteristics andTowing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60

Defensive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3Drunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3For Better Fuel Economy . . . . .1-24Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . .9-14If the Vehicle is Stuck . . . . . . . . .9-17Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Off-Road Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5


i-4 INDEX

Driving (cont.)Vehicle Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Wet Roads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12Winter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

DVDRear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-22

EE85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-56ECO Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34Economy ModeFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-34

Electrical Equipment,Add-On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-67

Electrical SystemEngine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Instrument PanelFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

Emergency, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . 14-2

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Check and Service EngineSoon Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13

Compartment Overview . . . . . . .10-6Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17Coolant Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28Coolant TemperatureGauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16Cooling System Messages . . .5-28Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9Drive Belt Routing . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4Exhaust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Power Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Running While Parked . . . . . . . .9-31Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-26

Engine OilLife System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28

Entry Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Equipment, Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-66Event Data Recorders . . . . . . . . 13-21Extender, Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Exterior Lamp Controls . . . . . . . . . 6-1

FFeaturesMemory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9

Filter,Engine Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . 10-14

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Flashers, Hazard Warning . . . . . . 6-3Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Floor Mats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-89FluidAutomatic Transmission . . . . 10-14Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

Fog LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . .10-35, 6-4


INDEX i-5

Forward Collision Alert(FCA) Warning Light . . . . . . . . . 5-18

Front Fog LampLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22

Front SeatsAdjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-53Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-55E85 (85% Ethanol) . . . . . . . . . . .9-56Economy Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Filling a Portable FuelContainer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-59

Filling the Tank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-58Fuels in Foreign Countries . . . .9-55Gasoline Specifications . . . . . . .9-54Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . .5-21Recommended . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54Requirements, California . . . . .9-55System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Fuel EconomyDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-24

Fuel Economy Mode . . . . . . . . . . . 9-34

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Engine CompartmentFuse Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-40

Instrument Panel FuseBlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-43

GGasolineSpecifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54

GaugesEngine CoolantTemperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-10

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Warning Lights andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

General InformationService and Maintenance . . . . . 11-1Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-60Vehicle Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2

Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

HHazard Warning Flashers . . . . . . . 6-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2HeadlampsAiming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-33Daytime RunningLamps (DRL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Headlamps, Front TurnSignal, Sidemarker, andParking Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . .5-22High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lamps On Reminder . . . . . . . . .5-22

Heated Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-17HeaterEngine Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-28

Heating and AirConditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1, 8-3


i-6 INDEX

High-Beam On Light . . . . . . . . . . . 5-22Highway Hypnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13Hill and Mountain Roads . . . . . . . 9-14Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . 9-37Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-13

IIgnition Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-24Ignition Transmission LockCheck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-15Infants and Young Children,Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-38

Infotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iii

JJump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-76

KKey and Lock Messages . . . . . . . 5-29Keyless EntryRemote (RKE) System . . . . . . . . 2-3

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall . . . . . . . . 10-47LampsDaytime Running (DRL) . . . . . . . 6-2Dome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4Exterior Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1License Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-38Malfunction Indicator . . . . . . . . .5-13On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5

Lane Departure Warning . . . . . . . 9-51Lane Departure WarningLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-17

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-14LATCH SystemReplacing Parts after aCrash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-51

LATCH, Lower Anchors andTethers for Children . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

LiftgateCarbon Monoxide . . . . . . . . 2-9, 2-10

LightStabiliTrak® OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

LightingEntry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Illumination Control . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4

LightsAirbag Readiness . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Antilock Brake System(ABS) Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17

Brake System Warning . . . . . . .5-16Charging System . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Cruise Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Engine Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . .5-20Flash-to-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2Front Fog Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21High-Beam On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22


INDEX i-7

Lights (cont.)High/Low Beam Changer . . . . . . 6-2Lane Departure Warning . . . . . .5-17Low Fuel Warning . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Safety Belt Reminders . . . . . . . . 5-11Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Traction Control System(TCS)/StabiliTrak® . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Traction Off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18LocksDoor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8

Loss of Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6Low Fuel Warning Light . . . . . . . . 5-21Lower Anchors andTethers for Children(LATCH System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-46

Lumbar Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5Front Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

MMaintenanceRecords . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Maintenance ScheduleRecommended Fluidsand Lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-12

Malfunction Indicator Lamp . . . . 5-13Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-33Memory Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9Memory Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7MessagesAirbag System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Anti-theft Alarm System . . . . . . .5-31Battery Voltage andCharging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-27Engine Cooling System . . . . . . .5-28Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Engine Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Fuel System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29

Messages (cont.)Key and Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-29Object Detection System . . . . .5-29Ride Control System . . . . . . . . . .5-30Safety Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Service Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Vehicle Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

MirrorsAutomatic DimmingRearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Blind Spot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Convex . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17Manual Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Park Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Monitor System, TirePressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-54

MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16Multi-band Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13


i-8 INDEX

NNavigationVehicle Data Recordingand Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-22

Navigation, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2Net, Convenience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2New Vehicle Break-In . . . . . . . . . . 9-23

OObject Detection SystemMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29

Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5

OilEngine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10Engine Oil Life System . . . . . 10-13Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-28Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20

Older Children, Restraints . . . . . 3-36Online Owner Center . . . . . . . . . . 13-7

OnStar®

Additional Information . . . . . . . .14-5Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-4Diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-5Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-1Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14-2

OnStar® System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-25OrderingService Publications . . . . . . . . 13-18

OutletsPower . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . 10-21Overview, InfotainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Overview, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1

PParkShifting into . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Shifting out of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

Park Tilt Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18

ParkingAssist, Ultrasonic . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-46Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-36Brake and P (Park)Mechanism Check . . . . . . . . 10-29

Over Things That Burn . . . . . . .9-30Passenger Airbag StatusIndicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12

Passenger Compartment AirFilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6

Passenger Sensing System . . . 3-28Perchlorate MaterialsRequirements, California . . . . . 10-3

PersonalizationVehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33

PhoneBluetooth . . . . . . . . . 7-35, 7-37, 7-41

PowerDoor Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6Retained Accessory (RAP) . . .9-28Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20


INDEX i-9

Pregnancy, Using SafetyBelts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19

PrivacyRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . 13-22

ProgramCourtesy Transportation . . . . 13-14

Proposition 65 Warning,California . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2

RRadio FrequencyIdentification (RFID) . . . . . . . . 13-22Statement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-23

RadiosAM-FM Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8Reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13Satellite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10

Reading Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5Rear Seat Audio (RSA)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-33

Rear Seat EntertainmentSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-22Rear Seat Audio (RSA) . . . . . . .7-33

Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-10Rear Vision Camera (RVC) . . . . 9-48

Rear Window Washer/Wiper . . . . 5-5Rearview MirrorAutomatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . .2-19

Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5RecommendedFuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-54

Recommended Fluids andLubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12

RecordsMaintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-15

Recreational VehicleTowing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Reimbursement Program,GM Mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3

Remote Vehicle Start . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39Replacement PartsAirbags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-36Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-14

Replacing Airbag System . . . . . . 3-36Replacing LATCH SystemParts after a Crash . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51

Replacing Safety BeltSystem Parts after a Crash . . . 3-20

Reporting Safety DefectsCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-20General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

RestraintsWhere to Put . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-43

Retained AccessoryPower (RAP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-28

Ride Control SystemsMessages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-30

RoadsDriving, Wet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12

Roadside AssistanceProgram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-8, 13-10

RoofSunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21

Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Routing, Engine Drive Belt . . . . . 12-4Running the Vehicle WhileParked . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-31


i-10 INDEX

SSafety Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19How to Wear Safety BeltsProperly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13

Lap-Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31Reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-11Replacing after a Crash . . . . . .3-20Use During Pregnancy . . . . . . . .3-19

Safety Defects ReportingCanadian Government . . . . . . 13-20General Motors . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-20U.S. Government . . . . . . . . . . . 13-19

Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8Safety System Check . . . . . . . . . . 3-19Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10Scheduling Appointments . . . . . 13-14SeatsAdjustment, Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2Heated Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9Lumbar Adjustment, Front . . . . . 3-5Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7

Seats (cont.)Power Adjustment, Front . . . . . . 3-4Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10Reclining Seatbacks . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5

Securing ChildRestraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-51, 3-54

SecurityLight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-21Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14

Security, OnStar® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-2ServiceAccessories andModifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3

Doing Your Own Work . . . . . . . .10-4Engine Soon Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-13Maintenance Records . . . . . . .11-15Maintenance, GeneralInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Parts Identification Label . . . . .12-1Publications OrderingInformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-18

Scheduling Appointments . . . 13-14Vehicle Messages . . . . . . . . . . . .5-31

Servicing the Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . 3-33Shift Lock Control FunctionCheck, AutomaticTransmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29

ShiftingInto Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-29Out of Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-30

SidemarkerBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Signals, Turn andLane-Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Spare TireCompact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75

Specifications andCapacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2

Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9StabiliTrakOFF Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-39

Start Assist, Hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-37Start Vehicle, Remote . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Starter Switch Check . . . . . . . . . 10-28Starting the Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-26Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4Fluid, Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23Wheel Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2Wheel Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2

Stoplamps and Back-Up LampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35


INDEX i-11

Storage AreasCargo Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Center Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Convenience Net . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2Glove Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1Roof Rack System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17Sun Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivSystemInfotainment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1Roof Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

TTachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9TaillampsBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35

Text Telephone (TTY) Users . . . 13-6Theft-Deterrent Systems . . . . . . . 2-15Immobilizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15

Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6TiresBuying New Tires . . . . . . . . . . . 10-61Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-66Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-68

Tires (cont.)Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-75Designations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-49Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63If a Tire Goes Flat . . . . . . . . . . 10-67Inflation Monitor System . . . . 10-55Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32Pressure Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-20Pressure Monitor System . . . 10-54Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-59Sidewall Labeling . . . . . . . . . . . 10-47Terminology andDefinitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-50

Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Wheel Alignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Wheel Replacement . . . . . . . . 10-65When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

TowingDriving Characteristics . . . . . . . .9-60Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-66General Information . . . . . . . . . .9-60Recreational Vehicle . . . . . . . . 10-80

Towing (cont.)Trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-64Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . .9-67Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

TractionControl System (TCS) . . . . . . . .9-37Control System (TCS)/StabiliTrak® Light . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19

Off Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18TrailerSway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . .9-67

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-64TransmissionAutomatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-32Fluid, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-32

Transportation Program,Courtesy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-14

Turn and Lane-ChangeSignals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Turn SignalBulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . 10-35


i-12 INDEX

UUltrasonic Parking Assist . . . . . . 9-46Uniform Tire QualityGrading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63

Using This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iv

VVehicleCanadian Owners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . iiiControl . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4IdentificationNumber (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Load Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-18Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-26Personalization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-33Reminder Messages . . . . . . . . . .5-33Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-14Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-80

Vehicle CareTire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-53

Vehicle IdentificationService Parts IdentificationLabel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Ventilation, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5Visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

WWarningBrake System Light . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Warning LightForward CollisionAlert (FCA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18

Warning Lights, Gauges, andIndicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7

Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ivCautions and Danger . . . . . . . . . . . .ivHazard Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3

Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24

WheelsAlignment and TireBalance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

Different Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-63Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-65

When It Is Time for NewTires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-60

Where to Put the Restraint . . . . 3-43Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-19Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20

WindshieldWiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3

WinterDriving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-15

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . 10-30WipersRear Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5

Documents

2012 GMC Terrain Owner Manual M - Owner Center Home GMC Terrain Owner Manual M Vehicle Care..... 10-1 General ... when you need to see a service manual for additional instructions